Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
D816
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
MODEL Panaso
nic Panaso
nic
System Components
Model Description
Service Unit KX-TD816E Digital Super Hybrid System (Main Unit)
KX-TD1232E Digital Super Hybrid System (Main Unit)
Telephone KX-T7420E Digital proprietary telephone
KX-T7425E Digital proprietary telephone
KX-T7431E Digital proprietary telephone with 1-line display
KX-T7433E Digital proprietary telephone with 3-line display
KX-T7436E Digital proprietary telephone with 6-line display
KX-T7220E Digital proprietary telephone
KX-T7230E Digital proprietary telephone with 2-line display
KX-T7235E Digital proprietary telephone with 6-line display
KX-T7250E Digital proprietary telephone
KX-T7130E Proprietary telephone with 1-line display
KX-T7020E Proprietary telephone
KX-T7050E Proprietary telephone
Optional KX-T7440E Digital DSS Console
Equipment KX-T7441E Digital Attendant Console
KX-T7240E Digital DSS Console
KX-T7040E DSS Console
KX-TD170E 8-Station Line Unit
KX-TD180E 4-CO Line Unit
KX-TD181E*1 8-CO Line Card
KX-TD182E*2 4-CO Line Card
KX-TD190E Message Unit
KX-TD192E*1 System Inter Connection Card (two cards with Connection Cable)
KX-TD196E*1 Remote Card
KX-TD197E 9600bps Speed Remote Card
KX-TD198E*2 9600bps Speed Remote Unit
KX-TD199E*2 Message Card
KX-TD280E 2-ISDN S0 Line Unit
KX-TD281E*1 4-ISDN S0 Line Card
KX-TD282E*2 2-ISDN S0 Line Card
KX-TD286E 6-ISDN S0 Line Unit
KX-TD290E Primary Rate Interface (PRI) ISDN Expansion Unit
KX-TD142 Cell Station
KX-TD144 Cell Station
KX-TD146 Interface Unit
KX-T30865E Doorphone
KX-A46E Battery Adaptor
System Components Table
Note In this Installation Manual, the suffix “E” of each model number is omitted. The Digital
Super Hybrid System is abbreviated as “DSHS.” The Digital Proprietary Telephone is
abbreviated as “DPT.” Other proprietary telephone (analogue type) is abbreviated as
“APT.” A Single Line Telephone is abbreviated as “SLT.”
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience.
A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug.
Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5
amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is
replaced.
If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local Panasonic Dealer.
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN
YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF
AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY.
THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS
INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMP SOCKET.
If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as shown below.
If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician.
WARNING : THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
IMPORTANT : The wires in this mains leads are coloured in accordance with the following
code:
Green-and-yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the
coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the
plug which is marked with the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or
GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is
marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
How to replace the fuse : Open the-fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse
and fuse cover.
3
Important Information
This equipment should be used on PSTN lines requiring 2-wire Loop calling unguarded clearing
with Loop Disconnect or DTMF address signalling.
The equipment must be connected to direct extension lines and a payphone should not be
connected as an extension.
Satisfactory performance can not be guaranteed for every allowed combination of host and
subsidiary apparatus.
999 and 112 can be dialled on the apparatus after accessing the CO line for the purpose of
making outgoing calls to the BT emergency (999) and (112) service.
During dialling, this apparatus may tinkle the bells of other telephones using the same line. This
is not a fault and we advise you not to call Fault Repair Service.
Caution:
Do not push the PAUSE button more than twice following the initial access digit (or digits).
Failure to comply with this requirement may result in unsatisfactory operation.
Notice:
This PBX should only be used on B•T lines on which specific BT services or facilities are
provided.
CAUTION
4
Attention
• The apparatus is designed to be installed and operated under controlled conditions
of ambient temperature and a relative humidity not greater than 60%.
• Avoid installing the apparatus in damp or humid environments, such as bathrooms
or swimming pools.
• The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices
such as fluorescent lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can
interfere with the performance of the Digital Super Hybrid System.
• This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40˚C /
104˚F) and vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc. into the vents or other holes of this unit.
• If there is any trouble, disconnect the unit from the telephone line. Plug a single
line telephone directly into the telephone line. If the telephone operates properly,
do not reconnect your system to the line until the system has been repaired. If the
telephone does not operate properly, chances are that the problem is in the
telephone network, and not in your system.
• Do not use benzine, thinner, or the like, or any abrasive powder to clean the
cabinet. Wipe it with a soft cloth.
• The ISDN Line Units/Cards are in accordance with the European
Telecommunication Standards (ETS). If your telephone company provides an ISDN
service which follows standards other than ETS, some ISDN features may not work
properly. (E.g. Charge Fee Reference, CLIP, COLP, etc.)
WARNING
THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVED BY QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS
BECOMING ACCESSIBLE, DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD
IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER.
DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING
THE POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT,
AND RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST.
THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG. FOR
SAFETY REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN
EARTHING CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED
ACCORDING TO REGULATIONS.
THE POWER SOCKET WALL OUTLET SHOULD BE LOCATED NEAR
THIS EQUIPMENT AND BE EASILY ACCESSIBLE.
TO PREVENT RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE
THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
5
Attention
The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the bottom
of the unit. You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided
and retain this book as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification
in the event of theft.
MODEL NO.:
SERIAL NO.:
DATE OF PURCHASE
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER’S ADDRESS
Warning 73/23/EEC
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment 89/336/EEC
this product may cause radio interference in which case 92/31/EEC
the user may be required to take adequate measures. 93/68/EEC
KX-TD816 KX-TD1232
6
Introduction
This Installation Manual provides technical information for the Panasonic Digital
Super Hybrid System, KX-TD816/KX-TD1232. It is designed to serve as an overall
technical reference for the system and includes a description of the system, its
hardware and software, features and services and environmental requirements.
Section 2, Installation.
Contains the basic system installation and wiring instructions, as well as how to
install the optional cards and units.
Section 3, Features.
Describes all the basic, optional and programmable features in alphabetical order. It
also provides information about the programming required, conditions, connection
references, related features and operation for every feature.
Section 5, List.
Lists tone/ring tone and default values of system programming.
Section 6, Troubleshooting.
Provides information for system and telephone troubleshooting.
NOTE
The following documents may be used in conjunction with this manual:
• User Manual for KX-TD816/KX-TD1232 System, DIGITAL Proprietary Telephones,
Console, DECT Portable Station and Single Line Telephones
• Programming Table
The programming table is designed to be used as a hard copy reference to the user-
programmed data.
7
Installation Manual Contents
Section 1 System Outline
1.1 System Highlights ............................................................................. 1-2
1.2 Basic System Construction .............................................................. 1-4
1.3 Proprietary Telephones .................................................................... 1-5
1.4 Options............................................................................................... 1-6
1.5 Specifications..................................................................................... 1-11
1.5.1 General Description................................................................. 1-11
1.5.2 Characteristics ......................................................................... 1-12
1.5.3 System Capacity...................................................................... 1-13
1.5.4 Ports......................................................................................... 1-15
Section 2 Installation
2.1 Before Installation ............................................................................ 2-2
2.2 Installation of the Main Unit ........................................................... 2-4
2.2.1 Unpacking ............................................................................... 2-4
2.2.2 Name and Location ................................................................. 2-4
2.2.3 Wall Mounting......................................................................... 2-6
2.2.4 Frame Earth Connection.......................................................... 2-7
2.2.5 Opening Front Cover............................................................... 2-7
2.3 Connection......................................................................................... 2-8
2.3.1 System Connection Diagram................................................... 2-8
2.3.2 Extension Connection
for Proprietary Telephones, Single Line Telephones and Consoles .......... 2-10
2.3.3 Parallelled Telephone Connection
for a Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone ........................ 2-15
2.3.4 EXtra Device Port (XDP) Connection
for a Digital Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone ............ 2-17
2.3.5 External Pager Connection...................................................... 2-18
2.3.6 External Music Source Connection......................................... 2-20
2.3.7 Printer Connection .................................................................. 2-22
2.4 Optional Cards and Units Installation ........................................... 2-25
2.4.1 Location of Optional Cards and Units..................................... 2-25
2.4.2 CO Line Connection (Optional Card) ..................................... 2-28
2.4.3 Lightning Protector Installation .............................................. 2-33
2.4.4 CO Line Connection (Optional Unit)...................................... 2-36
2.4.5 Extension Connection (Optional Unit).................................... 2-36
2.4.6 Installing Expansion Unit........................................................ 2-37
2.4.7 Internal ISDN S0 Line Connection ......................................... 2-42
2.4.8 Remote Card Installation*1...................................................... 2-45
2.4.9 9600bps Speed Remote Unit*2 / Message Unit Installation...... 2-46
2.4.10 9600bps Speed Remote Card / Message Card*2 Installation .... 2-48
Section 3 Features
A Absent Message Capability ................................................................ 3-2
Account Code Entry ........................................................................... 3-3
Alert Indication................................................................................... 3-4
Alternate Calling – Ring / Voice......................................................... 3-5
Answering, Direct CO Line................................................................ 3-6
Automatic Adjust Time ...................................................................... 3-6
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) ............................................... 3-7
Automatic Configuration.................................................................... 3-8
Automatic Overflow and Hurry-Up Transfer ..................................... 3-8
Automatic Redial → Redial, Automatic............................................. 3-144
Automatic Station Release.................................................................. 3-9
B Background Music (BGM)................................................................. 3-10
Background Music (BGM) – External ............................................... 3-10
Budget Management........................................................................... 3-11
Busy Lamp Field ................................................................................ 3-12
Busy Station Signalling (BSS) ........................................................... 3-12
Button, Direct Station Selection (DSS) .............................................. 3-13
Button, Flexible .................................................................................. 3-14
Button, Group-CO (G-CO)................................................................. 3-16
Button, Loop-CO (L-CO) ................................................................... 3-17
Button, Single-CO (S-CO) ................................................................. 3-18
Buttons on Proprietary Telephones..................................................... 3-19
C Caller ID ............................................................................................. 3-22
CALL FORWARDING FEATURES – SUMMARY ......................... 3-23
Call Forwarding – All Calls................................................................ 3-24
Call Forwarding – Busy...................................................................... 3-24
Call Forwarding – Busy / No Answer ................................................ 3-25
Call Forwarding – Follow Me ............................................................ 3-25
Call Forwarding – No Answer............................................................ 3-26
Call Forwarding – to CO Line............................................................ 3-27
Call Forwarding – by ISDN Line ....................................................... 3-28
Call Forwarding – from Hunting Group............................................. 3-28
10
Installation Manual Contents
Directed Call Pickup → Call Pickup, Directed .................................. 3-38
Display, Call Information ................................................................... 3-62
Display, Extension Programmed Data................................................ 3-63
Display, Self-Extension Number ........................................................ 3-64
Display, Time and Date ...................................................................... 3-65
Display Contrast Adjustment.............................................................. 3-65
Do Not Disturb (DND) ....................................................................... 3-66
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call......................................... 3-67
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override........................................................ 3-67
Door Opener ....................................................................................... 3-68
Doorphone Call................................................................................... 3-69
Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line............................................ 3-70
E Electronic Station Lockout ................................................................. 3-71
Emergency Call .................................................................................. 3-72
End-to-End DTMF Signalling (Tone Through).................................. 3-72
Exclusive Hold → Call Hold, Exclusive – CO Line / Intercom......... 3-30 / 31
Extension Connection Assignment..................................................... 3-73
Extension Group ................................................................................. 3-73
External Feature Access ..................................................................... 3-74
EXtra Device Port (XDP) ................................................................... 3-75
F Flexible Button → Button, Flexible ................................................... 3-14
Flexible Numbering............................................................................ 3-76
Floating Station .................................................................................. 3-79
Full One-Touch Dialling..................................................................... 3-80
G Group Call Pickup → Call Pickup, Group ......................................... 3-39
Group CO (G-CO) Button → Button, Group-CO (G-CO)................. 3-16
H Handset / Headset Selection ............................................................... 3-81
Handset Microphone Mute ................................................................. 3-81
Handsfree Answerback....................................................................... 3-82
Handsfree Operation........................................................................... 3-82
Hold Recall ......................................................................................... 3-83
Host PBX Access................................................................................ 3-84
HOTEL APPLICATION .................................................................... 3-85
Check-In / Check-Out......................................................................................... 3-85
Room Management............................................................................................. 3-86
Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call) ........................................................ 3-86
Hunting Group.................................................................................... 3-87
I Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) ..................................... 3-88
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Extension .................... 3-90
Intercept Routing ................................................................................ 3-93
Intercom Calling ................................................................................. 3-94
11
Installation Manual Contents
L Last Number Redial → Redial, Last Number .................................... 3-144
Least Cost Routing (LCR).................................................................. 3-95
LED Indication, CO Line ................................................................... 3-106
LED Indication, Intercom................................................................... 3-107
Limited Call Duration......................................................................... 3-108
Line Access, Automatic...................................................................... 3-108
Line Access, CO Line Group ............................................................. 3-109
Line Access, Direct............................................................................. 3-110
Line Access, Individual ...................................................................... 3-111
Line Preference – Incoming (No Line / Prime Line / Ringing Line) ... 3-112
Line Preference – Outgoing (Idle Line / No Line / Prime Line) ........ 3-113
Live Call Screening (LCS) ................................................................. 3-114
Lockout............................................................................................... 3-115
Log-In / Log-Out ................................................................................ 3-116
Loop-CO (L-CO) Button → Button, Loop-CO (L-CO)..................... 3-17
M Manager Extension ............................................................................. 3-117
Message Waiting................................................................................. 3-117
Microphone Mute ............................................................................... 3-118
Mixed Station Capacities.................................................................... 3-119
Module Expansion.............................................................................. 3-120
Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSN) Ringing Service ..................... 3-121
Music on Hold .................................................................................... 3-122
N Night Service ...................................................................................... 3-123
No Reply Group.................................................................................. 3-124
Notebook Function ............................................................................. 3-125
O Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) ............................................ 3-126
Off-Hook Monitor .............................................................................. 3-126
One-Touch Dialling ............................................................................ 3-127
One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button................................................... 3-128
Operator .............................................................................................. 3-129
Operator Call ...................................................................................... 3-130
Outgoing Message (OGM) ................................................................. 3-131
P PAGING FEATURES – SUMMARY ................................................ 3-132
Paging – All ........................................................................................ 3-132
Paging – External................................................................................ 3-133
Paging – Group................................................................................... 3-134
Parallelled Telephone ......................................................................... 3-135
Pause Insertion, Automatic................................................................. 3-136
Phantom Extension ............................................................................. 3-137
Pickup Dialling ................................................................................... 3-138
Power Failure Restart ......................................................................... 3-138
12
Installation Manual Contents
Power Failure Transfer ....................................................................... 3-139
Predial................................................................................................. 3-140
Private Call ......................................................................................... 3-140
Pulse to Tone Conversion ................................................................... 3-141
Q Quick Dialling .................................................................................... 3-142
R Recall .................................................................................................. 3-143
Redial, Automatic .............................................................................. 3-144
Redial, Last Number .......................................................................... 3-144
Redial, Saved Number ....................................................................... 3-145
Remote Station Lock Control ............................................................. 3-146
Reverse Circuit ................................................................................... 3-146
Ringing, Delayed ................................................................................ 3-147
Ringing, Discriminating ..................................................................... 3-147
Ring Group ......................................................................................... 3-148
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons............................................. 3-149
Ringing Tone Selection for Intercom Calls ........................................ 3-149
S Saved Number Redial → Redial, Saved Number............................... 3-145
Screened Call Transfer – to CO Line
→ Call Transfer, Screened – to CO Line .................................. 3-41
Screened Call Transfer – to Extension
→ Call Transfer, Screened – to Extension ................................ 3-41
Secret Dialling .................................................................................... 3-150
Single-CO (S-CO) Button → Button, Single-CO (S-CO) ................. 3-18
Special Display Features .................................................................... 3-151
CO Outgoing Call Log ....................................................................................... 3-151
Extension Dialling .............................................................................................. 3-152
Station Speed Dialling ........................................................................................ 3-152
System Feature Access Menu............................................................................. 3-153
System Speed Dialling........................................................................................ 3-154
Station Hunting................................................................................... 3-155
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ...................................... 3-157
Station Program Clear ........................................................................ 3-160
Station Programming.......................................................................... 3-161
Station Programming Data Default Set .............................................. 3-162
Station Speed Dialling ........................................................................ 3-163
* System Connection ............................................................................. 3-164
System Data Default Set..................................................................... 3-165
System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer.......... 3-165
System Programming with Proprietary Telephone............................. 3-167
System Speed Dialling........................................................................ 3-168
System Working Report...................................................................... 3-169
14
Installation Manual Contents
[016] Charge Rate Assignment........................................................... 4-35.2
[017] TD286 Extension Number Set .................................................. 4-35.4
[018] TD286 Extension Name Set...................................................... 4-35.6
[019] Budget Management on TD286 Port ........................................ 4-35.7
[021]–[022] Doorphone Call Forwarding — Day / Night................. 4-35.8
4.3 System Programming ....................................................................... 4-36
[100] Flexible Numbering .................................................................. 4-36
[101] Day / Night Service Switching Mode ....................................... 4-39
[102] Day / Night Service Starting Time............................................ 4-40
[103] Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment ....................... 4-42.0
[104] Quick Dial Assignment ............................................................. 4-42.1
[105] Account Codes .......................................................................... 4-43
[106] Station Hunting Type ................................................................ 4-44
[107] System Password....................................................................... 4-45
[108] One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button ......................................... 4-46
[109] Expansion Card / Unit Type...................................................... 4-47
[110] Network Type Assignment........................................................ 4-49
[111] ISDN DDI / MSN Removed Digit / Added Number Assignment ... 4-50
[113] VM Status DTMF Set ............................................................... 4-51
[114] VM Command DTMF Set ........................................................ 4-53
[115] Adjust Time............................................................................... 4-55
[116] ROM Version Display ............................................................... 4-56
[117] Charge Display Selection .......................................................... 4-57
[118] Charge Fee Reference Extension Assignment .......................... 4-58
[119] Charge Fee Reference ID Code Set .......................................... 4-59
[120] User Password........................................................................... 4-60
[121] Pulse Dial Reception Assignment............................................. 4-61
[122] Automatic Door Open Assignment........................................... 4-62
[123] Hotel Application ...................................................................... 4-63
[125] Assignment of Denomination ................................................... 4-64
[126] Voice Mail Number Assignment ............................................... 4-65
[127] Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment .............................. 4-67
[128] Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment................................. 4-68
[129] Operator Queue ......................................................................... 4-69.0
[130] Phantom Extension Number Assignment ................................. 4-69.1
[131] Hunting Group Assignment ...................................................... 4-69.2
[132] Hunting Group Name Assignment............................................ 4-69.3
[133] Hunting Overflow ..................................................................... 4-69.4
[134]–[135] Hunting Intercept — Day / Night................................... 4-69.6
[137]–[138] UCD Time Table Assignment — Day / Night .............. 4-69.7
[139] UCD Time Table ....................................................................... 4-69.8
15
Installation Manual Contents
[148] Off-Hook Monitor ..................................................................... 4-69.9
[150] ISDN DDI Translation Table .................................................... 4-69.10
[151]–[152] ISDN DDI Ringing Assignment — Day / Night........... 4-69.11
[153] Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) ..................... 4-69.13
4.4 Timer Programming......................................................................... 4-70
[200] Hold Recall Time ...................................................................... 4-70
[201] Transfer Recall Time................................................................. 4-71
[202] Call Forwarding – No Answer Time......................................... 4-72
[203] Intercept Time ........................................................................... 4-73
[204] Pickup Dial Waiting Time......................................................... 4-74
[205] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time............................... 4-75
[207] First Digit Time......................................................................... 4-76
[208] Inter Digit Time......................................................................... 4-77
[209] Automatic Redial Repeat Times ............................................... 4-78
[210] Automatic Redial Interval Time................................................ 4-79
[211] Dial Start Time .......................................................................... 4-80
[212] Call Duration Count Start Time ................................................ 4-81
[214] Message Waiting Ring Interval Time........................................ 4-82
[215] Ring-Off Detection Time .......................................................... 4-83.0
[216] Outgoing Message Time ........................................................... 4-83.1
[217] Timed Reminder Alarm Ring Time .......................................... 4-83.2
[218] Doorphone-to-CO Line Call Duration Time............................. 4-83.3
4.5 TRS Programming ........................................................................... 4-84
[301]–[305] TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6............ 4-84
[306]–[310] TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6......... 4-85
[311] Emergency Dial Number Set .................................................... 4-86
4.6 CO Line Programming .................................................................... 4-87
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment ............................................. 4-87
[401] CO Line Group Assignment ..................................................... 4-88
[402] Dial Mode Selection.................................................................. 4-89
[403] Pulse Speed Selection ............................................................... 4-91
[404] DTMF Time .............................................................................. 4-92
[405] CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set ......................................... 4-93
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night ................................. 4-95
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day / Night................................ 4-96
[411] Host PBX Access Codes ........................................................... 4-97
[412] Pause Time ................................................................................ 4-99
[413] Register Recall Signal Time...................................................... 4-100
[414] Disconnect Time ....................................................................... 4-101
[415] CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set ......................................... 4-102
[416] Reverse Circuit Assignment...................................................... 4-103
16
Installation Manual Contents
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment ............................................... 4-104
[420]/[429] ISDN Ring Service Assignment — Day / Night............. 4-105
[421] CO Line Name Assignment ...................................................... 4-106
[422] ISDN Port Type......................................................................... 4-107
[423] ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode ...................................................... 4-108
[424] ISDN Configuration .................................................................. 4-109
[425] ISDN Data Link Mode .............................................................. 4-110
[426] ISDN TEI Mode........................................................................ 4-111
[427] ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number ......................... 4-112
[428] ISDN Extension Progress Tone................................................. 4-113.0
[437] Multiple Subscriber Number Set............................................... 4-113.1
[438]–[439] Extension Ringing Assignment
— Day / Night for ISDN MSN ................................................. 4-113.2
[440] TD286 ISDN Port Type ............................................................ 4-113.4
[441] TD286 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode.......................................... 4-113.5
[442] TD286 ISDN Configuration...................................................... 4-113.6
[443] TD286 ISDN Data Link Mode.................................................. 4-113.7
[444] TD286 ISDN TEI Mode............................................................ 4-113.8
[445] TD286 ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number ............. 4-113.9
[446] TD286 ISDN Extension Progress Tone .................................... 4-113.10
4.7 COS Programming ........................................................................... 4-114
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night............................ 4-114
[502] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit .............................. 4-115
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line........................................................... 4-116
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line ..................................................... 4-117
[507] Do Not Disturb Override........................................................... 4-118
[508] Account Code Entry Mode........................................................ 4-119
[509]–[510] Toll Restriction Level
for System Speed Dialling — Day / Night................................ 4-120
[511] Door Opener Access ................................................................. 4-121
[513] Night Service Access ................................................................ 4-122
[514] Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call ............................... 4-123
[516] Calling Line Identification Restriction...................................... 4-124
[517] Connected Line Identification Restriction ................................ 4-125.0
[518] CFU / CFB / CFNR Assignment............................................... 4-125.1
[519] Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) ................................... 4-125.2
[520] Call Forwarding from Hunting Group ...................................... 4-125.3
[521] Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line .................................. 4-125.4
4.8 Extension Programming .................................................................. 4-126
[600] EXtra Device Port ..................................................................... 4-126
[601] Class of Service......................................................................... 4-127
17
Installation Manual Contents
[602] Extension Group Assignment ................................................... 4-128
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
— Day / Night........................................................................... 4-129
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
— Day / Night........................................................................... 4-131
[607]–[608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night ........... 4-133
[609] Voice Mail Access Codes.......................................................... 4-135
[611] Extension Connection Assignment ........................................... 4-136
[612] Data Line Security..................................................................... 4-137
[613] ISDN Class of Service .............................................................. 4-138
[615]–[616] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
— Day / Night for ISDN Extension.......................................... 4-139
[617] Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment................... 4-141
[620]–[621] Extension Intercept Routing — Day / Night.................. 4-142.0
[622] Incoming Call Display .............................................................. 4-142.1
[623] CLIP / COLP Number Assignment for Extension.................... 4-142.2
[624] CLIP / COLP Number Assignment for ISDN Extension.......... 4-142.3
[627] TD286 Class of Service ............................................................ 4-142.4
[629]–[630] Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment
— Day / Night for TD286 Extension........................................ 4-142.5
[632] CLIP / COLP Number Assignment for TD286 Extension........ 4-142.7
4.9 LCR Programming........................................................................... 4-143
[7000] LCR Mode .............................................................................. 4-143
[7002] BTL Access Code ................................................................... 4-145
[7003] Itemized Code Set ................................................................... 4-146.0
[7004] Internal ISDN Itemized Code Set ........................................... 4-146.1
[7005] TD286 Internal ISDN Itemized Code Set............................... 4-146.2
[7X01] LCR Leading Digit Entry ...................................................... 4-147
[7X11] LCR Time and Fee Set .......................................................... 4-149
[7X20] LCR Exceptional Code Set .................................................... 4-151
[7X21] LCR Carrier Code .................................................................. 4-153
[7X22] LCR Carrier Modify Command............................................. 4-154
[7X23] LCR CO Line Group Assignment.......................................... 4-155
[7X24] Authorization Code Set.......................................................... 4-156
4.10 Resource Programming.................................................................... 4-157
[800] SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call Log Printout........................ 4-157
[801] SMDR Format........................................................................... 4-158
[802] System Data Printout ................................................................ 4-159
[803] Music Source Use ..................................................................... 4-160
[804] External Pager BGM ................................................................. 4-161
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone............................................ 4-162
18
Installation Manual Contents
[806]–[807] EIA (RS-232C) Parameters — Port 1 / Port 2 ............... 4-163
[813] Floating Number Assignment ................................................... 4-165
[814] Modem Standard ....................................................................... 4-167.0
[817] TD197 Baud Rate Set ............................................................... 4-167.1
[818] Timed Reminder Message Assignment..................................... 4-167.2
4.11 Option Programming ....................................................................... 4-168
[990] System Additional Information................................................. 4-168
[991] COS Additional Information..................................................... 4-176
Section 5 List
5.1 Tone / Ring Tone ............................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Default Values ................................................................................... 5-4
Section 6 Troubleshooting
6.1 Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 6-2
6.1.1 Installation................................................................................. 6-2
6.1.2 Connection ................................................................................ 6-3
6.1.3 Operation................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.4 Using Reset Button ................................................................... 6-5
19
Installation Manual Contents
8.4 DECT PS System Programming ..................................................... 8-40
DECT PS System Programming Conditions ...................................... 8-40
[020] PS Flexible CO Button Assignment.......................................... 8-41
[650] PS Registration.......................................................................... 8-43
[651] PS Termination.......................................................................... 8-46
[653] PS Extension Name Set............................................................. 8-48
[654] SXDP Assignment .................................................................... 8-49
[655] PS Budget Management............................................................ 8-50
[656] PS Charge Verification Assignment.......................................... 8-51
[657] PS Class of Service ................................................................... 8-52
[658] PS Extension Group Assignment .............................................. 8-53
[659]–[660] PS DIL 1:N Extension — Day / Night........................... 8-54
[661]–[662] PS Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
— Day / Night........................................................................... 8-56
[663]–[664] PS Doorphone Ringing Assignment
— Day / Night........................................................................... 8-58
[665] PS Voice Mail Access Codes .................................................... 8-59
[667] PS Extension Connection Assignment...................................... 8-60
[668] PS Data Line Security ............................................................... 8-61
[671] PS Extension Number Set ......................................................... 8-62
[672] PS Password Set........................................................................ 8-64
[673] PS CLIP / COLP Number Assignment ..................................... 8-65
[674]–[675] PS Extension Intercept Routing — Day / Night ............ 8-66
[676] PS Incoming Call Display......................................................... 8-67
[677] PS Itemized Code Set................................................................ 8-68
[680] Cell Station Number Assignment for Master CS...................... 8-69
[681] PS Radio System ID Reference................................................. 8-70
[682] Radio Information Data Clear................................................... 8-71
8.5 Template for the Cell Station........................................................... 8-72
20
Section 1
System Outline
This section provides general information on the system,
including system capacity and specifications.
1.1 System Highlights
System Capacity Basic Module System
System Expansion Connection
KX-TD816
CO line (ISDN S0 line) 0 8 (4) —
Extension 8 16 —
KX-TD1232
CO line (ISDN S0 line) 0 12 (6) 24 (12)
Extension 16 32 64
Module Expansion
Expansion modules are used to increase the system capacity. CO
line modules and extension modules can be added to the basic
system to add CO lines, ISDN S0 lines and extensions.
System Connection*
With the addition of optional System Inter Connection Card, two
Digital Super Hybrid Systems can be connected together to expand
the system capacity. The two systems function as one, however,
some functions such as paging and music on hold are duplicated.
Budget Management
Limits the telephone usage to a pre-assigned amount.
Hotel Application
Allows to handle the front and operator services such as check-
in/check-out and wake-up call setting.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYST
EM
D816
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYST
EM
Panaso Panaso
nic nic
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
D816
DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic
Panasonic
D816
DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic
Panasonic
4CO/ISDN
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic Panasonic
Connection Cable
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic
Central
Office
Telephone Line
Personal Computer with modem
Panasonic
Central
Office
Telephone Line
Personal Computer
with Modem
Be sure not to install these unit and card at the same time.
Panasonic
Central
Office
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic
DIGI
TAL
Pana
sonic
DIGITA
L
Panaso
nic
Panasonic
Paired
PairedTelephone
Telephone Console
DSS Console
(Digital Proprietary
(Proprietary KX-T7240/
Telephone)
Telephone) KX-T7040
Pair
Pair
Doorphone (KX-T30865)
This system supports two doorphones and two door openers. The
doorphone is an option.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic Panasonic
Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2
Panasonic
Door Door
Opener 1 Opener 2
1.5.2 Characteristics
Station Loop Limit KX-T7420 / KX-T7425 / KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 /
KX-T7220 / KX-T7230 / KX-T7235 / KX-T7250 / KX-T7020 /
KX-T7050 / KX-T7130 ...........................40 ohms
Single Line Telephone .............................600 ohms including set
Doorphone................................................20 ohms
KX-TD1232
Max. Quantity
Item KX-TD816 Single System
Max. Quantity System Connection
System Inter
Connection Card — — 2
Service Unit 1 1 2
8-CO Line Card or — 1 2
4-ISDN S0 Line Card
4-CO Line Card or 1 — —
2-ISDN S0 Line Card
4-CO Line Unit, 1 1 2
2-ISDN S0 Line Unit or
6-ISDN S0 Line Unit
CO Line 8 12 24
ISDN S0 Line (Basic Rate Interface) 4 6 12
8-Station Line Unit 1 2 4
Extension Jack 16 32 64
Station Terminal 32 64 128
(including DSS Consoles)
{DSS Console} {4} {8} {16}
Remote Card — 1 2
9600bps Speed Remote Card* — 1 2
9600bps Speed Remote Unit 1 — —
Message Card** 1 — —
Message Unit — 1 2
*: 9600bps Speed Remote Card cannot be installed directly in KX-TD816, but can be installed in the
Message Unit (KX-TD190) and then to the KX-TD816.
**: Message Card cannot be installed directly in KX-TD816, but can be installed in the 9600bps Speed
Remote Unit (KX-TD198) and then to the KX-TD816.
System Data
Installation Precautions
This set is exclusively made for wall mounting only. Avoid
installing in the following places. (Doing so may result in
malfunction, noise, or discoloration.)
1. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places. (Temperature
range: 0°C – 40°C / 32°F – 104°F)
2. Sulfuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs,
etc. may damage the equipment or contacts.
3. Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.
4. Dusty places, or places where water or oil may come into
contact with the unit.
5. Near high-frequency generating devices such as sewing
machines or electric welders.
6. On or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment, as well
as microwave ovens or air conditioners. (It is preferable not to
install in the same room with the above equipment.)
7. Install at least 1.8 m from radios and televisions. (both the main
unit and proprietary telephones)
8. Do not obstruct area around the main unit (for reasons of
maintenance and inspection — be especially careful to allow
space for cooling above and at the sides of the main unit).
Wiring Precautions
Make sure to keep the following instructions when wiring.
1. Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel with an AC power
source, computer, telex, etc. If the cables are run near those
wires, shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded cables
and ground the shields.
2. If cables are run on the floor, use protectors or the like to protect
2-2 Installation
2.1 Before Installation
the wires where they may be stepped on. Avoid wiring under
carpets.
3. Avoid using the same power supply outlet for computers,
telexes, and other office equipment. Otherwise, the system
operation may be interrupted by the induction noise from such
equipment.
4. Please use one pair telephone wire for extension connection of
(telephone) equipment such as single line telephones, data
terminals, answering machines, computers, voice processing
systems, etc., except proprietary telephones (e.g. KX-T7235,
KX-T7436).
5. The Power Switch of the system must be off during wiring.
After all the wirings are completed, turn the Power Switch on.
6. Mis-wiring may cause the system to operate improperly. Refer
to Section 6.1.1 “Installation” and Section 6.1.2 “Connection.”
7. If an extension does not operate properly, disconnect the
telephone from the extension line and then connect again, or turn
off the Power Switch of the system and then on again.
8. The system is equipped with a 3-wire grounding type plug. This
is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the
outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet.
Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding-type plug.
9. Use twisted pair cable for CO line connection.
10. CO lines should be installed with lightning protectors. For
details, refer to Section 2.4.3 “Lightning Protector Installation.”
4CO/ISDN
Installation 2-3
2.2 Installation of the Main Unit
2.2.1 Unpacking
When you unpack the main unit, the following components should
be included:
KX-TD816 KX-TD1232 Service Part No.
Main Unit one one
AC Cord one one PQJA10045Z
Templet one one TD1232:PQQX10176Y
TD816:PQQX10171Y
Screw three four PQHE5008Z
Pager Connector two two PQJP1E2Z
Music Source Connector two two PQJE1E1Z
Expansion line cord holder one one PQHR10113Z1
6-pin plugs for extension connection eight sixteen PQJSO6SO8Z
4-pin plugs for doorphone or
two two PQJSO4SO8Z
door opener connection
Overlay one one PQGD10124W
Installation Manual one one PSQX1047*
User Manual one one PSQX1848*
Earth Terminal
D816
DIGITAL SUPER
EIA(RS-232C)
HYBRID SYSTE
M
AC Inlet AC Inlet
2-4 Installation
2.2 Installation of the Main Unit
Inside View of the Main Unit
KX-TD816
Extension Connectors
Paging Jack 2
Paging Jack 1
External Music Jack 2
External Music Jack 1
4CO/ISDN System Clear Switch
Reset Button
Door Opener and
Doorphone Connectors
Front Cover
Extension Connectors
SYSTEM INTER
CONNECTION
Paging Jack 2
Paging Jack 1
External Music Jack 2
External Music Jack 1
8CO/ISDN
Front Cover
Installation 2-5
2.2.3 Wall Mounting
This set is made exclusively for wall mounting. The wall must be
able to support the weight of the main unit. If screws other than the
ones supplied are used, they must have the same diameter as the
ones enclosed.
Templet Templet
2. Install the three screws (included) into 2. Install the four screws (included) into the
the wall. wall.
Wooden Wooden
Wall Wall
3. Hook the main unit on the screw heads. 3. Hook the main unit on the screw heads.
2-6 Installation
2.2 Installation of the Main Unit
2.2.4 Frame Earth Connection
IMPORTANT!!!
You must connect the frame of the main unit to Earth.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYSTE
M
D816
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYSTE
M
Panas
onic To ground
Earth
To
ToEarth
Earth
D1232
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYST
EM
D816
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYSTE
M
Screw
A
Screw
A
Screw
Panas
onic
Screw
Panas
onic
Installation 2-7
2.3 Connection
2.3.1 System Connection Diagram
D1232
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYSTE
M
Panas
onic To AC Outlet The socket outlet shall be placed close to the
equipment and shall be easily accessible.
Panasonic Panasonic
2-8 Installation
2.3.1 System Connection Diagram
D1232
DEGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic
(two pair)
It is recommended that (two
(one
extension of jack 1 is a
DIGITAL
Panasonic pair)
pair)
display proprietary
telephone.
KX-T7400 series digital
Single Line Telephone proprietary telephones
KX-T7200 series digital
proprietary telephones
(one
(two (two pair)
pair)
(one pair) pair)
Pa
nas
oni
c
nic
aso
Pan
Cordless Phone
KX-T7000 series analogue Digital DSS/Attendant
Data Terminal proprietary telephones consoles(KX-T7440/
(one KX-T7441/KX-T7240)
pair) (one (two
pair) pair)
(two pair)
Installation 2-9
2.3.2 Extension Connection
for Proprietary Telephones, Single Line Telephones and Consoles
(KX-TD816: Jack 1 through Jack 8, KX-TD1232: Jack 1 through Jack 16)
Wire Specifications
In making an extension line connection, use twisted pair cable for
installation. The wire specifications for extensions are as follows:
Wire Solid wire
Diameter of conductor ø 0.4 – ø 0.65 mm
Diameter including coating ø 0.66 – ø 1.05 mm
Connection Use 6-pin plugs (included). There are 8 plugs to connect extensions
to jacks 1 through 8 for KX-TD816, and 16 plugs to connect
extensions to jacks 1 through 16 for KX-TD1232. Mis-connection
may cause the system to operate improperly. See Section 6.1.1
“Installation” and 6.1.2 “Connection” before connection.
P2
L
A
B
H
P1
KX-TD816
Jack 4
Jack 3
4CO/ISDN
Jack 2
P2
L
A Jack 1
B
H
P1
To extensions (Jacks 1 – 8)
2-10 Installation
2.3.2 Extension Connection
for Proprietary Telephones, Single Line Telephones and Consoles
(KX-TD816: Jack 1 through Jack 8, KX-TD1232: Jack 1 through Jack 16)
KX-TD1232
REMOTE
Jack 3
8CO/ISDN
Jack 2
P2
L
A Jack 1
B
H
P1
Installation 2-11
2.3.2 Extension Connection
for Proprietary Telephones, Single Line Telephones and Consoles
(KX-TD816: Jack 1 through Jack 8, KX-TD1232: Jack 1 through Jack 16)
DI
GI
TA
L
Pana
sonic
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
DIGI
TAL
Pana
soni
c
2-12 Installation
2.3.2 Extension Connection
for Proprietary Telephones, Single Line Telephones and Consoles
(KX-TD816: Jack 1 through Jack 8, KX-TD1232: Jack 1 through Jack 16)
Console Connection
A maximum of four Consoles for KX-TD816 and a maximum of
eight Consoles for KX-TD1232 per system can be installed. The
Console must be connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone.
System Programming is required to designate paired jack numbers
of Consoles and proprietary telephones. With the KX-T7440, KX-
T7441, KX-T7240 and KX-T7040 model Consoles, 4-conductor
wiring is required for each extension. Connect pins “L” and “H”
only. (“A” and “B” are not necessary.)
Station Wiring
1. Proprietary Telephone (analogue type) Connection and Console Connection
Terminal wire
L B 5
A L 4
B
H H 3
A 2
Installation 2-13
2.3.2 Extension Connection
for Proprietary Telephones, Single Line Telephones and Consoles
(KX-TD816: Jack 1 through Jack 8, KX-TD1232: Jack 1 through Jack 16)
Terminal wire
L L 6
A B 5
B
H A 2
H 1
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[007] Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment
Note After completing all the required inside cabling, including CO lines,
extensions, external pagers and external music sources, fasten the
cables with the nylon tie (included) as shown.
2-14 Installation
2.3.3 Parallelled Telephone Connection
for a Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone
Method 1
D1232
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYSTE
M
Installation 2-15
2.3.3 Parallelled Telephone Connection
for a Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
To system
Single Line Digital Proprietary
Telephone Telephone
<Back of the KX-T7200 Series DPTs>
To single line
To system telephone
TO EMSS
Notes • Not only a single line telephone but a single line device such as an
answering machine, a facsimile or a modem (personal computer) etc.
can be connected in parallel with a digital proprietary telephone.
• The KX-TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit.
2-16 Installation
2.3.4 EXtra Device Port (XDP) Connection
for a Digital Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone
Method 1 D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
Master Master
socket socket
Digital Proprietary Single Line Telephone
Telephone
Method 2
Section 2.3.3 “Paralleled Telephone Connection, Method 2: for
Digital Proprietary Telephone only” is also available for XDP
connection.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[600] EXtra Device Port
Installation 2-17
2.3.5 External Pager Connection
A maximum of two user-supplied external pagers can be connected
per system. You can program the external pager that will send
background music and determine whether both pagers will generate
a confirmation tone. Use an RCA connector and shielded cable.
To adjust the sound level of the pagers, use the volume control on
the amplifiers.
• Output impedance: 600 Ω
KX-TD816
Paging Jack 2
Paging Jack 1
4CO/ISDN
Speaker
Amplifier
Paging Equipment 2
Speaker
Amplifier
Paging Equipment 1
2-18 Installation
2.3.5 External Pager Connection
KX-TD1232
REMOTE
SYSTEM INTER
CONNECTION
Paging Jack 2
Paging Jack 1
8CO/ISDN
Speaker
Amplifier
Paging Equipment 2
Speaker
Amplifier
Paging Equipment 1
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[804] External Pager BGM
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
Installation 2-19
2.3.6 External Music Source Connection
A maximum of two music sources can be connected per system.
Use a two-conductor plug (3.5 mm in diameter). Insert the plug to
the earphone / headphone jack on the external music source.
System programming is required for the Music on Hold and
Background Music features. To adjust the sound level of the Music
on Hold, use the volume control on the external music source.
• Input impedance: 8 kΩ
KX-TD816
4CO/ISDN
2-20 Installation
2.3.6 External Music Source Connection
KX-TD1232
REMOTE
8CO/ISDN
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[803] Music Source Use
[990] System Additional Information, Field (20)
Installation 2-21
2.3.7 Printer Connection
A user-supplied printer can be connected to the EIA (RS-232C)
connector (25-pin) on the main unit. The printer is used to print out
SMDR call records and system programming data.
Connect the EIA (RS-232C) printer connector to the EIA
connector. Cables must be shielded; the maximum length is 2 m.
Serial Interface
(RS-232C)
2-22 Installation
2.3.7 Printer Connection
Printer / Personal Computer (25-pin) Connection Chart
EIA (RS-232C) port on EIA (RS-232C) port on
the main unit the printer/PC
Circuit Circuit
Signal Pin Pin Signal
Type Type
Name No. No. Name
(EIA) (EIA)
AA FG 1 1 FG AA
BA SD (TXD) 2 3 RD (RXD) BB
BB RD (RXD) 3 2 SD (TXD) BA
CB CS (CTS) 5
CC DR (DSR) 6 20 ER (DTR) CD
AB SG 7 7 SG AB
CD ER (DTR) 20 5 CS (CTS) CB
6 DR (DSR) CC
8 CD (DCD) CF
Circuit Circuit
Signal Pin Pin Signal
Type Type
Name No. No. Name
(EIA) (EIA)
AA FG 1
BA SD (TXD) 2 2 RD (RXD) BB
BB RD (RXD) 3 3 SD (TXD) BA
CA RS (RTS) 4 4 ER (DTR) CD
CB CS (CTS) 5 5 SG AB
CC DR (DSR) 6 6 DR (DSR) CC
AB SG 7 7 RS (RTS) CA
CD ER (DTR) 20 8 CS (CTS) CB
25-pin 9-pin
Note Please read your printer manual and connect the first EIA pin (FG) of this
unit to the printer cable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[800] SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call Log Printout
[801] SMDR Format
[802] System Data Printout
[806]-[807] EIA (RS-232C) Parameters – Port 1 / Port 2
2-24 Installation
2.4 Optional Cards and Units Installation
2.4.1 Location of Optional Cards and Units
The location of the optional cards and units is shown below.
Precaution To protect the printed circuit boards (P-boards) from static electricity, do
not touch parts on the P-boards in the main unit and on the optional cards
and units.
The ISDN unit (KX-TD280, KX-TD286, KX-TD290) should not be
installed only to the Slave system.
Expansion Units
Installation 2-25
2.4.1 Location of Optional Cards and Units
KX-TD1232 A maximum of two 8-Station Line Units (KX-TD170) and/or one
CO Line/ISDN Line Unit (KX-TD180, KX-TD280, KX-TD286,
KX-TD290) can be installed to any expansion area.
Area 3
Max. two extension line units
8-Station Line Units, KX-TD170
Area 2
Area 1
2-26 Installation
2.4.1 Location of Optional Cards and Units
4-CO Line Card / 2-ISDN S0 Line Card for KX-TD816
CO Line
4CO/ISDN
Install 4-CO Line Card (KX-TD182).
Expansion Adds four CO lines.
Card
Connector or
System Inter Connection Card / 8-CO Line Card / 4-ISDN S0 Line Card
for KX-TD1232
CO Line
Expansion 8CO/ISDN
Install 8-CO Line Card (KX-TD181).
Card Adds eight CO lines.
Connector
or
Installation 2-27
2.4.2 CO Line Connection (Optional Card)
Card Installation for KX-TD816
To connect CO 1 through CO 4, install the optional 4-CO Line
Card (KX-TD182).
To connect two ISDN S0 lines (CO 1 through CO 4), install the
optional 2-ISDN S0 Line Card (KX-TD282).
1. Insert the upper end of the 4-CO Line Card or 2-ISDN S0 Line
Card into the two hooks on the main unit.
2. Press the two corners at the lower end of the Card.
3. Fix the card with an accessory screw at the lower-right corner.
4. Connect the cord to the connector.
4-pin Connector ✕ 2
4-pin Connector ✕ 1
2-28 Installation
2.4.2 CO Line Connection (Optional Card)
Card Installation for KX-TD1232
To connect CO 1 through CO 8, install the optional 8-CO Line
Card (KX-TD181).
To connect four ISDN S0 lines (CO 1 through CO 8), install the
optional 4-ISDN S0 Line Card (KX-TD281).
1. Insert the upper end of the 8-CO Line Card or 4-ISDN S0 Line
Card into the two hooks on the main unit.
2. Press the two corners at the lower end of the Card.
3. Fix the card with an accessory screw at the lower-right corner.
4. Connect the cord to the connector.
4-pin Connector ✕ 4
Wire Specifications
In making a CO line connection, use twisted pair cable for
installation. The wire specifications for CO lines are as follows:
Notes • In case of starting the system for the first time or System Data Clear,
the application for location will adapt the practical installation instead
of system default setting.
• System Programming is required for location identification. Refer to
Section 4, [109] “Expansion Card / Unit Type.”
Default: CO Line Expansion Unit
Installation 2-29
2.4.2 CO Line Connection (Optional Card)
8-CO Line Connection with KX-TD181 /
4-CO Line Connection with KX-TD182
Use 4-pin plugs (included) to connect CO lines. There are two
plugs to connect four CO lines for KX-TD816, and four plugs to
connect eight CO lines for KX-TD1232. A single plug is able to
connect two CO lines. Mis-connection may cause the system to
operate improperly. See Section 6.1.2 “Connection” before
connection.
A
A B
To the unit ← B A ← From Network
A B
B
2
1
CO 7, CO 8
CO 5, CO 6
CO 3, CO 4
CO 1, CO 2
B View of Connector
A
A
CO 2
B
A
To Terminal Board or Modular CO 1
B
Jacks from the Central Office.
2-30 Installation
2.4.2 CO Line Connection (Optional Card)
KX-TD182
CO 3, CO 4
CO 1, CO 2
View of Connector
B
A
A
CO 2
B
A
CO 1
B
To Terminal Board or Modular
Jacks from the Central Office.
Installation 2-31
2.4.2 CO Line Connection (Optional Card)
4-ISDN S0 Line Connection with KX-TD281 /
2-ISDN S0 Line Connection with KX-TD282
Use 4-pin plugs (included) to connect ISDN S0 lines. There are
two plugs to connect two ISDN S0 lines for KX-TD816, and four
plugs to connect four ISDN S0 lines for KX-TD1232. A single
plug is able to connect one ISDN S0 line. Mis-connection may
cause the system to operate improperly. See Section 6.1.2
“Connection” before connection.
RB
TB RA
To the unit ← TA TA ← From Network
RA TB
RB
2
1
KX-TD281 KX-TD282
Port No. 4
Port No. 3 Port No. 2
Port No. 2 Port No. 1
Port No. 1
2-32 Installation
2.4.3 Lightning Protector Installation
A lightning protector is a device to be installed on a CO line to
prevent a dangerous surge from entering the building and damaging
equipment.
A dangerous surge can occur if a telephone line comes in contact
with a power line. Troubles due to lightning surges have been
showing a steady increase with the development of electronic
equipment.
In many countries, there are regulations requiring the installation of
a lightning protector. A lightning strike to a telephone cable which
is 10 m above ground can be as high as 200,000 volts.
This system should be installed with lightning protectors. In
addition, connection to earth ground is very important for the
protection of the system.
Installation Diagram
CO CO CO
Lightning
Protectors Main
Distribution Main Unit
Frame EXTN
Frame
SLT PT Earth
Earth
Installation 2-33
2.4.3 Lightning Protector Installation
Outside Installation Diagram
(Main Building)
Protectors
CO
(Another Building)
CO
SLT
Main CO
Main EXTN PT
Distribution Unit
Frame EXTN Lightning
Protector
EXTN EXTN
TEL TEL
Earth
Note The lightning protector for an extension is different from that for CO.
2-34 Installation
2.4.3 Lightning Protector Installation
Earth Rod Installation Diagram
The length of earth rod and the required depth depend on the
composition of the soil. Consider the following recommendations:
Lightning
Protector
CO
Earth Wire
Main
Unit
(Underground)
Earth Rod
Installation 2-35
2.4 Optional Cards and Units Installation
2.4.4 CO Line Connection (Optional Unit)
To add four CO lines (KX-TD816: CO 5 through CO 8, KX-
TD1232: CO 9 through CO 12), use the optional 4-CO Line Unit
(KX-TD180).
To add two ISDN S0 lines, use the optional 2-ISDN S0 Line Unit
(KX-TD280).
To add six ISDN S0 lines, use the optional ISDN 6-S0 Line Unit
(KX-TD286). When the KX-TD286 is installed in the KX-TD816,
only four ISDN S0 lines are available for outside lines and the other
ports are for extension lines (ISDN extensions). Then the two basic
analog ports cannot be used.
1. Loosen the two the screws on the cover 3. Hook the cabinet to the main unit and
plate. Insert fingers into the slits to slide the cabinet to the left until it is
remove the cover plate. fixed.
D1232
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
Slit
Slit Panasonic
Panaso
nic
2. Connect the cabinet cord to the 4. Loosen the outside screw and slide the
connector in the main unit firmly. cover to the right.
D1232
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic
Panasonic
Outside screw
Installation 2-37
2.4.6 Installing Expansion Unit
5. Secure the inside screw (included in the
card) to fix the cabinet to the main unit.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
Inside screw
Panasonic
6. ■ If a KX-TD170 is to be installed:
6-1. Prepare the required plugs. Eight 6-pin plugs are included in
KX-TD170 to connect extensions.
P2 P2
L L
To the unit ← A
B
A
B ← From Terminal
H H Equipment
P1 P1
2
1
Jack Jack
P2 no. no.
L
A
8
E
X
T B 16 or 24 12 or 20
D
IG
IT
A
L
S
U
P
H (32) (28)
E
R
H
Y
B
R P1
15 or 23 11 or 19
ID
S
Y
S
TE
M
(31) (27)
14 or 22 10 or 18
(30) (26)
13 or 21 9 or 17 (25)
P
an
as
on
(29)
ic
Earth Terminal
To extensions
(jack numbers 9–16 /17–24 / 25–32)
2-38 Installation
2.4.6 Installing Expansion Unit
■ If a KX-TD180 is to be installed:
6-1. Prepare the required plugs. Two 4-pin plugs are included in
KX-TD180 to connect CO lines.
A
A B
To the unit ← B A ← From Network
A B
B
2
1
A
4C P
FT
B CO5 or CO9
O po
rts
D
IG
IT
A
L
S
U
P
A CO6 or CO10
E
R
H
Y
B
R
ID
S
Y
S
2C
O
w
/P
FT
B
TE
M
2C
O
CO7 or CO11
P
CO8 or CO12
an
as
on
ic
Installation 2-39
2.4.6 Installing Expansion Unit
■ If a KX-TD280 / KX-TD286 is to be installed:
6-1. Prepare the required plugs. Two 4-pin plugs are included in
KX-TD280, and six 4-pin plugs are included in KX-TD286 to
connect CO lines.
RB
TB RA
To the unit ← TA TA ← From Network
RA TB
RB
2
1
KX-TD280 KX-TD286
TB Jack
TA no. TB
IS
D
P
FT ISDN TA
N
po
rts
S02 RB
R
H
Y
B
R
ID
S
Y
2C
O
w
/P
FT
RB
S
TE
M
2C
O
S03
S04
ISDN
Port No.4 or 6 S05
P
an
as
on
ic
P
an S06
as
on
ic
Notes • All ports of the KX-TD280 and KX-TD286 can also be used for internal
ISDN lines. For the KX-TD816, jack numbers S05 and S06 of the KX-
TD286 are fixed as internal ISDN lines. To connect internal ISDN lines,
refer to Section 2.4.7 “Internal ISDN Line Connection.”
2-40 Installation
2.4.6 Installing Expansion Unit
7. Tie up all the cords into a bundle. If Notes • If two or three expansion units are
other cords are coming from the upper installed, cut the cabinet covers on
cabinets, tie them, too. the lower cabinets to allow the cords
8. Close the cabinet cover and secure the from upper cabinet to go down
outside screw. through the cabinet covers. To guard
the cords, smooth the cut edge.
9. Cover the cords with the cord holder
(included).
Cut here
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
Programming References
Panasonic
Cord holder Section 4, System Programming,
[109] Expansion Card / Unit Type
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Module Expansion
10. Fix the cords to the wall at the shown
position so that the front cover can be
opened.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic
Installation 2-41
2.4.7 Internal ISDN S0 Line Connection
The ISDN S0 bus on the KX-TD280, KX-TD281 and KX-TD282,
whose ROM numbers are P071D or later ROM versions and on the
KX-TD286 can be used as internal S0 bus. The Port numbers 01
and 02 of the KX-TD281 are fixed as external ISDN S0 Lines. The
others can be used as either external or internal ISDN S0 Lines.
Some System Programmings and hardware changes are required to
use the S0 bus as internal ISDN S0 lines beforehand.
EXT SO
Jumper 2
EXT
EXT
DIP
SO
SO
Connection Use 4-pin plugs (included) to connect ISDN S0 lines. A single plug
is able to connect one ISDN S0 line. Mis-connection may cause the
system to operate improperly.
2-42 Installation
2.4.7 Internal ISDN S0 Line Connection
2. Insert the plug into a ISDN S0 port on the unit.
KX-TD281 KX-TD282
Port No. 2
Port No. 4 Port No. 1
Port No. 3
Port No. 2†
Port No. 1†
KX-TD280 KX-TD286
Port No. 3 or 5
Jack No. S01
Jack No. S02
Jack No. S03
Port No. 4 or 6 Jack No. S04
P
an
as
Jack No. S05
on P
ic an
as
oni
c
Jack No. S06
3. Connect the lines between the ISDN board and the ISDN device.
4. Plug the AC power cord into the system and an AC outlet.
5. Program “[422] ISDN Port Type” or “[440] TD286 ISDN Port
Type” and other required programmings in System
Programming.
6. Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool on the main unit.
Installation 2-43
2.4.7 Internal ISDN S0 Line Connection
Maximum cabling distance of S0 bus connection
The maximum length of the extension line cord that connects the
main unit and the ISDN terminal equipment (TE) is shown below:
Under 1000 m
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
Point-to-Point
TE
Panasoni
c
Point-to-Multipoint
TE 1 TE 8
Under 150 m
Expansion Point-to-Multipoint
TE 1 TE 8
Under 500 m Under 50 m
Main TR†
Unit
†TR
TE 1 TE 8 RB
TR 100Ω
RA
TA
TR 100Ω
TB
2-44 Installation
2.4.8 Remote Card Installation*
1. Insert the upper end of the Remote Card into the two hooks on
the main unit.
2. Press the two corners at the lower end of the Remote Card.
3. Connect the cord to the Remote Card connector.
KX-TD196 REMOTE
Remote Card
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[107] System Password
[813] Floating Number Assignment
[814] Modem Standard
2. Set the MODE switch to 1. 2. Attach the expansion unit to the Message
or Remote Unit as shown below. Be sure
to connect the cabinet cords by inserting
the expansion unit cabinet cord through the
MODE
1 2
slot in the Message or Remote Unit.
1. Loosen the two screws on the cover plate. Insert fingers into the
slits to remove the cover plate.
D816
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
Slit Slit
Panaso
nic
D816
DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic
3. Hook the cabinet on the main unit and slide the cabinet to the
left until it is secured.
D816
DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic
KX-TD816
1. Open the front cover of the unit, slide the 4. Install the card, secure the screw(s)
side cover to the right and remove it. (included with the KX-TD190 or KX-
TD198) and connect the cable to the
connector.
To install the KX-TD197 to the KX-TD190
MODE
1 2
Cable
KX-TD1232
Programming Reference
Section 4, System Programming,
[817] TD197 Baud Rate Set
Doorphone Installation
1. Loosen the screw to separate the doorphone into halves.
ic
ason
Pan
screw
Note Two kinds of screws are included; choose the one that is
appropriate for use depending on your wall type:
3. Connect the wires from the main unit to the screws located in the
front cover.
2-50 Installation
2.4.11 Doorphone and Door Opener
Connection
Connection Use 4-pin plugs (included) to connect doorphone or door opener. A
plug is able to connect up to two doorphones or door openers. 4-
conductor wiring is required.
4-pin plug
Door opener 2
or
Doorphone 2
Door opener 1
or
Doorphone 1
■ Doorphone
KX-TD816
Doorphone 2
DOORPHONE
4CO/ISDN Doorphone 1
Panasonic Panasonic
Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2
(KX-T30865) (KX-T30865)
4-conductor wiring
Installation 2-51.0
2.4.11 Doorphone and Door Opener
Connection
KX-TD1232
DOORPHONE
REMOTE
Doorphone 2
SYSTEM INTER
CONNECTION Doorphone 1
8CO/ISDN
4-conductor wiring
Panasonic Panasonic
Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2
(KX-T30865) (KX-T30865)
■ Door Opener
KX-TD816
Door opener 2
DOOROPENER
Door opener 1
4CO/ISDN
4-conductor wiring
To door opener 2
is required.
To door opener 1
2-51.1 Installation
2.4.11 Doorphone and Door Opener
Connection
KX-TD1232
DOOROPENER
8CO/ISDN
4-conductor wiring
is required. To door opener 2
To door opener 1
D=1.2–2.4 mm
Installation 2-51.2
2.4.11 Doorphone and Door Opener
Connection
Maximum distance of doorphone and door opener line
The maximum length of the doorphone and door opener line that
connects to the main unit is as follows:
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
Panasonic
Doorphone
KX-T30865
Panaso
nic
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[607–608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
2-51.3 Installation
2.4.12 System Connection*
To connect two main units, use the optional System Inter
Connection Cards (two) and the Connection Cable (included in the
cards).
Connection Cable
REMOTE
MASTER
8CO/ISDN
SLAVE
9. Turn the power on.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[115] Adjust Time
Connection
When connecting the battery adaptor, keep the following in mind.
• Make sure of the polarities of batteries and wires.
• Make sure do not short the batteries and wires.
• To connect the two batteries, use accessory wire.
Blue (-)
Accessory
wire + - 12 VDC
Fuse
Holder
D816
DIGITAL SUPER
Earth Terminal
HYBRID SYSTEM
main unit.
To Earth Connect the earth wire to the earth
KX-TD816
terminal on the main unit.
Plug LED
Power Switch
Earth Terminal
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
Ground Wire
3. Turn on the power switch of the battery
To Earth adaptor.
Power Switch
Installation 2-51.6
2.4.13 Battery Adaptor Connection
Wall Mounting
1. Drive the accessory four small screws on
Metal Plates
the bottom of the unit.
2. Place the metal plates so that the screw
Front
heads insert into the slots as shown.
Screws 3. Slide the metal plates in the directions of
(big)
the arrows, and drive the screws.
Wall Screws Bottom 4. Place the templet on the wall to mark
(small) two screw positions, and install the big
screws into the wall.
5. Hook the battery adaptor on the screw
Rear heads.
Notes • If the Power LED does not go on, check the main unit, battery adaptor,
batteries and wiring connection.
• After connection of the battery adaptor, keep the power switch on
unless when the main unit is turned off. (Batteries will discharge.)
• To charge the discharged batteries, use a proper charging unit.
• Power Fuse: (8A, 32V)✕2
If the Power LED light goes off during a power failure, the power fuse
may have been blown. To change the fuse:
2-51.7 Installation
Blank
2-51.8
2.5 Auxiliary Connection for Power
Failure Transfer
Power Failure Transfer connects a specific single line telephone to
selected CO line in the event of system power failure.
Single line telephones connected to the Power Failure Transfer
jacks are connected directly to following CO lines;
KX-TD816 : CO 1, CO 2, CO 5
KX-TD1232 : Master System – CO 1, CO 2, CO 9,
Slave System – CO 13, CO 14, CO 21
The Power Failure Transfer jack is on the 8-CO Line Card, 4-CO
Line Card and 4-CO Line Unit.
View of Connector
A
B
A
B P
an
as
on
ic
Installation 2-52
2.5 Auxiliary Connection for Power
Failure Transfer
KX-TD182
View of Connector
A
B
A
B
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[109] Expansion Card / Unit Type
2-53 Installation
2.6 Starting the System for the First Time
1. Set the power switch to “OFF.”
2. Set the system clear switch to “CLEAR.”
3. Plug the AC power cord into the system and an AC outlet.
4. Turn the power switch on.
5. Press the Reset button with a pointed tool.
(The power indicator will flash.)
6. Slide the system clear switch to “NORMAL” while the power
indicator is flashing (approximately within 10 seconds).
The system will be initialized with default values. The system will
also check the CO lines, extensions, and optional cards and units.
KX-TD816
NORMAL
RESET
Reset Button
To AC Outlet
Power Indicator
Installation 2-54
2.6 Starting the System for the First Time
KX-TD1232
System Clear
SYSTEM
CLEAR Switch
CLEAR
NORMAL
RESET
Reset Button
To AC Outlet
Power Indicator
Notes • After pressing the Reset button, slide the system clear switch to
“NORMAL” at step 6 while the power indicator is flashing
(approximately within 10 seconds). Otherwise, the system does not
start up with the default values.
• When System Connection is executed, the system will not accept
incoming outside calls for about 4 minutes after sliding the system
clear switch to “NORMAL.” The system needs time to establish the
LCR data.
CAUTION: Once you start up the system and if you turn the power off, do not perform the
above procedures to start the system again. Otherwise, your programmed data is
cleared. To start the system, just turn the power switch on.
2-55 Installation
2.7 System Restart
If after checking the system features you determine that the system
is not operating properly, restart the system.
Keep in mind that the following features are cleared when you
restart the system:
• Camp-on
• Call Park
The following features are cancelled when you restart the system:
• Calls on Hold
• Calls on Exclusive Hold
• Calls in progress
Notes • If the system clear switch is set to “CLEAR,” do not slide the system
clear switch to “NORMAL” within 20 seconds of pressing the Reset
button. If you do, the system programming data is reset to the default
values. (Refer to Section 2.8 “System Data Clear.”) Wait over 30
seconds after pressing the Reset button and then slide the system clear
switch to “NORMAL.”
• When System Connection is executed, the system will not accept
incoming outside calls for about 4 minutes after pressing the Reset
button. The system needs time to establish the LCR data.
• If the system still does not operate properly, please see Section 6.1.4
“Using Reset Button.”
Installation 2-56
2.8 System Data Clear
After storing or changing the system programming data, you can
clear the programming data stored in the system. The system will
restart with the default settings.
Notes • After pressing the Reset button, return the system clear switch to
“NORMAL” at step 3 while the power indicator is flashing
(approximately within 10 seconds). Otherwise, the system is not
cleared.
• When System Connection is executed, the system will not accept
incoming outside calls for about 4 minutes after returning the system
clear switch to “NORMAL.” The system needs time to establish the
LCR data.
2-57 Installation
Section 3
Features
This section describes every basic, optional, and
programmable features in alphabetical order. It also provides
information about the conditions, connection references,
programming required, related features, and operation for
every feature.
A 3 Features
Absent Message Capability
Description Once set this option provides a message, on the display of the
calling extension, to show the reason for the called extension’s
absence. Nine messages can be programmed as desired which are
available for every extension user. There are six pre-programmed
default messages. Setting or cancelling a message can be done by
individual extension users but only callers with a display telephone
can receive the message.
Conditions • Six default messages, which are changeable, are shown below. The
“%” means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at
individual extension.
(1) Will Return Soon
(2) Gone Home
(3) At Ext %%% (extension number)
(4) Back at %% : %% (hour : minute)
(5) Out Until %% / %% (month / day)
(6) In a Meeting
• An extension user can select only one message at a time. The selected
message is displayed every time the user goes off-hook.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[008] Absent Messages
[100] Flexible Numbering, Absent message
[990] System Additional Information, Area 05 – Bit 7
3-2 Features
3 Features A
Account Code Entry
Description An Account Code is used to identify incoming and outgoing
outside calls for accounting and billing purposes. The account code
is appended to the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call
record. For incoming outside calls, account codes are optional. For
outgoing outside calls, there are three modes available to enter an
account code: Verified-All Calls mode; Verified Toll Restriction
Override mode; and Option mode. One mode is selected for each
extension on a Class of Service basis.
In Verified-All Calls mode, the user must always enter a pre-
assigned account code when making any of the following calls
unless it has previously been stored in memory:
• Call Forwarding – to CO Line
• Last Number Redial
• Line Access
• Notebook Function
• One-Touch Dialling
• Pickup Dialling
• Saved Number Redial
• Station Speed Dialling
• System Speed Dialling
In Verified-Toll Restriction Override mode, the user can enter a pre-
assigned account code only when the user needs to override toll
restriction.
In Option mode, the user can enter any account code if needed.
Conditions • An account code can be stored into Memory Dialling (System / Station
Speed Dialling; Notebook Function; One-Touch Dialling; Pickup
Dialling; Call Forwarding – to CO Line).
• The Account button may be used in place of the feature number. A
flexible button on the proprietary telephone set can be programmed as
the Account button.
• Account code entry after CPC detection must be done within 15
seconds. Otherwise, SMDR call record is activated and entry becomes
impossible afterwards.
• If disconnection signal is selected in program [990], Area 01 – bit 3 and
Recall function is enabled in Area 02 – bit 5, the Verified-All Calls
extension is allowed to make an outside call using the same line with
Recall function.
• If an account code is appended to a call, specified display telephone
users can see the charge for the call (Charge Fee Reference).
Features 3-3
A 3 Features
• In any mode, emergency dial numbers stored in program [311]
“Emergency Dial Number Set” can be dialled out without an account
code entry.
• If the account code stored in location 001 of the programming table is
used, the dialled number is not printed out to SMDR (Private Call).
• It is possible to select whether the account code is printed out or not by
the SMDR. If it is not printed out, it is shown in dots.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Account code entry
[105] Account Codes
[508] Account Code Entry Mode
[990] System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bit 3, Area 02 – Bit 5,
Area 07 – Bit 14
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Account Button
Charge Fee Management
Alert Indication
Description If the following situations occur, the pre-warning indication is
displayed on the proprietary telephone of Operator 1 in Day mode.
Memory: When the system finds the wrong system data, the
indication “System Data Err 1” is displayed.
Printer: When the paper of the printer for SMDR runs out or the
printer is out-of-service, the indication “Check Printer” is
displayed. Check the printer.
Connection*: When a system inter-connection error occurs and
system connection operation is interrupted, the indication
“System Link Down” is displayed. Connect the interface
between the systems and press the Reset Button on both systems.
Conditions None
Conditions Single line telephone users receive calls with Ring-Calling only.
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Initial Settings – Intercom Alerting Assignment
Features 3-5
A 3 Features
Answering, Direct CO Line
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to answer an incoming call
by simply pressing the appropriate CO button without lifting the
handset or pressing the SP-PHONE / MONITOR button.
Conditions This feature permits the user to specify the desired line to be answered if
multiple incoming lines are ringing.
Programming References
No programming required.
Conditions • If the Date and Time setting is programmed, after synchronizing the
time, the programmed time is valid until the first outgoing call is made
after the three o'clock of the next morning.
• In case of the system connection,* when one system synchronizes the
time by the made call through ISDN line, another system will adjust the
time with the time information.
Programming References
No programming required.
Conditions • If the callback ringing is not answered in four rings (within 10 seconds)
the callback is cancelled.
• More than one extension user can set this function to one extension or
CO line at the same time.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Automatic callback busy cancel
Features 3-7
A 3 Features
Automatic Configuration†
Description The system sends the VPS data which contains the extension
number configuration information and the VPS automatically
creates mailboxes with this data (Quick Setup).
Conditions • The data is transmitted to the VPS on the lowest jack port.
• If two or more lines are connected with the VPS, the port(s) with lower
number(s) on the system need to be connected to one(s) with lower
number(s) on the VPS.
<Example>
Correct Way Incorrect Way
#6 #2 #6 #2
#5 #1 #5 #1
Programming References
No programming required.
3-8 Features †: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one
that supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
3 Features A
• Hurry-Up Transfer does not function in the following cases;
a) The waiting queue is set “0.”
b) Hurry-Up Button is not assigned.
c) Operator 1 belongs to Station Hunting Group.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[129] Operator Queue
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Hurry-Up Button
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[207] First Digit Time
[208] Inter Digit Time
Features 3-9
B 3 Features
Background Music (BGM)
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to listen to background music
from the monitor speaker on the telephone.
Conditions • It may be required to select a music source used for BGM by system
programming.
• For Music Source 1, it is possible to select the internal or external music
source by system programming.
• The music is interrupted while off-hooked.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.6 External Music Source Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[803] Music Source Use
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 10
3-10 Features
3 Features B
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.5 External Pager Connection
2.3.6 External Music Source Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Background music – external
[803] Music Source Use
[804] External Pager BGM
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 10
Budget Management
Description Limit the telephone usage to a pre-assigned amount. For example,
the limit may be the amount deposited during a hotel at check-in. If
the pre-assign limit is reached, the extension user cannot make
further calls until he/she receives authorization from the operator.
Conditions None
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[010] Budget Management
[014] Budget Management on ISDN Port
[990] System Additional Information, Area 05 – Bit 5
Features 3-11
B 3 Features
Busy Lamp Field
Description The LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicators of the DSS (Direct
Station Selection) buttons, each of which corresponds to a selected
extension, tell whether the corresponding extensions are idle, busy
or in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode.
Conditions • This function is available for DSS buttons on Consoles and for flexible
CO buttons assigned as DSS buttons on proprietary telephones.
• A DSS button indicator lights red if the corresponding extension is busy
or in DND mode.
• The DSS indicator on a proprietary telephone also informs you of
incoming calls except for the DIL 1:N and doorphone call to the
corresponding extensions. You can pick up calls by pressing the
corresponding flashing DSS buttons.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button
Conditions • This feature only works if the called extension has activated Call
Waiting. If it is activated, the caller will hear ringback tone.
• If the called party has been set to activate the Off-Hook Call
Announcement (OHCA) or Whisper OHCA function, the caller can
announce the call through the speaker or the handset.
• If none of three features, Call Waiting, OHCA or Whisper OHCA, is set
at the called party, the caller will hear a reorder tone.
3-12 Features
3 Features B
Programming References
No programming required.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[108] One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button
Features 3-13
B 3 Features
Button, Flexible
Description The use of Flexible Buttons is determined by either system or
station programming. The following three types of Flexible
Buttons are provided on proprietary telephones (PT) and Consoles:
• Flexible CO buttons (provided on PT only)
• Flexible DSS buttons (provided on Console only)
• Programmable Feature (PF) buttons
The table below shows all of the features which can be assigned to
Flexible Buttons.
Button CO DSS PF
Features to be assigned (PT) (DSS) (DSS)
Single-CO ✔
Group-CO ✔
Loop-CO ✔
Alert ✔
Hurry-Up ✔
Log-In / Log-Out*1 ✔
Call Forwarding from Hunting Group*1 ✔ ✔
Call Pickup Deny*1 ✔ ✔
Call Waiting*2 ✔ ✔
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)*1 ✔ ✔
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)*1 ✔ ✔
Direct Station Selection (DSS) ✔ ✔
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call (DND for DDI)*1 ✔ ✔
Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line*1 ✔ ✔
Live Call Screening† ✔ ✔
Live Call Screening Cancel† ✔ ✔
Message Waiting ✔ ✔
Night*1 ✔ ✔
Paging Deny*1 ✔ ✔
Paralleled Telephone Connection*1 ✔ ✔
Phantom Extension ✔ ✔
Pickup Dialling (Hot Line)*1 ✔ ✔
Two-Way Record† ✔ ✔
Two-Way Transfer† ✔ ✔
Account Code Entry ✔ ✔ ✔
Conference ✔ ✔ ✔
3-14 Features
3 Features B
Button CO DSS PF
Features to be assigned (PT) (DSS) (DSS)
FWD/DND ✔ ✔ ✔
One-Touch Dialling ✔ ✔ ✔
One-Touch Dialling with Auto Hold ✔ ✔ ✔
Saved Number Redial ✔ ✔ ✔
Terminate ✔ ✔ ✔
Voice Mail Transfer ✔ ✔ ✔
In the table, “✔” indicates that the feature can be assigned to the button.
† :Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that
supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
*1 :The buttons which alternate the on / off setting of the corresponding feature.
*2 :Pressing this button changes the setting as follows:
Receiving Call Waiting tone → OHCA → Whisper OHCA → none of these
Conditions • A CO line can only appear on one Single-CO button of any given
telephone. A station can only appear on one DSS button of any given
telephone or Console.
• It is possible to have multiple appearances of the same Group-CO or
Loop-CO buttons on the same telephone. Incoming and outgoing calls on
the line are shown on the button in the following priority.
Single-CO > Group-CO > Loop-CO
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons
Features 3-15
B 3 Features
Button, Group-CO (G-CO)
Description To support efficient utilization of CO lines, a group of CO lines
(CO line group) can be assigned to a CO button. The function is
referred to as Group-CO (G-CO). The G-CO button works in
conjunction with the DIL 1:N feature. Any incoming call from any
CO line in the CO line group arrives at the G-CO button. To make
an outside call, the user can access an idle CO line in the group by
simply pressing the dedicated G-CO button.
Conditions • No G-CO button is originally provided on a proprietary telephone (PT).
It is programmable on a CO button by either system or station
programming.
• It is needed to program the extension for receiving and / or originating
calls on CO lines.
• It is possible to assign the same CO line group to more than one G-CO
buttons on the same PT.
• If Least Cost Routing (LCR) is set, it is overridden by an outgoing call
made by pressing the G-CO button.
• It is possible to assign the same line to an S-CO button and to a G-CO
button.
• Immediate, delayed, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) can be
selected on an extension–CO line basis.
• The digital PT user can choose a desired ringer frequency for each G-
CO button by system or station programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[401] CO Line Group Assignment
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Group-CO (G-CO) Button
– To distinguish the ringing tones for each CO
button
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Answering, Direct CO Line Line Access, Direct
CO Line Group Ringing, Delayed
LED Indication, CO Line Ringing Tone Selection for CO
Line Access, CO Line Group Buttons
3-16 Features
3 Features B
Button, Loop-CO (L-CO)
Description All CO lines can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a
proprietary telephone (PT). The assigned button serves as a Loop-
CO (L-CO) button. An incoming call on any CO line arrives at the
L-CO, unless there are no S-CO or G-CO buttons associated with
the line or unless the button is already in use. To make an outside
call, the PT user can simply press the dedicated L-CO button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Loop-CO (L-CO) Button
– To distinguish the ringing tones for each CO
button
Features 3-17
B 3 Features
Button, Single-CO (S-CO)
Description A Single-CO (S-CO) button is a CO line access button. This
allows the proprietary telephone user to access a specific line by
pressing an S-CO button. An incoming call can be directed to an S-
CO button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Single-CO (S-CO) Button
– To distinguish the ringing tones for each CO
button
3-18 Features
3 Features B
Buttons on Proprietary Telephones
Description Proprietary telephones are provided with the feature / line access
buttons listed below:
Features 3-19
B 3 Features
CO (Central Office line): Can make or receive an outside call or
can be re-assigned to a different CO or to various feature buttons.
CONF (Conference): Used to establish a three-party conference.
FLASH/RCL: Allows you to disconnect the current call and
originate another call without hanging up (Recall). Sends a
Register Recall signal to the Central Office or a host PBX to access
their features (External Feature Access).
Function: Used to perform the displayed function / operation.
FWD / DND (Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb): Used to
program Call Forwarding, set Do Not Disturb.
HOLD: Used to place a call on hold.
INTERCOM: Used to make or receive intercom calls.
Jog Dial: Used to adjust the ringer, speaker, handset and headset
volume and the display contrast. With the KX-T7431, KX-T7433
and KX-T7436, it can also be used to select data from the Call
Directory and the System Feature Access Menu on the display.
MESSAGE: Used to send a message or display current message.
MODE: Used to shift the display in order to access various
features.
MONITOR: Used for handsfree operation.
PAUSE: Inserts a pause in a speed dial number. With an analogue
proprietary telephone, it is used as the PROGRAM button.
PF (Programmable Feature): This flexible button can be
programmed to be a One-Touch Dialling, FWD / DND, SAVE,
Account, CONF (Conference) or Voice Mail Transfer button, as
desired.
PROGRAM: Used to enter / exit the Programming mode. With
the KX-T7220 and KX-T7250, it can also be used as the PAUSE
button.
RECALL: Allows you to disconnect the current call and originate
another call without hanging up (Recall). Sends a Register Recall
signal to the Central Office or a host PBX to access their features
(External Feature Access).
REDIAL: Used for Last Number or Automatic Redial.
SAVE: Used to store a dialled telephone number for Saved
Number Redial.
SELECT: Used to select the displayed function or to call for the
displayed phone number.
SHIFT: Used to access the second level of Soft button function.
Soft: Pressing a Soft button performs the function / operation
appearing on the bottom line of the display.
3-20 Features
3 Features B
SP-PHONE (Speakerphone): Used for handsfree operation. Pressing the
button causes the telephone to switch between handset and handsfree
operation.
TRANSFER: Transfers a call to another extension or external destination.
VOLUME: Used to adjust the ringer, speaker, handset and headset volume
and the display contrast.
Conditions • Certain buttons are equipped with light indicators (LED’s) to show line or
feature status.
• CO buttons can be classified according to the following three types:
Single-CO (S-CO) button / Group-CO (G-CO) button / Loop-CO (L- CO) button
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons
Features 3-21
C 3 Features
Caller ID
Description Provides the calling party’s phone number and/or name of the
called party’s display proprietary telephone before the called party
answers the outside call. If the number and/or name are stored in
the list of the System Speed Dialling, the number and/or name are
provided. When neither number nor name is stored in the list, the
number sent from ISDN is displayed. This feature is one of the
ISDN services.
Conditions • Up to 500 entries of number and name can be stored in the list of the
System Speed Dialling by System Programming.
• If the calling party restricts the presentation of calling line
identification, neither the phone number nor the name is displayed
(Calling Line Identification Restriction).
• The name is not displayed, when the corresponding stored number
includes the Flash and Pause, — (hyphen) or Secret button, following
to the line access code and — (hyphen).
• Caller ID will override CO line name display on the extension except
the operator extension. The display can be alternated between Caller ID
and CO line name.
• The analog proprietary telephone will show either the name or the
number. To alternate the display, press key.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialling Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialling Name Set
3-22 Features
3 Features C
CALL FORWARDING FEATURES – SUMMARY
Description Call forwarding features enable you to have your calls forwarded to
a specified destination. You may specify the circumstances under
which your calls are forwarded. The following Call Forwarding
features are available:
Call Forwarding – All Calls
Call Forwarding – Busy
Call Forwarding – Busy / No Answer
Call Forwarding – Follow Me
Call Forwarding – No Answer
Call Forwarding – to CO Line
Call Forwarding – by ISDN Line
Call Forwarding – from Hunting Group
Forward
Original set
extension
Conditions • Although calls are forwarded, Message Waiting is not. The MESSAGE
button indicator is lit on the extension which was originally called.
• Setting this function cancels any other Call Forwarding functions.
• DIL 1:N calls can only be forwarded one stage.
• If the final destination of the Call Forwarding is Voice Processing
System, the mailbox number of the extension which was originally
called is automatically sent (Follow On ID), even if it is forwarded
more than one stage.
• The call will not return to the calling extension by the Call Forwarding
function.
FWD
<Example>
FWD FWD
Call
A B C D
Features 3-23
C 3 Features
Call Forwarding – All Calls
Description This feature is used when you want all your calls to be
automatically re-directed to another extension.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / Do not disturb
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – FWD/DND Button
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / Do not disturb
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – FWD/DND Button
3-24 Features
3 Features C
Call Forwarding – Busy / No Answer
Description Your calls are forwarded to another extension if your extension is
busy or you do not answer the call in a pre-determined time.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb
[202] Call Forwarding – No Answer Time
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – FWD/DND Button
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb
[991] COS Additional Information, Bit 5
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – FWD/DND Button
Features 3-25
C 3 Features
Operation References Operation – Before Leaving Your Desk
—User Manual Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding)
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb
[202] Call Forwarding – No Answer Time
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – FWD/DND Button
3-26 Features
3 Features C
Call Forwarding – to CO Line
Description Calls directed to your extension will be sent to an external
destination. The outside telephone number must be pre-
programmed.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb
[205] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time
[502] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – FWD/DND Button
Features 3-27
C 3 Features
Call Forwarding – by ISDN Line
Description The call forwarding service provided by ISDN can be assigned on a
multiple subscriber number (MSN) basis. The following features
are available.
• Call Forwarding – Unconditional (CFU)
All incoming calls to an extension are transferred by the ISDN
line.
• Call Forwarding – Busy (CFB)
An incoming call to an extension is transferred by the ISDN line
when the line is busy.
• Call Forwarding – No Reply (CFNR)
An incoming call to an extension is transferred by the ISDN line
when the extension does not answer it before a pre-assigned time.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[518] CFU / CFB / CFNR Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – FWD/DND Button
3-28 Features
3 Features C
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding from hunting group
[520] Call Forwarding from Hunting Group
[990] System Additional Information, Area 06 – Bit 10 and 11.
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Call Forwarding from Hunting Group Button
Conditions • With a single line telephone, the user can hold only one call whether it
is an extension or outside call.
• Music is sent to the party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).
• If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time, Hold Recall
results.
• If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved in 30 minutes, it
is automatically disconnected.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call hold
[200] Hold Recall Time
Features 3-29
C 3 Features
Call Hold – Intercom
Description This is used to place an intercom call on hold. The held call can be
retrieved from the user who held it or from any other extension.
Conditions • Only one intercom call can be placed on hold in a telephone at a time
(up to 10 calls in the system – Call Park). With a proprietary telephone,
outside calls and one intercom call can be placed on hold at the same
time. With a single line telephone, either one outside or intercom call
can be held.
• If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time, Hold Recall
results.
• Music is sent to the party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call hold
[200] Hold Recall Time
Conditions • If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time, Hold Recall
results. After Hold Recall results, the held call can be retrieved from
any other extension.
• If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved in 30 minutes, it
is automatically disconnected.
• Music is sent to the party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[200] Hold Recall Time
[990] System Additional Information, Area 06 – Bit 6
3-30 Features
3 Features C
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Hold Recall Music on Hold
Conditions • Only one intercom call can be placed on Call Hold or Exclusive Call
Hold at a time.
• If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time, Hold Recall
results. After Hold Recall results, the held call can be retrieved from
any other extension.
• Music is sent to the party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[200] Hold Recall Time
[990] System Additional Information, Area 06 – Bit 6
Features 3-31
C 3 Features
Call Hold Retrieve – CO Line
Description Allows the extension user to retrieve a specified outside call that
has been placed on hold by another extension.
Conditions Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the hold is retrieved by the
feature number. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call hold retrieve – CO line
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 6, Area 06 – Bit 6
Conditions Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the hold is retrieved by the
feature number. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call hold retrieve – intercom
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 6, Area 06 – Bit 6
3-32 Features
3 Features C
Calling / Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP / COLP)
Description Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) enables showing
the calling party’s number on the display of the called party’s
telephone when a call is received.
Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) enables
showing the called party’s number on the display of the calling
party’s telephone when the called party answers a call.
These features are one of ISDN’s services.
Conditions • The CLIP service for outgoing outside calls can be restricted by System
Programming (CLIR: Calling Line Identification Restriction).
• The COLP service for incoming outside calls can be restricted by
System Programming (COLR: Connected Line Identification
Restriction).
• The number actually sent to the calling or called party may be different
from the system programmed number. It depends on the contract with
your ISDN supplier.
• It is possible to send the desired CLIP number for one time even if the
CLIP number is not assigned.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, CLIP / COLP
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment
[516] Calling Line Identification Restriction
[517] Connected Line Identification Restriction
[623] CLIP/COLP Number Assignment for Extension
[624] CLIP/COLP Number Assignment for ISDN Extension
[632] CLIP/COLP Number Assignment for KX-TD286 Extension
Features 3-33
C 3 Features
Calling / Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR / COLR)
Description Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) restricts showing the
calling party’s number on the display of the called party’s telephone
when a call is received.
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR) restricts
showing the called party’s number on the display of the calling
party’s telephone when the called party answers a call.
These features are one of ISDN’s services.
Conditions • If the displaying is enabled, the called party can check the calling
party’s number before the called party answers it (CLIP: Calling Line
Identification Presentation, case by case).
• If the displaying is enabled, the calling party can check the the called
party’s number when the called party answers it (COLP: Connected
Line Identification Presentation).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, CLIR, COLR
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment
[516] Calling Line Identification Restriction
[517] Connected Line Identification Restriction
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – CLIR Button, COLR Button
3-34 Features
3 Features C
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
Description The Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal is an on-hook indication
(disconnect signal) sent from the CO line when the telephone is
hung up at the other end. To support efficient utilization of CO
lines, the system monitors their state and when CPC Signal is
detected from a line, the system disconnects the line and informs
the extension with reorder tone.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[405] CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set
[415] CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set
[991] COS Additional Information, Bits 4, 3, 2, 1
Features 3-35
C 3 Features
Call Log, Incoming
Description Provides the external calling party’s information on the display
proprietary telephone when the extension user does not answer the
call. The phone number and name can be displayed when the
number and the name are stored in list of System Speed Dialling.
The stored number or modified number, if needed can be used to
call back the party. This feature is available, if the Caller ID or
Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) service is obtained
from the Central Office.
The displayed information are follows;
a) The party’s phone number and name
b) The day and time of the call was made
c) The calling attempt time of the same person
d) The receiving CO line number and name
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialling Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialling Name Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call log, incoming / Incoming Call log lock
control
3-36 Features
3 Features C
Call Park
Description Allows the extension user to place a held call into a system parking
area. This releases the user from the parked call to perform other
operations. The parked call can be retrieved from any other
extension user.
Conditions • The system contains 10 parking areas, each of which has its own call
park number. Up to 10 calls can be parked at the same time in the
system. Under the System Connection,* all users may access the same
call parking area. The number of holding slots remains at 10.
• If a parked call is not retrieved within Transfer Recall Timer period,
Transfer Recall starts to the operator or the extension that parked the
call.
• If Call Park Recall is not retrieved in 30 minutes, it is automatically
disconnected.
• Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the parked call is retrieved.
Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call park / call park retrieve
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bits 1 and 6
Features 3-37
C 3 Features
Call Pickup, CO Line
Description Allows any extension user to answer an incoming outside call that
is ringing at another’s telephone.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup, CO line
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 6
Conditions • Doorphone calls can be picked up from extensions that are not
programmed to answer doorphone calls.
• Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up.
Eliminating the tone is programmable.
• You can pick up a call by pressing a flashing DSS button assigned on a
proprietary telephone.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup, directed
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 6
3-38 Features
3 Features C
Call Pickup, Group
Description Allows the extension user to answer a call that is ringing at another
telephone, if the call is ringing within the user’s extension group.
Conditions • The user can pick up an incoming outside, intercom, or doorphone call.
• The priority of Group Call Pickup is as follows:
Outside call > Transferred call > Extension call > Doorphone call
• Group Call Pickup starts with the lowest jack number.
• Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up.
Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup, group
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 6
Conditions Distinctive dial tone is sent to the user on the extension with this feature
when the user goes off-hook.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup deny
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Call Pickup Deny Button
Features 3-39
C 3 Features
Call Splitting
Description Allows the extension user to alternate between two other parties.
Placing the current call on hold allows the user to have a
conversation with the other party.
Programming References
No programming required.
3-40 Features
3 Features C
Call Transfer, Screened – to CO Line
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to voice-announce to the
external party and transfer the intercom call.
Conditions Class of Service programming determines the extensions that are able to
perform it.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[205] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time
[502] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line
[990] System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bit 1
Conditions None
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[990] System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bit 1
Features 3-41
C 3 Features
Call Transfer, Unscreened – to Extension
Description Allows the user to transfer an intercom or outside call to directly
transfer to an extension party. After dialling the destination
extension, the user replaces the handset while hearing ringback
tone.
Conditions • If the destination party does not answer within the transfer recall time,
the call will return to the user or Operator 1. You can select the desired
one by system programming.
• This function is possible when the destination is sending ringback or
busy tone. If the destination is busy, Camp-On Transfer occurs.
• The ringing signal pattern follows the regular ringing pattern depending
on the party being transferred: outside or extension call ringing.
• It is possible for any extension user to transfer a call to the modem for
remote maintenance.
• If music on hold is enabled, music is sent to the caller while being
transferred. It is system-programmable whether to send ringback tone
or music on hold to the caller by program [990], Area 01 – bit 1.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[990] System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bit 1, Area 02 – Bit 1
3-42 Features
3 Features C
Call Waiting
Description While in conversation, a call waiting tone informs the user of
another incoming call that is waiting. He or she can answer the
second call by disconnecting or placing the current call on hold.
Call waiting tone can be enabled or disabled by dialling the
appropriate feature number.
Conditions • The call waiting tone is generated when an outside call or a doorphone
call comes in or when an extension caller executes Busy Station
Signalling.
• Setting Data Line Security cancels Call Waiting which has been turned
on.
• For proprietary telephone users, two types of call waiting tone are
provided to prevent them from missing the tone as shown below:
A proprietary telephone user can select the desired type by station
programming.
15 s
Tone 1
5s
Intercom
Tone 2
CO
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call waiting / OHCA / whisper OHCA
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Initial Settings – Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment
Customising the Buttons – Call Waiting Button
Features 3-43
C 3 Features
Charge Fee Reference
Description Allows pre-assigned display telephone users to see charges and
print out the charges. Charges are displayed per extension, CO line,
Account Code, or the total of each can be referred to. There are
two display formats – Pulse or Pound.
Conditions • System programming determines the extensions that can see charges.
• An identification code (ID code), set by system programming, is
required to see charges.
• The first display format – Pulse or Pound – is selected by system
programming. This can be switched manually at each extension.
• Exchange rate between pulse counter and pounds is changeable by
system programming.
• The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by system
programming.
• If the amount exceeds the maximum displayable charge, then only the
highest possible charge will be displayed (e.g. 99999.99£)
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[015] Charge Rate Fractional Point Assignment
[016] Charge Rate Assignment
[117] Charge Display Selection
[118] Charge Fee Reference Extension Assignment
[119] Charge Fee Reference ID Code Set
[125] Assignment of Denomination
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Charge Fee Management
3-44 Features
3 Features C
Class of Service (COS)
Description COS is used to define the features which are allowed for a group of
extensions. Each extension is assigned a primary and a secondary
COS numbers. Eight Classes of Service are available.
Conditions • The operator can switch the extension’s COS between a primary and a
secondary.
• The programmable items are shown below:
(1) Forwards a call to an outside party
(2) Transfers a call to an outside party
(3) Overrides Do Not Disturb of the called extension
(4) Account Code Entry operation – verified - all calls / verified -
toll restriction override / option
(5) Outgoing call restriction level (Day mode / Night mode) – 1
through 8
(6) Restriction of outside call duration
(7) The number of permitted dialling digits during an outside call
(8) Call Forwarding – Follow Me
(9) System speed dialling call restriction level (Day mode / Night
mode)
(10) Switches the Day/Night service
(11) Unlocks the door opener
(12) Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call
(13) Connected Line Identification Restriction
(14) Calling Line Identification Restriction
(15) Call Forwarding – Unconditional (CFU) / Busy (CFB) / No
Reply (CFNR)
(16) Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
(17) The ability to set Call Forwarding – from Hunting Group
(18) The ability to set Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night
[502] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line
[507] Do Not Disturb Override
[508] Account Code Entry Mode
[509]–[510] Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialling
— Day / Night
[511] Door Opener Access
[513] Night Service Access
[514] Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call
Features 3-45
C 3 Features
[516] Calling Line Identification Restriction
[517] Connected Line Identification Restriction
[518] CFU / CFB / CFNR Assignment
[519] Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
[520] Call Forwarding from Hunting Group
[521] Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line
[601] Class of Service
[613] ISDN Class of Service
[991] COS Additional Information
3-46 Features
3 Features C
Conditions • It is required to name CO lines and extensions by system programming.
• With the CLIP feature, the ISDN line informs the system of the caller’s
telephone number. To display the name, the system compares the
informed number with the System Speed Dialling Numbers stored in
program [001] and if a match is found, determines the caller’s name by
using the System Speed Dialling Names stored in program [002].
• The display DPT (KX-T7230, KX-T7235, KX-T7433 or KX-T7436)
user can record the call information received by the CLIP feature (Call
Log, Incoming feature).
• If the assigned information cannot be displayed, it will be shown
according to the following priority:
Caller →CO Line →DDI
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.4.2 CO Line Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialling Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialling Name Set
[003] Extension Number Set
[004] Extension Name Set
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set
[013] ISDN Extension Name Set
[421] CO Line Name Assignment
[622] Incoming Call Display
Features 3-47
C 3 Features
CO Line Connection Assignment
Description This allows you to specify the CO lines connected to your system
to prevent an extension user from originating an outside call by
selecting a line which is not connected. An idle line is selected
from the connected ones when an extension user makes an
Automatic Line Access.
Conditions If the user tries to make a call with a disconnected line, reorder tone
sounds to indicate that the line is out of use.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
[615]–[616] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night for
ISDN Extension
3-48 Features
3 Features C
CO Line Group
Description CO lines can be grouped into up to eight CO line groups. This
allows extensions to call outside parties without designating a
specific CO line, since a CO line is automatically selected from the
designated CO line group. All CO lines belonging to a CO line
group follow the assignment determined for that CO line group. A
list of assignments for each CO line group is shown below:
• The destination of Intercept Routing
• Disconnect Time
• Register Recall Signal Time
• Host PBX Access Code
• Pause Time (used in Speed Dialling and Recall)
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, CO line group line access
[401] CO Line Group Assignment
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day / Night
[411] Host PBX Access Codes
[412] Pause Time
[413] Register Recall Signal Time
[414] Disconnect Time
3-50 Features
3 Features C
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, CCBS cancel
[153] Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
[990] System Additional Information, Area 07 – Bits 16 and 15
Conference
Description The system supports three-party conference calls, including outside
or inside parties. During a two-party conversation, the extension
user can add a third party to their conversation, thereby establishing
a conference.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 3
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Conference (CONF) Button
Features 3-51
C 3 Features
Confirmation Tone
Description At the end of many different functions the system confirms the
success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to the
extension user through the speaker of the telephone.
Confirmation tone 1:
(a) Indicates that the new setting differs from the previous setting.
(b) Set or cancel the Electronic Station Lockout.
1s
Confirmation tone 2:
(a) Indicates that the new setting is identical to the previous setting.
(b) In addition, sent when various features are successfully
performed or accessed. (e.g. Call Hold; Automatic Callback Busy)
(c) Sent when accessing external paging equipment. (e.g. Paging –
All; Paging – External) Confirmation tone from external pagers
can be enabled or disabled.
1s
Confirmation tone 3:
Sent when a conversation is established just after dialling.
For example, when accessing the following features by the feature
numbers:
• Call Park Retrieve
• Call Pickup
• Hold Retrieve
• Paging / Paging Answer
• TAFAS Answer
This tone can be eliminated by system programming so that the
user can start talking instantly.
1s
3-52 Features
3 Features C
Confirmation tone 4:
Sent when moving from a two-party call to a three-party call, and
vice versa. (These are caused by Conference.) It is possible to
eliminate this tone by system programming.
1s
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bits 3 and 6
Features 3-53
C 3 Features
Console
Description The Direct Station Selection (DSS) or Attendant Console provides direct
access to extensions and features and busy lamp display.
The Console must be programmed to work with a proprietary telephone
(PT). System Programming assigns the jack numbers of the Console and
its associated PT.
Up to four consoles for the KX-TD816 and up to eight consoles for the
KX-TD1232 can be installed. System Connection* provides for 16
consoles. The paired telephone user can carry out the following
operations using the Console:
• Direct access to an extension (Direct Station Selection)
• Quick access to an outside party (One-Touch Dialling)
• Easy transfer of an outside call to an extension
(The programmable One-Touch Transfer feature provides
simplified operation.)
• Quick access to a system feature
The above functions are activated simply by pressing buttons on the
console which were pre-programmed as function buttons.
Consoles are provided with the following buttons listed below:
KX-T Consoles:
Buttons 7040 7240 7440 7441
DSS ✔ (32) ✔ (32) ✔ (64) ✔ (48)
PF (Programmable Feature) ✔ (16) ✔ (16)
ANSWER ✔
RELEASE ✔
Conditions • Programming the DSS and PF buttons can be done only from the paired
telephone using Station Programming or Programming with Personal
Computer. System Programming with a Proprietary Telephone is not
available.
• If the extension number assigned to a DSS button is changed to another
number, the DSS button automatically follows the new number. (Re-
programming is not necessary.)
• During System Connection,* Consoles must be paired with telephones
in the same system.
• If a port connected to a Console is programmed for XDP jack, a single
line telephone can be connected to the port in parallel.
• To use the KX-T7240 or KX-T7040 DSS Console with this system:
Take care that the button numberings are opposite of the KX-T7440 and
KX-T7441. The default settings of the DSS buttons are the same as that
of KX-T7441.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation
2.3.3 Extension Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[007] Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment
[600] Extra Device Port
Station Programming ......................................................User Manual
Customising the Buttons
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[990] System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bits 2 and 9
3-56 Features
3 Features D
Data Line Security
Description Data Line Security is a function that can be set by system
programming. Once set, communication between the extension
and the other end is protected from signal intrusions such as Call
Waiting and Hold Recall. Data equipment or a facsimile may be
connected to an extension jack so that the user can perform data
communications. During the communication, Data Line Security
maintains secure data transmission against tones or barging in from
other extensions.
Conditions • If one extension in a conversation has set Data Line Security, it applies
to the both extensions.
• The Intercept Routing – No Answer (IRNA) feature is not available for
incoming calls to the extensions to which the Data Line Security feature
is assigned.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[612] Data Line Security
Dial tone 2: Sounds when any one of the features below are set.
Absent Message Capability
Background Music (BGM) (for proprietary telephones only)
Call Forwarding
Call Pickup Deny
Call Waiting
Features 3-57
D 3 Features
Data Line Security
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Electronic Station Lockout
Pickup Dialling
Timed Reminder
1s
Dial tone 4: Sounds when messages are waiting for the extension.
1s
Conditions None
Programming References
No programming required.
3-58 Features
3 Features D
Pulse Dial (Rotary) Mode
The dialling signal from an extension, either in tone or pulse,
is converted to pulse dialling. Pulse signals are transmitted to
the CO line.
Call Blocking Mode
Set this mode on CO lines that can receive both tone and
pulse, but under contract with the Central Office for pulse
dialling only. When dialling to the line using an MF4
telephone, only pulse signals are sent to the Central Office.
Conditions • It is possible for the extension user to temporarily convert the pre-
assigned pulse dialling mode to DTMF mode (Pulse to Tone
Conversion). DTMF mode cannot be changed to pulse.
• In case a CO line can receive both DTMF and pulse signals and is
contracted for DTMF with a Central Office, DTMF mode should be
selected for the line. If it is contracted for pulse dialling mode, Call
Blocking mode should be selected for the line.
• If a line is assigned Pulse Dial mode, select an appropriate pulse speed,
pulse break ratio, and inter-digit pause for the line, if needed. If a line
is assigned DTMF, select an appropriate DTMF duration for the line, if
needed.
• After a held call is retrieved, the dial mode goes back to the one
originally programmed on the CO line.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[402] Dial Mode Selection
[403] Pulse Speed Selection
[404] DTMF Time
[990] System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bit 4,
Area 02 – Bits 7, 12 and 11
Features 3-59
D 3 Features
Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming ISDN line call to a
specific extension. Assignable destinations are: Assignable
destinations are: (1) Operator, (2) extension, (3) Hunting Group,
(4) TAFAS, (5) modem, (6) Phantom extension, (7) Voice Mail
extension, (8) ISDN extension and (9) external ringer. This
requires a number received from the ISDN network. The number is
converted to a specific extension number by using a pre-
programmed conversion table.
Conditions • To use the DDI service, “DDI” must be selected in program [420]/[429]
“ISDN Ringing Service Assignment — Day / Night”.
• An incoming DDI call is converted as programmed in [111] “ISDN
DDI / MSN Removed Digit / Added Number Assignment”.
• If an incoming DDI call cannot be sent to a specific extension, it will be
sent to an operator or extension according to DIL 1:N. Selecting an
operator or extension depends on program [990] “System Additional
Information, Area 01 – Bits 5 and 6”.
• It is possible to deny answering the DDI call on a Class of Serve basis.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[111] ISDN DDI / MSN Removed Digit / Added Number Assignment
[150] ISDN DDI Translation Table
[151]–[152] ISDN DDI Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
[420]/[429] ISDN Ring Service Assignment — Day / Night
[990] System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bits 5 and 6
3-60 Features
3 Features D
Direct In Lines (DIL)
Description Enables an incoming outside call to go directly to one or more
answering points.
DIL 1:1 puts an incoming outside call to a single destination.
Assignable destinations are: (1) extension; (2) modem; (3) external
pager, (4) Hunting group, (5) Phantom extension, (6)Voice Mail
and (7) ISDN extension. This CO line can be used by multiple
extension users to make calls but can be used by only one extension
to receive calls.
DIL 1:N puts an incoming outside call to multiple destinations.
Assignable destinations are extensions only. This CO line can be
used by multiple extension users to make and receive calls.
Both DIL 1:1 and 1:N can have different destinations for day and
night modes (Night Service).
Conditions • If a CO line is programmed for both DIL 1:1 and DIL 1:N, it is
regarded as a DIL 1:1 line.
• DIL 1:1 to the modem allows the caller to perform remote
administration. DIL 1:1 to an external pager causes the pager to ring
when receiving incoming calls (TAFAS feature).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
Features 3-61
D 3 Features
Display, Call Information
Description The display proprietary telephone shows the user the following call
information:
Conditions • Extension numbers and names, and CO line names are programmable.
If no name is stored, only the number is displayed.
• The display shows no intercom call duration.
• The outgoing outside call duration starts when the programmable timer
expires.
• It is programmable to select the first display, meter or charge, by system
programming. To alternate the display, press the CO button.
• The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by system
programming.
3-62 Features
3 Features D
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[003] Extension Number Set
[004] Extension Name Set
[117] Charge Display Selection
[125] Assignment of Denomination
[212] Call Duration Count Start Time
[421] CO Line Name Assignment
Features 3-63
D 3 Features
• If the display characters exceed 16 digits, the mark “&” is shown at the
right-hand edge.
• This is used to display the data programmed for each PF
(Programmable Feature), DSS, SAVE, or REDIAL button. If Full-One
Touch Dialling is enabled on the telephone Full-One Touch Dialling
will be active instead.
Programming References
No programming required.
Programming References
System Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Programming Information
3-64 Features
3 Features D
Display, Time and Date
Description Offers the display proprietary telephone user a display of either the
present time and the date or the date and the day of the week. It is
displayed while on-hook.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[000] Date and Time Set
Conditions The adjusting method depends on the type of proprietary telephone (PT)
you have.
• With a KX-T7400 series digital PT, the MODE or Soft buttons and the
Jog Dial are used to select from three available levels.
• With a KX-T7200 series digital PT, the Soft buttons and the Volume
button are used to select from three available levels.
• With an analogue PT, a sliding lever on the telephone (CONTRAST
selector) is used to select from three available levels.
Programming References
No programming required.
Features 3-65
D 3 Features
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Description Allows an extension user to appear busy to an incoming extension
call or allows to transfer an incoming outside call to the assigned
extension. This can be set or cancelled by the extension user.
Conditions • If your proprietary telephone (PT) is not supplied with the FWD/DND
button, it can be assigned on a flexible button.
• DND does not work for the following calls: doorphone calls; recalls for
hold / Timed Reminder alarm.
• A PT user in DND mode can answer a call by pressing the button
showing the arrival of the call.
• An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who
are allowed to override DND in their Class of Service (Do Not Disturb
Override).
• The following extension cannot set DND: operator, the Call Forwarding
(C.FWD) destination or the DND destination.
• When the extension has set the C.FWD, DND or DND for Direct
Dialling In Call, the extension cannot be a DND destination.
• Setting this feature cancels C.FWD or DND for Direct Dialling In Call.
• If the destination extension has DND activated, then the DSS button
corresponding to it will light up red. This indicates to the proprietary
telephone or console user that the destination extension is unavailable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – FWD/DND Button
3-66 Features
3 Features D
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call
Description Allows the pre-assigned extension user to reject to answer the direct
dialling in call on Class of Service basis. The rejected call will be
transferred to an operator. The operator cannot reject the direct dialling in
call. This feature is one of the ISDN services.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Do not disturb for DDI
[514] Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – DND for Direct Dialling In Call Button
Conditions Class of Service (COS) programming determines the extension users who
can perform DND Override.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[507] Do Not Disturb Override
Features 3-67
D 3 Features
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Door Opener
Description Allows the extension users to unlock the door for a visitor from
their telephones. The door can be unlocked by extension users who
have been programmed to receive doorphone calls. However,
while engaged on a doorphone call, any extension user can open
the door from the telephone to let the visitor in.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.4.11 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Door opener
[122] Automatic Door Open Assignment
[511] Door Open Access
[607]–[608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.4.11 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Doorphone call
[607]–[608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
Conditions • Class of Service programming determines the extension users who can
forward the doorphone calls to ISDN lines.
• If the transferred call is not answered within the programmed intercept
time, the line will be disconnected.
• If the doorphone button is pressed again before the call is answered, the
intercept timer starts again.
• If a call between a party at a doorphone and an outside party is
established with this feature, the duration of the call period may be
restricted depending on the setting of the system timer.
• When a doorphone call is transferred to an outside party, either the
extension at Jack 01-1 or Operator 1 can be selected for the charge
account.
• When the LCR feature is functioning, the data of Jack 01-1 is used as
the itemized code programmed in [7003] “Itemized Code Set.” The
data of Operator 1 is also available.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[021]–[022] Doorphone Call Forwarding — Day / Night
[100] Flexible Numbering, Doorphone call forwarding to CO line /
Doorphone call forwarding mode switch
[218] Doorphone-to-CO Line Call Duration Time
[521] Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line
[607]–[608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
[990] System Additional Information, Area 06 – Bit 14
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line Button
3-70 Features
3 Features E
Electronic Station Lockout
Description Allows the extension users to lock their stations so that other users
cannot make outgoing outside calls. Any 3-digit numeric code can
be used to lock the station. The same code is used to unlock it.
Conditions • Making intercom calls and receiving intercom or outside calls are
permitted on the locked station.
• Remote Station Lock Control overrides Electronic Station Lockout. If
the operator sets Remote Station Lock on a station that has already been
locked by the station user, the user cannot unlock it.
• It is programmable to admit the press of the Register Recall button
during an outside call on the locked station.
• Emergency dial numbers programmed in [311] “Emergency Dial
Number Set” can be dialled on a locked station.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Electronic station lockout
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 5
Features 3-71
E 3 Features
Emergency Call
Description Allows the extension user to dial out a pre-assigned emergency
number after seizing the CO line.
Conditions • Emergency numbers are allowed to call even in the following cases;
• in Account Code – Verified mode
• in any toll restriction level
• after the pre-assigned charge limit is reached
• in Electronic Station Lockout
• A maximum of ten emergency numbers are assignable. Any number
can be stored as an emergency number. (999) and (112) are already
stored by default settings.
• The LCR feature is not available for the emergency call.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[311] Emergency Dial Number Set
Conditions • If the dial type of the line is assigned to DTMF, Tone Through mode is
established automatically after the dialling sequence is finished and the
call is established.
• If the dial type of the line is assigned to dial pulse, Tone Through mode
is established after the dialling sequence is finished and the “ #”
buttons are pressed (Pulse to Tone Conversion).
• This function also applies to extension and conference calls.
Programming References
No programming required.
3-72 Features
3 Features E
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Dial Type Selection Pulse to Tone Conversion
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[611] Extension Connection Assignment
Extension Group
Description The system supports 16 extension groups. Any member of an
extension group can pick up a call directed to another group
member (Group Call Pickup) or can make a voice announcement to
another group member (Paging – Group).
Conditions • Every extension should belong to an extension group and can belong to
more than one group simultaneously.
• If System Connection* is employed, an extension group can include
extensions on both systems.
• The floating number can be assigned on extension group basis.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[602] Extension Group Assignment
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, External feature access
[413] Register Recall Signal Time
[990] System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bit 3
3-74 Features
3 Features E
EXtra Device Port (XDP)
Description EXtra Device Port (XDP) expands the number of telephones available
in the system by allowing an extension jack to contain two
telephones. A digital proprietary telephone (DPT) and a single line
telephone (SLT) or console and SLT can be connected to the same
jack but have different extension numbers so that they can act as
completely different extensions.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.4 EXtra Device Port (XDP) Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[600] EXtra Device Port
Features 3-75
F 3 Features
Flexible Numbering
Description The numbers used for the access codes of system features and the
number used for extension numbers are not fixed. They can be set
as required provided there are not any conflicts. Feature numbers
can be from one to three digits, utilizing numbers “0 through 9” as
well as “ ” and “#.” Extension numbers can be two to four digits
in length. Any number can be set as the leading first or second
digit. If one digit is assigned as the leading digit, some extensions
have 2-digit numbers and some have 3-digit numbers. If two digits
are assigned as the leading digits, some have 3-digit numbers and
some have 4-digit numbers.
3-76 Features
3 Features F
Flexible Feature Numbers Number Feature Default
44 Not available —
45 Call waiting / OHCA / Whisper OHCA 731
46 Not available —
47 Pickup dialling 74
48 Absent message 750
49 Timed reminder 76
50 Electronic station lockout 77
51 Night service mode 78
52 Parallel telephone mode 69
53 Background music – external 65
54 Paging – deny 721
55 Primary COS select 791
56 Secondary COS select 793
57 Log-in / log-out 45
58 Operator 1 call None
59 Operator 2 call None
60 Automatic callback busy cancel 46
61-69 Not available —
70 Timed reminder remote 7
71 Call log, incoming 56
72 Do not disturb for DDI 54
73 CLIR 59
74 COLR 58
75 Incoming call log lock 57
76† Live call screening password control† 799
77 System working report 794
78 Super extra device port (SXDP) 48
79 Outgoing message 712
80 CLIP / COLP 711
81 Reserved —
82 Call forwarding from hunting group 714
83 Doorphone call forwarding to CO line 715
84 Doorphone call forwarding mode switch 716
85 CCBS cancel 713
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Features 3-77
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one
that supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
F 3 Features
In addition to the flexible feature numbers above, fixed feature
numbers are provided.
Conditions • Flexible feature numbers can only be dialled during dial tone.
• The following are examples of feature number conflicts:
Examples: 1 and 11, 0 and 00, 2 and 21, 10 and 101, 32 and 321, etc.
• Some flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the
feature active. For example, to set Call Waiting, the feature number for
“Call Waiting” must be followed by “1” and to cancel it, the same
feature number should be followed by “0.”
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[003] Extension Number Set
[100] Flexible Numbering
3-78 Features
3 Features F
Floating Station
Description You can assign virtual extension numbers for resources to make them
appear to be extensions. These numbers are defined as floating
numbers (FN). The following resources can have floating numbers:
(1) External paging instruments: used for TAFAS feature.
For KX-TD816, two FNs are available. For KX-TD1232,
four FNs are available.
These FNs can be assigned as:
a) DIL 1:1 destination
b) Intercept Routing destination
(2) Modem: used for system administration. One FN is available.
This can be assigned as:
a) DIL 1:1 destination
b) and also can be used as an extension number to call
the modem.
(3) Hunting group: used for Station Hunting feature. 32 FNs
are available. These FNs can be assigned as:
a) DIL 1:1 destination
b) Extension
c) Intercept Routing destination
d) DDI / MSN destination
e) Hunting Group – overflow
(4) Digital Test Access: used for testing. One DTA is
available. The FN can be used as an extension.
Conditions Floating numbers cannot be used for setting a feature such as Call
Forwarding, etc.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.5 External Pager Connection
2.4.8 Remote Card Installation*1
2.4.9 9600bps Speed Remote Unit*2 / Message Unit Installation
2.4.10 9600bps Speed Remote Card / Message Card*2 Installation
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks
[813] Floating Number Assignment
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Initial Settings – Full One-Touch Dialling Assignment
3-80 Features
3 Features H
Handset / Headset Selection
Description The system supports the use of headsets on proprietary telephones.
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Initial Settings – Handset/Headset Selection
Conditions • This is effective for the handset microphone only. Only your voice will
be muted during a handset conversation.
• The user can hear the other party’s voice during Handset Microphone
Mute.
Programming References
No programming required.
Features 3-81
H 3 Features
Handsfree Answerback
Description Allows the speakerphone telephone user to talk to a caller without
lifting the handset, if the user has set handsfree answerback mode.
If the user receives an intercom call in the mode, handsfree
conversation is established immediately after the user hears beep
tone and the caller hears confirmation tone.
Programming Reference
No programming required.
Handsfree Operation
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to dial and to talk to the other
party without lifting the handset. Pressing an appropriate button
provides handsfree mode.
Conditions • This function can be utilized by pressing a button listed below when the
SP-PHONE / MONITOR button indicator is off:
SP-PHONE button; MONITOR button; INTERCOM button; CO button
• The KX-T7050 and the KX-T7250 can be used for handsfree dialling
operations, etc., but cannot be used for handsfree conversation.
• A single press of a One-Touch Button, DSS button, REDIAL button or
a SAVE button also provides handsfree mode if Full One-Touch
Dialling is enabled.
3-82 Features
3 Features H
Programming References
No programming required.
Hold Recall
Description Prevents a call on hold from being kept waiting longer than a pre-
determined time. If the timer expires, ringing or an alarm tone is
generated as a reminder to the user who held the call. If the user is
on-hook and its speaker-phone is off, the phone is rung. If the user
is off-hook or in speakerphone mode when the timer expires an
alarm tone is sent from the built-in speaker of a proprietary
telephone (PT) or from the handset receiver of a single line
telephone at 15-second intervals.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[200] Hold Recall Time
Features 3-83
H 3 Features
Host PBX Access
Description The system may be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is
performed by connecting a line from the host to a CO line in the
Digital Super Hybrid System.
Conditions • To enable Host PBX Access, put the host PBX line in a CO line group.
The user accesses the host PBX by selecting that CO line.
• A Host PBX Access Code is required to access CO lines of the host
PBX.
• A pause, if programmed, can be inserted between the user-dialled Host
PBX Access Code and the following digits (Automatic Pause Insertion).
Program the pause time required by the Host PBX for that CO line
group.
• Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible (External
Feature Access).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[411] Host PBX Access Codes
[412] Pause Time
3-84 Features
3 Features H
HOTEL APPLICATION
Description Allows the operator to handle the front/operator services such as
check-in / check-out, timed reminder (wake-up call) and room
management. This operation is applicable to only the operator
extension with the KX-T7235 or KX-T7436.
Check-In / Check-Out
Description Allows the operator to operate the check-in / check-out service.
This feature can control the usage of an outside call by switching
the Class of Service between primary and secondary, and count
and print out the telephone charge and the other charges such as
mini-bar.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[010] Budget Management
[011] Charge Margin and Tax Rate
[123] Hotel Application
[990] System Additional Information, Area 05 – Bits 6 and 8
Features 3-85
H 3 Features
Room Management
Description Allows the extension user to print out the information of a guest
room (e.g. cleaning status of the room and the total of the minibar
charge) with a telephone in each room. Absent messages No.6
through No.9 can be printed out.
Conditions None
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[008] Absent Messages
[990] System Additional Information, Area 05 – Bit 7
Conditions • When either an operator or the extension sets a new time, the pre-set
time is cleared.
• When a wake-up call is not answered, the operator’s Alert indicator
(KX-T7235 and KX-T7436 only) will flash.
• Timed Reminder, set by either the operator or the extension user, is
canceled when the guest checks out.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Timed reminder, remote
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Alert Button
3-86 Features
3 Features H
Hunting Group
Description The system supports thirty-two hunting groups. The station
hunting feature is assigned on the hunting group basis.
Hunting works when an incoming call arrives at an floating number
for a hunting group. However, for VM/AA hunting, an incoming
call to any extension number which belongs to a hunting group is
hunted as well.
The following assignments are determined for the hunting group.
• Floating Extension Number
• The Hunting Group Name
• Numbers of Waiting Queues
• Overflow Status
• The Destination of Intercept Routing — Day/Night
• Hunting Type
Conditions • Each extension can belong to more than one group simultaneously.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type
[131] Hunting Group Assignment
[132] Hunting Group Name
[133] Hunting Overflow
[134]–[135] Hunting Intercept — Day / Night
[813] Floating Number Assignment
Features 3-87
I 3 Features
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
Description The system can manage a call received from the ISDN line by
point-to-point or point-to-multi-point configuration.
An optional ISDN Line Card/Unit, KX-TD280, KX-TD281, KX-
TD282 or KX-TD286 is required.
Point-to-point
A call received through one ISDN port is sent directly to a specific
extension using a Direct Dialling In (DDI) service.
Point-to-multi-point
One ISDN port can support a maximum of ten Multiple Subscriber
Numbers (MSN). A call received through an ISDN port is sent
directly to the pre-assigned extension if the dialled number matches
the stored MSN.
Disable MSN
DDI
The extensions which are The system searches for the The system searches for the
assigned in program [603]– converted number in program [150] converted number in program [437]
[604] “DIL 1:N Extension “ISDN DDI Translation Table.” “Multiple Subscriber Number Set.”
and Delayed Ringing – Day /
Night” receive calls.
DDI MSN
3-88 Features
3 Features I
Conditions • After ISDN assignments, you should reset the system so that the
assignments are effective.
• If “Disable” is assigned in programs [420]/[429] “ISDN Ring Service
Assignment — Day / Night” and an extension is not assigned in
programs [407]–[408] “DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night,” the call will
be received by DIL 1:N.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation
2.4.2 CO Line Connection (Optional Card)
2.4.4 CO Line Connection (Optional Unit)
2.4.7 Internal ISDN S0 Line Connection
2.7 System Restart
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[109] Expansion Card / Unit Type
[111] ISDN DDI / MSN Removed Digit / Added Number Assignment
[150] ISDN DDI Translation Table
[151]–[152] ISDN DDI Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night
[420]/[429] ISDN Ring Service Assignment — Day / Night
[422] ISDN Port Type
[423] ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode
[424] ISDN Configuration
[425] ISDN Data Link Mode
[426] ISDN TEI Mode
[437] Multiple Subscriber Number Set
[438]–[439] Extension Ringing Assignment — Day/Night for ISDN MSN
[440] TD286 ISDN Port Type
[441] TD286 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode
[442] TD286 ISDN Configuration
[443] TD286 ISDN Data Link Mode
[444] TD286 ISDN TEI Mode
• The recommended parameter combinations are listed below. The
underlined selections are recommended.
[422]/[440] [423]/[441] [424]/[442] [425]/[443] [426]/[444]
Program ISDN Port ISDN Layer 1 ISDN ISDN Date ISDN TEI
Type Active Mode Configuration Link Mode Mode
CO Call/ Point Call/ Fix
(DDI) Permanent Permanent
Features 3-89
I 3 Features
Feature References Section 3, Features
Direct Dialling In (DDI) Multiple Subscriber Number
(MSN) Ringing Service
3-90 Features
3 Features I
Conditions • After ISDN assignments, you should reset the system so that the
assignments are effective.
• Class of Service and department code for ISDN port apply to all
terminal equipment on the same S0 bus.
• Each port can be assigned as follows:
*1 and *2: can be either an external or internal ISDN S0 line.
*1: when assigned as internal, the corresponding analog CO ports or
ISDN ports become available.
If the KX-TD286 is installed together with the KX-TD281 or KX-
TD282, it is not possible to assign the same port as an external ISDN S0
line. If it is done, only the port of the KX-TD286 becomes available.
TD816 TD1232
CO ISDN TD282 TD280 TD286 CO ISDN TD281 TD280 TD286
No. Port No. Port
1, 2 1 *2 — *1 1, 2 1 External — *1
3, 4 2 — — *1 3, 4 2 External — *1
5, 6 3 — *2 *2 5, 6 3 *2 — *1
7, 8 4 — *2 *2 7, 8 4 *2 — *1
— 5 — — Internal 9, 10 5 — *2 *2
— 6 — — Internal 11, 12 6 — *2 *2
Connection References
Section 2, Installation
2.4.2 CO Line Connection (Optional Card)
2.4.4 CO Line Connection (Optional Unit)
2.4.7 Internal ISDN S0 Line Connection
2.7 System Restart
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set
[013] ISDN Extension Name Set
[014] Budget Management on ISDN Port
[017] TD286 Extension Number Set
[018] TD286 Extension Name Set
[019] Budget Management on TD286 Port
[109] Expansion Card / Unit Type
[422] ISDN Port Type
[423] ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode
[424] ISDN Configuration
[425] ISDN Data Link Mode
[426] ISDN TEI Mode
Features 3-91
I 3 Features
[427] ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number
[428] ISDN Extension Progress Tone
[440] TD286 ISDN Port Type
[441] TD286 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode
[442] TD286 ISDN Configuration
[443] TD286 ISDN Data Link Mode
[444] TD286 ISDN TEI Mode
[445] TD286 ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number
[446] TD286 ISDN Extension Progress Tone
[437] Multiple Subscriber Number Set
[438]–[439] Extension Ringing Assignment — Day / Night for ISDN
MSN
[613] ISDN Class of Service
[615]–[616] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night for
ISDN Extension
[627] TD286 Class of Service
[629]–[630] Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment — Day / Night for
TD286 Extension
3-92 Features
3 Features I
Intercept Routing
Description Provides automatic redirection of incoming outside calls. There are
two types of Intercept Routing. In the first case, a call cannot be
placed to the called party. This is called Rerouting. In the second
case the call is not answered within a programmed time period.
This is called Intercept Routing – No Answer (IRNA).
Items which can have the Intercept Routing destination are:
(1) CO Line Group, (2) Extension, and (3) Hunting Group.
Conditions • Intercept Routing applies to DIL 1:1, DIL 1:N, TAFAS, Call
Forwarding, and Station Hunting.
• The final destination of intercepted calls must be programmed for day
and night modes. There are four possible destinations:
1) an extension 4) a phantom extension
2) an external pager 5) a voice mail extension
3) a hunting group
• Intercept Routing is activated as shown below, depending on the
combination of incoming type and called destination.
• If Call Forwarding to CO Line feature is set at the IRNA destination,
the call will be forwarded to the specific outside party.
Extension External Pager/ Hunting Group
including Operator Internal ISDN/
Phantom Extension
Assigned CO line No incoming calls No incoming calls
DIL 1:N group are received. are received.
Registered Assigned CO line Assigned hunting
DIL 1:1 extension group group
Registered Assigned CO line Assigned hunting
DDI extension group group
No more Intercept No more Intercept Assigned hunting
Intercept Routing Routing group
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[203] Intercept Time
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day / Night
[620]–[621] Extension Intercept Routing — Day / Night
Features 3-93
I 3 Features
Intercom Calling
Description Allows the extension user to call another extension user within the
system.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[003] Extension Number Set
[004] Extension Name Set
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set
[013] ISDN Extension Name Set
[017] TD286 Extension Number Set
[018] TD286 Extension Name Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – DSS Button
3-94 Features
3 Features L
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
Description Least Cost Routing (LCR) is a system programmable feature that
automatically selects the least expensive route available at the time
a call is made. Previous programming eliminates the need for the
user to dial the access code of the least expensive carrier.
The appropriate CO line group is selected and an appropriate
access code is added before the number is outpulsed.
General Description
The dialling plan for a long distance call could be as follows:
0NXX-NXX-XXXX
0NXX-NXXXXX
(N=2-9; X=0-9)
<Example>
London 0207
0208
Birmingham 0121
Edinburgh 0131
Glasgow 0141
Liverpool 0151
Manchester 0161
Tyneside 0191
Wearside 0191
Other Areas 0NXX
The charged fee is decided by the first digits of the dialled number
and time zone per carrier. For example, if charged fee by a
carrier is as follows, program the carrier’s fee in time zones.
The system compares each carrier’s charged fee and selects
the least expensive carrier for the call.
Features 3-95
L 3 Features
Example of Charged Fee for Carrier
Area Area 1 Area 2 ••• Area 8
021,0333,0444 031,0344,0455 ••• 061,091,0355
Area Code 0555, 0666 0566, 0677 0577, 0588
Peak Rate •••
(9 a.m.–1 p.m., Mon.–Fri.) £1.00 £2.00 £5.00
Cheapest Rate
(6 p.m.–8 a.m., Mon.–Fri.) £0.50 £1.00 ••• £2.00
(6 a.m., Fri.–8 p.m., Mon.)
3-96 Features
3 Features L
(4) Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment (Program
[103])
Usually this table is used for automatic line access in non-LCR
mode. In LCR mode, if the system cannot find out the dialled
number in Carrier Access Tables or LCR Routing Plan Tables, or
if the system finds out the same number as the user-dialled number
in Emergency Dial Number Set table or LCR Exceptional Code Set
table, this table is used to select a CO.
Features 3-97
L 3 Features
Example of programming tables
Route Plan Table 1
Leading digit table 1 Time zone and fee table 1
01 021 Monday Tuesday ••• Sunday
02 0333 Start time Fee Start time Fee ••• Start time Fee
03 0444 8:00AM 0.75 8:00AM 0.75 ••• All day 0.50
04 0555 9:00AM 1.00 9:00AM 1.00 •••
05 0666 1:00PM 0.75 1:00PM 0.75 •••
• • 6:00PM 0.50 6:00PM 0.50 •••
• •
• •
80
• •
• •
• •
3-98 Features
3 Features L
(4) Authorization Code Set (Program [7X24])
This is used to register an authorization code of a carrier to a CO
line. The code is inserted at the ‘A’ position of the LCR Carrier
Modify Command.
Example
Authorization code table
CO Authorization
No. Code
01 11111
02 22222
03 33333
• •
• •
• •
24 12121
Example
Itemized code table
Extension Itemized
No. Code
201 201
202 202
203 203
• •
• •
• •
364 364
Features 3-99
L 3 Features
Example
LCR exceptional code table
01 0235
02 0332
• •
• •
• •
80
Programming Examples
(A) If you use BTL/MCL
If you use MCL only for long distance calls, you may program the
following tables to decide the carrier. In the table the wild card
characters “ ” substitute all the digits except the codes in the
LCR Exceptional Code Set table. All the dialled numbers except
for the excepted codes are sent to the MCL. The excepted codes
are sent to the BTL.
(1) Route Plan Table 1
Leading digit table 1 Time zone and fee table 1
01 0 Monday Tuesday ••• Sunday
02 Start time Fee Start time Fee ••• Start time Fee
03 •••
04 •••
05 •••
• • •••
• •
• •
80
01 0235
02 0332
• •
• •
• •
80
3-100 Features
3 Features L
(1) Carrier Table for MCL
Route Plan Table 1 (“A” rate calls up to 56km)
Leading digit table 1 Time zone and fee table 1
01 021 Monday Tuesday ••• Sunday
02 0333 Start time Fee Start time Fee ••• Start time Fee
03 0444 8:00AM 0.75 8:00AM 0.75 ••• All day 0.50
04 0555 9:00AM 1.00 9:00AM 1.00 •••
05 0666 1:00PM 0.75 1:00PM 0.75 •••
• • 6:00PM 0.50 6:00PM 0.50 •••
• •
• •
80
Route Plan Table 2 (“B1” rate calls on frequently used route over 56km)
Leading digit table 2 Time zone and fee table 2
01 061 Monday Tuesday ••• Sunday
02 091 Start time Fee Start time Fee ••• Start time Fee
03 0355 8:00AM 1.50 8:00AM 1.50 ••• All day 1.00
04 0577 9:00AM 2.00 9:00AM 2.00 •••
05 0588 1:00PM 1.50 1:00PM 1.50 •••
• • 6:00PM 1.00 6:00PM 1.00 •••
• •
• •
80
Features 3-101
L 3 Features
(2) Carrier Table for SPLASH TELECOM Line
Route Plan Table 1 (“A” rate calls up to 56km)
Leading digit table 1 Time zone and fee table 1
01 021 Monday Tuesday ••• Sunday
02 0333 Start time Fee Start time Fee ••• Start time Fee
03 0444 8:00AM 0.50 8:00AM 0.50 ••• All day 0.40
04 0555 9:00AM 1.00 9:00AM 1.00 •••
05 0666 1:00PM 0.50 1:00PM 0.50 •••
• • 6:00PM 0.40 6:00PM 0.40 •••
• •
• •
80
Route Plan Table 2 (“B1” rate calls on frequently used route over 56km)
Leading digit table 2 Time zone and fee table 2
01 061 Monday Tuesday ••• Sunday
02 091 Start time Fee Start time Fee ••• Start time Fee
03 0355 8:00AM 1.20 8:00AM 1.20 ••• All day 1.20
04 0577 9:00AM 2.30 9:00AM 2.30 •••
05 0588 1:00PM 1.70 1:00PM 1.70 •••
• • 6:00PM 1.20 6:00PM 1.20 •••
• •
• •
80
3-102 Features
3 Features L
LCR Sequence chart
START
Dial 9 or
Dial 81-88 or
Press CO button or
Press Group-CO button or
Press Loop-CO button
Check dialled number with emergency Hit Selects CO from Automatic access
dial table or BTL access code table CO line group table and dials out
Not Hit
Not Hit
Obtains each carrier’s charged fee by area Selects CO from LCR CO line group table
code and current time
CO indicator is on.
Compares each carrier’s charged fee and Modifies number by using LCR
selects least costly carrier carrier modification table
Features 3-103
L 3 Features
Conditions • Toll Restriction check is done before LCR is applied.
• LCR works according to the selected dialling plan. If the user-dialled
number is not found in the dialling plans, the dialled number is sent out
with Local Access (Automatic line access) Code.
• This feature also applies to Call Forwarding – to CO Line.
• The same code with different digits may be assigned in program [7X01]
“LCR Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8” or in program [7X20]
“LCR Exceptional Code Set.” In this case, the code which has smaller
digits takes the more expensive route is priority. To prevent this, enter
“ ” (wild card) after the code with the smaller digits. Examples are
shown below:
<Examples>
(1) The code priority is as follows:
“044” in program [7201] > “0444” in program [7101]
In this case, “044 ” should be assigned in program [7201].
(2) The code priority is as follows:
“0332” in program [7120] > “03323” in program [7120]
In this case, “0332 ” should be assigned in program [7120].
• When making a call to an ISDN line using the memory dialling, and the
number has a pause in it, the number after the pause will be sent to the
line as DTMF signals. This function is useful when accessing a special
network service which can be accessed only by the DTMF signaling.
Program [990], Area 07 – bit 1, is used to enable or disable this function
(default: disabled).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Automatic line access / LCR
[103] Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment
[311] Emergency Dial Number Set
[677] PS Itemized Code Set
[7000] LCR Mode
[7002] BTL Access Code
[7003] Itemized Code Set
[7004] Internal ISDN Itemized Code Set
[7X01] LCR Leading Digit Entry
[7X11] LCR Time and Fee Set
[7X20] LCR Exceptional Code Set
[7X21] LCR Carrier Code
[7X22] LCR Carrier Modify Command
Note: [7X23] LCR CO Line Group Assignment
X=carrier number 1-8 [7X24] Authorization Code Set
[990] System Additional Information, Area 06 – Bit 5, Area 07 – Bit 1
3-104 Features
3 Features L
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Line Access, Automatic
Features 3-105
L 3 Features
LED Indication, CO Line
Description The LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicators of the buttons
associated with CO lines tell the line conditions with a variety of
lighting patterns. This allows the user to determine which lines are
idle and which lines are in use. The table on the next page shows
the lighting patterns and line conditions according to the CO button
type.
Slow flash
Moderate flash
Rapid flash
1s
Conditions Red slow flash indication appears on the S-CO button only.
Programming References
No programming required.
3-106 Features
3 Features L
Operation References Not applicable.
Conditions None
Programming References
No programming required.
Features 3-107
L 3 Features
Limited Call Duration
Description Limited Call Duration is a system programmable feature that
disconnects an outside call when a specified timer expires. A
warning tone is sent to the extension user 15 seconds, 10 seconds,
and 5 seconds before the time-limit. Limiting the call duration can
be enabled or disabled by Class of Service (COS) for each
extension.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[205] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time
[502] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 2
Conditions • This feature functions with Least Cost Routing (LCR), if LCR is
enabled. If so, the least expensive route is automatically selected.
• Each extension is subject to system programming items for CO lines
available to access.
• An idle CO line is selected from the CO line groups assigned to the
station. If one CO line group is available, an idle line is selected from
that group. If multiple CO line groups are available, the CO line group
hunting sequence is determined by system programming.
3-108 Features
3 Features L
• This feature requires a CO button (G-CO, L-CO or S-CO) assignment
on a proprietary telephone (PT). Dialling the line access code selects a
CO button on a PT according to the priority:
S-CO > G-CO > L-CO on a hunted CO line group
• If Idle Line Preference – Outgoing is set on the telephone, the user can
access an idle line only by going off-hook.
• The system waits for a programmed time before dialling after a CO line
is seized.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Automatic line access / LCR
[103] Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment
[211] Dial Start Time
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Features 3-109
L 3 Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, CO line group line access
[211] Dial Start Time
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[401] CO Line Group Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Group-CO (G-CO) Button
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[211] Dial Start Time
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Group-CO (G-CO) Button, Loop-CO (L-CO)
Button, Single-CO (S-CO) Button
3-110 Features
3 Features L
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Button, Group-CO (G-CO) CO Line Connection Assignment
Button, Loop-CO (L-CO) – Outgoing
Button, Single-CO (S-CO)
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[211] Dial Start Time
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
— Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Single-CO (S-CO) Button
Features 3-111
L 3 Features
Line Preference – Incoming (No Line / Prime Line / Ringing Line)
Description A proprietary telephone user can select the method used to answer
incoming calls from the following three line preferences:
(1) No Line Preference
No line is selected when you go off-hook. You must select
a line to answer.
(2) Prime Line Preference
You can assign a prime line beforehand and answer a call
on that line, when multiple calls are received
simultaneously.
(3) Ringing Line Preference
When you go off-hook, you answer the call ringing at your
telephone.
Conditions • Setting a new line preference feature cancels the previous setting.
• If Prime Line Preference is selected and an incoming call arrives from a
line other than the prime line, it cannot be answered just by going off-
hook. The Prime Line should be assigned to the Single-CO button.
• If Ringing Line Preference is selected, going off-hook does not answer
a line programmed for “no ring” even though there is an incoming call.
Going off-hook during the delay time does not answer a line
programmed for “delayed ringing.”
• A single line telephone is always set to Ringing Line Preference and
cannot be changed.
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Initial Settings – Preferred Line Assignment – Incoming
3-112 Features
3 Features L
Line Preference – Outgoing (Idle Line / No Line / Prime Line)
Description A proprietary telephone user can select a desired outgoing line
preference to originate calls from the following three line
preferences:
(1) Idle Line Preference:
When you go off-hook, you are connected to an idle line.
An idle line is automatically selected from the pre-assigned
lines.
(2) No Line Preference:
No line is selected when you go off-hook. You must select
a line to make a call.
(3) Prime Line Preference:
When you go off-hook, you are connected to the pre-
assigned line. Assign a line as your prime line beforehand.
Conditions • Setting a new line preference feature cancels the previous setting.
• To set Prime Line Preference, one prime line is selected from intercom
or CO lines.
• The CO lines used by users must be connected by programming.
• To select Idle Line Preference, CO lines available for the user should be
programmed. Also CO lines available for Automatic Line Access
should be assigned.
• The user can override the Idle / Prime Line Preference temporarily to
select a specific line. To select it, press the desired line access button
(INTERCOM or CO button) before going off-hook or pressing the SP-
PHONE / MONITOR button; or if Full One-Touch Dialling is enabled,
press One-Touch Dialling, DSS, REDIAL, or SAVE button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[103] Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual
Initial Settings – Preferred Line Assignment – Outgoing
Customising the Buttons – Group-CO (G-CO) Button, Loop-CO (L-CO)
Button, Single-CO (S-CO) Button
Features 3-113
L 3 Features
Live Call Screening (LCS)†
Description Allows a proprietary telephone user to monitor their voice mailbox
while incoming callers are leaving a message and, if desired,
intercept the call. The voice mailbox can be monitored in one of
two ways — Hands-free or Private.
Hands-free Mode
The voice mailbox is monitored through the built-in speaker
of the proprietary telephone.
Private Mode
The proprietary telephone sounds an alert tone when callers
are connected to the voice mailbox. To monitor the call, the
user goes off hook on the handset or speakerphone.
Alert Tone
1s
Conditions • When the extension user is having a conversation, a call waiting tone is
sent. The user can put an existing call on hold before accessing LCS.
• A flexible CO and DSS button can be assigned as a Live Call Screening
button.
• To prevent unauthorized monitoring, a three-digit password must be set
by the LCS user. If the user forgets his password, it can be cleared by
the operator.
• Each extension can be programmed to either close the mailbox or keep
recording the conversation after the call is intercepted.
3-114 Features †: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one
that supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
3 Features L
Programming References
System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[617] Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Initial Settings – Live Call Screening Private Mode Set
Customising the Buttons — Live Call Screening Button
Live Call Screening Cancel Button
Lockout
Description If one party in a conversation goes on-hook, they are both
disconnected from the speech path automatically. This feature
applies to extension and outside calls. Reorder tone is sent to the
off-hook party before it is disconnected.
Conditions In the case of a single line telephone (SLT), if nothing is dialled within a
certain period of time after the other party goes on-hook, reorder tone is
sent to the SLT and then it is disconnected from the speech path.
Programming References
No programming required.
Features 3-115
L 3 Features
Log-In / Log-Out
Description Assigns an extension to join (log-in) or leave (log-out) a hunting
group. Extensions in log-out status receive no calls by Station
Hunting but can receive other calls, unlike the DND feature.
Conditions • There should be at least one extension that is in log-in status. Only one
log-in extension cannot be set in log-out status.
• The lighting patterns of Log-In/Log-Out button and the status are
shown below.
Lighting pattern CO Line Status
Red on Log-Out (no reception)
Flashing Red Log-In (multiple reception)
Off Log-In
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, log-in / log-out
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Log-In / Log-Out Button
3-116 Features
3 Features M
Manager Extension
Description One extension in the system can be assigned as the system
manager. This extension can perform system programming.
Conditions • Besides the manager extension, the extension that is connected to the
jack 1 is able to perform system programming.
• If eXtra Device Port mode is enabled at the manager extension, the
proprietary telephone user is regarded as the manager.
• Manager extension can print out and clear the system working report.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment — Day / Night
Message Waiting
Description The system supports the ability to inform the called party of a
message waiting. The user, with a MESSAGE button, knows there
is a message if the LED of the MESSAGE button is lit red. If the
button is neither provided nor assigned, the called party hears
special dial tone, when he / she goes off-hook. Pressing the lit
MESSAGE button also means to call back the called party or listen
to the messages which are stored in the mailbox of the Voice
Processing System.
Features 3-117
M 3 Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Message waiting
[214] Message Waiting Ring Interval Time
[990] System Additional Information Area 01 – Bit 15, Area 05 – Bit 4
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Message Waiting (MESSAGE) Button
Microphone Mute
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to turn off the microphone,
for privacy reasons.
Conditions • This is effective for the microphone only; only your voice will be muted
during a handsfree conversation.
• The user can hear the other party’s voice during Microphone Mute.
Programming References
No programming required.
3-118 Features
3 Features M
Mixed Station Capacities
Description This system supports a wide range of telephone sets, not only
Digital Proprietary Telephones (DPT) and Analogue Proprietary
Telephones (APT) in the Digital Super Hybrid System, but also
single line LD telephones (10 pps / 20 pps, employing dial pulse
signals) and single line MF4 telephones. The super hybrid method
used in this system allows any telephone to be connected to an
extension jack without an adaptor.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.2 Extension Connection
2.4.5 Extension Connection (Optional Unit)
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[121] Pulse Dial Reception Assignment
Features 3-119
M 3 Features
Module Expansion
Description The KX-TD816 starts with 8 extension jacks and the KX-TD1232
starts with 16 extension jacks. It can be expanded by installing
optional cards and units.
For both systems:
• An 8-Station Line Unit adds 8 extension jacks.
• A 4-CO Line Unit adds 4 CO line jacks.
• A 2-ISDN S0 Line Unit adds 2 ISDN S0 lines.
• A 6-ISDN S0 Line Unit adds 6 ISDN S0 lines.
For KX-TD816 only:
• A 4-CO Line Card adds 4 CO line jacks.
• A 2-ISDN S0 Line Card adds 2 ISDN S0 lines.
For KX-TD1232 only:
• An 8-CO Line Card adds 8 CO line jacks.
• A 4-ISDN S0 Line Card adds 4 ISDN S0 lines.
Conditions • The number of extension jacks may be different from the number of
telephones if the Parallelled Telephone or the eXtra Device Port feature is
enabled. These features allow one extension jack to have two telephones.
• When an expansion unit is installed, the unit identification is set by
system programming.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.4.2 CO Line Connection (Optional Card)
2.4.4 CO Line Connection (Optional Unit)
2.4.5 Extension Connection (Optional Unit)
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[109] Expansion Card / Unit Type
3-120 Features
3 Features M
Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSN) Ringing Service
Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming ISDN line call to a
pre-assigned extension. One ISDN port can support a maximum of
ten Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSN).
Assignable destinations are: (1) Operator, (2) extension,
(3) Hunting Group, (4) TAFAS, (5) modem, (6) Phantom extension,
(7) Voice Mail extension and (8) ISDN extension.
The extensions which are assigned in programs [438]–[439]
“Extension Ringing Assignment – Day / Night for ISDN” receive a
call if the dialled number matches the stored MSN.
<Example>
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[111] ISDN DDI / MSN Removed Digit / Added Number Assignment
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension – Day / Night
[420]/[429] ISDN Ring Service Assignment — Day / Night
[437] Multiple Subscriber Number Set
[438]–[439] Extension Ringing Assignment — Day / Night for ISDN
Features 3-121
M 3 Features
Feature References Section 3, Features
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
Music on Hold
Description While a party is on hold, music is automatically sent.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.6 External Music Source Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[803] Music Source Use
[990] System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bit 1, Area 02 – Bit 10,
Area 07 – Bit 7
3-122 Features
3 Features N
Night Service
Description This supports both Night and Day modes of operation. The system
operation for originating and receiving calls can be different for day
and night modes. The system operation for restricting toll calls can
be arranged separately to prevent unauthorized toll calls at night.
Switching of the Day / Night Mode
Day / Night mode can be switched either automatically at a pre-
assigned time or manually by the pre-assigned extension or the
operator at any time desired.
Class of Service programming determines the extensions that can
perform it.
Automatic Night Service: The system will switch the Day /
Night mode at the programmed time each day. The starting
time of the Day / Night mode can be set for each day.
Manual Night Service: Operator and the pre-assigned
extension can switch the Day / Night mode manually.
Features 3-123
N 3 Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Night service mode
[101] Day / Night Service Switching Mode
[102] Day / Night Service Starting Time
[513] Night Service Access
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Night Button
No Reply Group
Description Extensions or ring groups can belong to the no reply group. If the
floating number of this group is dialed, the call is hunted in the
group in the order of registration at a pre-programmed “Call
Forwarding — No Answer Time.” If the called extension or ring
group is busy, the call skips to the next extension or the ring group.
A no reply group can be a Station Hunting type.
.
Conditions • Types of calls whose destination can be the no reply group are:
Outside calls — DIL1:1; DDI; IRNA; Hunting Group-Overflow
Intercom calls — Extension; Transfer
• The floating number of the hunting group is used for all other hunting
types, Circular, Voice Mail (VM), Automated Attendant (AA), Uniform
Call Distribution (UCD) and Ring.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type
[131] Hunting Group Assignment
[813] Floating Number Assignment
3-124 Features
3 Features N
Notebook Function
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to store the phone number in
the memory during conversation on the phone or on-hook status.
The stored number is dialled automatically with a simple operation.
Conditions • The outside line, which was connected when the user stored the number is
selected when re-dialling the number. If the line is busy, the busy tone is sent.
• The pause, if programmed, can be inserted between the CO line access
number and the following phone number (Automatic Pause Insertion).
Programming References
No programming required.
Features 3-125
O 3 Features
Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
Description OHCA allows you to inform a busy extension that another call is
waiting by talking through the built-in speaker of the called party’s
proprietary telephone. If the existing call is using the handset,
the second conversation is made with the speakerphone so that the
called party can talk to two parties independently. OHCA is
performed the same way as Busy Station Signalling (BSS) or
Whisper OHCA. It depends on the telephone type used by the called
party whether Call Waiting, OHCA or Whisper OHCA is activated
by the operation. If the called telephone is one of the following,
OHCA becomes active: KX-T7130, KX-T7235, KX-T7436.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call waiting / OHCA / whisper OHCA
[519] Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
Off-Hook Monitor
Description Allows the KX-T7431, KX-T7433, and KX-T7436 digital proprietary
telephone users to let the other users listen to the conversation
through the built-in speaker, while continuing the same call using the
handset.
3-126 Features
3 Features O
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[148] Off-Hook Monitor
One-Touch Dialling
Description One-Touch Dialling offers the proprietary telephone (PT) user one-
touch access to a desired party or system feature. This is enabled
by storing an extension number, a telephone number or a feature
number of up to 24-digits on a One-Touch Dialling button. The
number of buttons available depends on the type of PT. One-Touch
Dialling buttons can be programmed to flexible buttons: CO, DSS
or PF (Programmable Feature).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Initial Settings – Full One-Touch Dialling Assignment
Customising the Buttons – One-Touch Dialling Button
Features 3-127
O 3 Features
One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
Description This feature, if programmed, allows the Console and the
proprietary telephone user to hold an outside call and quickly
transfer it to an extension. While talking to an outside party,
pressing a DSS button on the console or the proprietary telephone
provides automatic hold and transfer. There is no need to press the
TRANSFER button. The extension starts ringing immediately.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[108] One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
3-128 Features
3 Features O
Operator
Description The system supports up to two operators during day and night
modes separately. Any extension can be appointed as an operator.
The extension assigned as an operator has the ability to perform the
following operations:
• Controlling Incoming Call Log Lock mode
• Clearing the Live Call Screening Password
• Performing the Hotel Application
• Printing / clearing the System Working Report
• Setting / clearing the Remote Station Lock
• Switching the Class of Service – primary / secondary
• Switching Day / Night mode manually
• Turning Background Music – External on and off
• Recording / playing outgoing messages
Only Operator 1 has the ability to perform the following operations:
• Setting the Automatic Overflow
• Setting the Hurry-Up Transfer
• Receiving the Alert Indication
• Receiving the call which is transferred from DND extension
Conditions • If eXtra Device Port mode is enabled at the operator’s extension, the
proprietary telephone user is regarded as the operator.
• The operator can be assigned as a destination of the Transfer Recall by
system programming.
• The Direct Dialling In call which is denied to receive by the extension
or is dialled improper number is forwarded to the operator.
• The Alert Indication is only available for Operator 1 in Day mode.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment — Day / Night
[100] Flexible Numbering, Night service mode, Background music –
external, Primary COS select, Secondary COS select, Timed
reminder remote, Incoming call log lock, Live call screening
password control, System working report, outgoing messages
[129] Operator Queue
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 1
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Hurry-Up Button,
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
Feature References None
Features 3-129
O 3 Features
Operation References Operator Operation
—User Manual
Operator Call
Description Allows the extension user to call an extension operator by dialling
the feature number, if at least one operator is assigned. There can
be one or two extensions assigned as Operator 1 and 2.
When an operator call (default: 0) is made, the call is connected to
Operator 1. If the Operator 1’s line is busy, the call is connected to
Operator 2.
Conditions None
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment — Day / Night
[100] Flexible Numbering, Operator call, Operator 1 call, Operator 2 call
3-130 Features
3 Features O
Outgoing Message (OGM)
Description Allows the extension assigned as an operator to record outgoing
voice messages. There are two types of outgoing messages that can
be recorded.
UCD (Uniform Call Distribution) message:
If assigned in the UCD Time Table, this message is played
when all extensions in an UCD group are busy or not available.
There can be four different UCD messages.
Timed Reminder message:
This message is used in Timed Reminder. When answering
the Timed Reminder alarm (often used as a wake-up call), the
user will hear this message. There can be only one Timed
Reminder message.
After recording these messages, the operator can also play them
back for confirmation.
Conditions • A Message Unit or Card is required to program the OGM. One unit or
card can be installed per system. System Connection*1 permits two
Message Units or Cards.
• If only one system has the Message Unit or Card during System
Connection*1, the UCD message can be activated only in the system which
has the unit or card, but the Timed Reminder message can be activated in
both systems. If both systems have their own Message Unit or Card, the
same UCD or Timed Reminder message is recorded for both simultaneously.
• A maximum of four messages can be recorded per Message Unit or
Card, and two messages can be played at the same time.
• To use the Timed Reminder message, the recorded OGM number must
be selected by system programming.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.4.9 9600bps Speed Remote Unit / Message Unit*2 Installation
2.4.10 9600bps Speed Remote Card*2 / Message Card Installation
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[216] Outgoing Message Time
[818] Timed Reminder Message Assignment
Paging – All
Description Allows you to make a voice announcement from the speakers of the
proprietary telephones and from the external paging devices
(external pagers). If one of the paged persons answers your paging,
you can talk to the person through the connected line.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.5 External Pager Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – external, Paging – external answer /
TAFAS answer, Paging – group, Paging – group answer, Paging –
deny
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 6
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Paging Deny Button
Paging – External
Description Allows you to make a voice announcement using external paging
devices (external pagers). Up to two pagers can be contained per
system. It is possible to select one or two pagers to perform your
paging. Any telephone user can answer your Paging – External.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.5 External Pager Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – external, Paging – external answer /
TAFAS answer, Paging – deny
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 6
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Paging Deny Button
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – group, Paging – group answer,
Paging – deny
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 6
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Paging Deny Button
3-134 Features
3 Features P
Parallelled Telephone
Description Any proprietary telephone can be connected in parallel with a
single line telephone. The following two combinations of
telephones are available:
(1)APT + SLT (an analogue proprietary telephone and a
single line telephone/device)
(2)DPT + SLT (a digital proprietary telephone and a single
line telephone/device)
When a parallel connection is made, an extension user can make
and answer a call using either telephone.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.3 Parallelled Telephone Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Parallel telephone mode
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Paralleled Telephone Connection Button
Features 3-135
P 3 Features
Feature References Section 3, Features,
EXtra Device Port (XDP)
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[100] Flexible Numbering, Automatic line access / LCR, CO line group
line access
[411] Host PBX Access Codes
[412] Pause Time
3-136 Features
3 Features P
Phantom Extension
Description Allows the system to route the calls to a phantom extension. A call
to a phantom extension arrives at an extension who has the
corresponding Phantom Extension button. A Phantom Extension
button can be assigned by Station Programming.
Conditions • Types of calls whose destination can be the phantom extension are:
Outside calls – DIL 1:1; DDI; IRNA; Hunting Group-Overflow
Intercom calls – Extension; Transfer
• You can call the phantom extension by pressing the Phantom Extension
button or by dialling the phantom extension number. If several
extensions have the same phantom extension button, they will ring
simultaneously.
• A phantom number must be assigned by System Programming before
assigning the Phantom Extension button by Station Programming.
• There is a maximum of 128 phantom numbers. Each number has two to
four digits, consisting of numbers 0 through 9.
• The phantom number cannot be used for feature settings such as Call
Forwarding.
• The lighting patterns and status of the Phantom Extension button are
shown below.
Lighting pattern Phantom Extension Status
Off Idle
Red on Calling a phantom extension
Green rapid flash Incoming call
• A DSS button can be assigned as the Phantom Extension button so that
the operator can use the button for transferring a call.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[130] Phantom Extension Number Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Phantom Extension Button
– To set a phantom extension ringing or not
Features 3-137
P 3 Features
Pickup Dialling
Description Allows an extension user to make an outgoing call by going off-
hook, if the user has previously stored the telephone number. This
feature is also known as Hot Line.
Conditions • An LD telephone without the “#” button cannot program this feature.
For programming the phone number, replace the LD telephone with a
telephone with the “#” button temporarily.
• The user uses a feature number to enable or disable pickup dialling.
• If the feature is enabled and the user goes off-hook, dial tone is
generated for the waiting time and then dialling starts. During the
waiting time the user can dial another party, overriding the Pickup
Dialling function.
• If the user answers an incoming call or retrieves a call on hold, the
Pickup Dialling feature does not work.
• If the proprietary telephone is provided with PF 12 button, the stored
number of PF12 button is common to the one for Pickup Dialling.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Pickup dialling
[204] Pickup Dial Waiting Time
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Pickup Dialling Button
Programming References
No programming required.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.2 Extension Connection
2.4.2 CO Line Connection (Optional Card)
2.5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer
Programming References
No programming required.
Features 3-139
P 3 Features
Predial
Description Allows the display proprietary telephone user to check and correct
the dialled number in on-hook state before going off-hook. When
going off-hook, making a call is initiated.
Programming References
No programming required.
Private Call
Description Allows the user to exclude private calls from the SMDR printout.
When making a private call, if the user enters the pre-set account
code, the dialled number is not included in the SMDR printout.
Conditions • It is required to program the account code for private calls in program
[105] “Account Code.” The location 001 of the entries is used as the
account code for this feature.
• To prevent private calls, clear the entry above.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[105] Account Codes
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Change Fee Management
3-140 Features
3 Features P
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Description This feature allows the extension user to change from pulse dial to
tone (DTMF) dial so that the user can access special services such
as computer-accessed long distance service.
Conditions • This feature works only on CO lines set to Pulse Dialling mode or Call
Blocking mode.
• Dial Type Selection provides selection of a dial mode for each CO line.
• Changing tone to pulse is not possible.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[402] Dial Mode Selection
Features 3-141
Q 3 Features
Quick Dialling
Description Quick Dialling offers the extension user one-touch access to a
desired party. This is enabled by storing an extension number or a
telephone number up to 24-digits as a quick dial number.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[009] Quick Dial Number Set
[104] Quick Dial Assignment
3-142 Features
3 Features R
Recall
Description The RECALL or FLASH/RCL button is used to allow a digital
proprietary telephone user to disconnect from the current call and
originate another call without hanging up first.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[414] Disconnect Time
[990] System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bit 3, Area 02 – Bit 5
Features 3-143
R 3 Features
Redial, Automatic
Description This is a special feature for the digital proprietary telephones, that
provides automatic redialling of the last dialled, saved number or
call log, if the called party is busy. If the Last Number Redial,
Saved Number Redial, CO Incoming / Outgoing Call Log operation
or Notebook function is performed handsfree, the telephone set will
hang up and try again after a pre-determined period of time.
Conditions • Redial Repeat Time and Interval Time can be changed by system
programming.
• Pressing RECALL or FLASH/RCL button allows the system to cancel
this feature.
• If any dialling operation is done during Automatic Redial, this function
is finished.
• This feature is not available with KX-T7250.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[209] Automatic Redial Repeat Times
[210] Automatic Redial Interval Time
Conditions • With a proprietary telephone, REDIAL button is used to carry out Last
Number Redial. With a single line telephone, the feature number is
used.
• The memorized telephone number is replaced by a new one if at least
one digit to be sent to a CO line is dialled. Dialling a CO line access
code alone does not change the memorized number.
• Certain types of proprietary telephones allow automatic multiple
redialling (Automatic Redial).
3-144 Features
3 Features R
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Last number redial
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – SAVE Button
Features 3-145
R 3 Features
Remote Station Lock Control
Description The operator is given the privilege of controlling Electronic Station
Lockout on any station.
Programming References
No programming required.
Reverse Circuit
Description This feature can be used to detect a reversal of CO line polarity
from Central Office, when trying to make a CO line call. This is
useful for determining the start and completion of CO line calls.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[416] Reverse Circuit Assignment
3-146 Features
3 Features R
Ringing, Delayed
Description If Direct In Lines (DIL) 1:N is established, a telephone set is
originally set to ring instantly. This setting can be changed to
delayed ringing, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) on a CO
line number basis.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
Ringing, Discriminating
Description Allows the extension user to identify the incoming call by the
ringing pattern. (See Section 5.1 “Tone / Ring Tone.”)
Conditions • When there are multiple incoming calls and the extension goes from
off-hook to on-hook, the calls are rung according to the following
priority:
<1> Consultation Hold Recall
<2> An incoming call from a line in which the Prime Line
Preference – Incoming function has been set (with a
proprietary telephone only)
<3> Call Waiting
<4> Incoming calls; Hold Recall; Transfer Recall
• If multiple incoming calls arrive at an on-hook extension
simultaneously, priority as to which calls should be rung is generally on
a “first-come, first-served” basis. In the case of proprietary telephones
(PT), however, when the Prime Line Preference – Incoming function
has been set, this line takes precedence.
• Incoming TAFAS calls can be identified by ringing signals sent out
from external pagers. The ringing pattern is the same as the outside
calls.
Features 3-147
R 3 Features
• The digital PT user can select a desired tone frequency for each CO
button and the INTERCOM button.
Programming References
No programming required.
Ring Group
Description All extensions in a ring group ring simultaneously by dialling the
floating number of the extension group. A ring group can be a
Station Hunting type.
Conditions • Types of calls whose destination can be the ring group are:
Outside calls — DIL1:1; DDI; IRNA; Hunting Group-Overflow
Intercom calls — Extension; Transfer
• The floating number of the hunting group is used for all other hunting
types, Circular, Voice Mail (VM), Automated Attendant (AA), Uniform
Call Distribution (UCD) and No Reply.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type
[131] Hunting Group Assignment
[813] Floating Number Assignment
3-148 Features
3 Features R
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Description Allows the digital proprietary telephone user to select the desired
ringer frequency for each CO button. This provides discrimination
of incoming outside calls.
Conditions There are eight ringer frequencies available. One of them can be assigned
to a CO button that is assigned as each of the following buttons: Single-
CO, Group-CO, or Loop-CO button. It is not possible to assign a ringer
frequency to any other button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – To distinguish the ringing tones for each CO
button
Conditions There are eight ringer frequencies available. One of them can be assigned
to an intercom button.
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – To change the ringing tone for intercom calls
Features 3-149
S 3 Features
Secret Dialling
Description Allows an extension user to conceal all or part of a registered
telephone number that normally appears on the display during
System Speed Dialling or One-Touch Dialling. Numbers can be
assigned to Programmable Feature buttons on PT and Consoles.
When a display telephone user makes a call to the telephone
number that is set to Secret Dialling, all or part of the number does
not appear on the display. Additionally, KX-T7235, KX-T7431,
KX-T7433 and KX-T7436 model telephones are capable of secret
dialling for “Station Speed Dialling” numbers.
Conditions • When storing a number, press the INTERCOM button at the beginning
and the end of the number to be concealed.
• You can conceal one or more parts of a telephone number.
• The concealed part will be printed out by SMDR.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialling Number Set
[990] System Additional Information, Area 04 – Bit 11
Operation – Using the Display Proprietary Telephone .....User Manual,
Using the KX-T7531, KX-T7533, KX-T7536 or KX-T7235
– Storing the names and numbers for station speed dialling
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – One-Touch Dialling Button
3-150 Features
3 Features S
Special Display Features
The KX-T7235, KX-T7431, KX-T7433 and KX-T7436 feature a
display that allows the user to originate calls or to access system
facilities with ease. The display prompts the user with information
related to the desired feature. Examples of this special function are
shown below:
CO Outgoing Call Log
Extension Dialling
Hotel Application (operator only) (→ See the “HOTEL
APPLICATION.”)
Station Speed Dialling
System Feature Access Menu
System Speed Dialling
Conditions The oldest telephone number will be eliminated when over the limited
numbers are dialled out.
Programming References
No programming required.
Features 3-151
S 3 Features
Extension Dialling
Description Provides a display of extension names and numbers. The user can
call an extension by pressing the associated function button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[003] Extension Number Set
[004] Extension Name Set
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set
[013] ISDN Extension Name Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 9
Operation – Using the Display Proprietary Telephone .....User Manual,
Using the KX-T7531, KX-T7533, KX-T7536 or KX-T7235
– Storing the names and numbers for station speed dialling
3-152 Features
3 Features S
Operation References Operation – Using the Display Proprietary Telephone
—User Manual Using the KX-T7531, KX-T7533, KX-T7536 or KX-T7235 – Using the
KX-T7531 / Using the KX-T7533 / Using the KX-T7536 / Using the KX-
T7235 – Station Speed Dialling
Programming References
No programming required.
Features 3-153
S 3 Features
System Speed Dialling
Description A list of the names stored for System Speed Dialling is displayed.
This allows the user to dial by name without having to know the
telephone number. All the user needs to do is press the button
associated with the desired name.
Conditions • The numbers and names for System Speed Dialling must be
programmed.
• If a name is not stored for a number, it is not displayed and cannot be
called with this feature.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialling Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialling Name Set
3-154 Features
3 Features S
Station Hunting
Description If a call reaches a floating number of a hunting group, Station
Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the
hunting group. There are a maximum of 32 hunting groups. Idle
extensions are automatically hunted according to the programmed
type. There are six hunting types available – Circular, UCD
(Uniform Call Distribution), Voice Mail (VM), Automated
Attendant (AA), Ring and No Reply.
Circular hunting: The extensions are hunted until an idle
one is found, regardless of the jack number.
UCD: Refer to “Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)” in this
section.
AA hunting: All of the AA ports are hunted until an idle one
is found to permit AA Service.
VM hunting: All of the VM ports are hunted until an idle
one is found to permit VM Service.
Ring: All of the extensions in the group ring simultaneously.
No Reply hunting: The extensions are hunted in the order of
registration at a programmed “Call Forwarding — No
Answer” time. If the called extension is busy, the call hunts
the following extensions.
One hunting type is selected for each hunting group. The hunting
order corresponds to the order of registration in program [131]. For
VM/AA Hunting, an incoming call to any extension number which
belongs to a hunting group is hunted as well.
Hunting Type
Circular VM/ UCD Ring No
Incoming Call AA Reply
Arrives at
Floating Extension ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Extension which belongs to a ✓
hunting group
✓: A call is hunted.
Conditions • Even if the called extension has set Do Not Disturb, or Call Forwarding,
they are disregarded and the call reaches to the extension.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type
[131] Hunting Group Assignment
Features 3-155
S 3 Features
[132] Hunting Group Name Assignment
[133] Hunting Overflow
[134]–[135] Hunting Intercept — Day / Night
3-156 Features
3 Features S
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Description Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records
detailed call information for outside calls. A printer connected to
the EIA (RS-232C) port can be used to print incoming and
outgoing outside calls as well as print a hard copy of system
programming. To print the record of system programming items
that have been assigned, use the program [802] “System Data
Printout.” To print the charge fee, use the station programming. To
print the call records, use the program [800] “SMDR Incoming /
Outgoing Call Log Printout,” which allows you to print out the
following records:
• Record all outgoing outside calls or outgoing toll calls.
• Record all incoming outside calls.
Features 3-157
S 3 Features
Received call: shows <I> that indicates ‘Incoming.’ If
the call is carried by an ISDN network, also shows the
name or telephone number of the calling party.
Private call: shows <Private>.
(6) ANS: shows the ring duration of the incoming call in
Minutes / Seconds.
(7) Duration: shows the duration of the call in Hours /
Minutes / Seconds.
(8) Cost: shows the amount of charged fee; Pulse or Pounds.
(9) Acc (Account Code): shows the account code appended to
the call.
(10) CD (Condition Code): shows call handling type with the
following codes:
TR: Transfer
FW: Call Forwarding to CO Line
RM: Remote access to a modem
RC: Received an incoming call
AN: Answered an incoming call
NA: Unanswered an incoming call
DP: Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line
Conditions • Connect a printer provided with an EIA (RS-232C) interface to the EIA
(RS-232C) connector located on the main unit. After connecting a
printer, do not press the RETURN key, if provided on the printer, in 10
seconds.
• When programmed for outgoing toll calls only, printing occurs only for
calls which start with the numbers stored in any Denied Code Table from
levels 2 to 6. If LCR is employed, not the user-dialled but the modified
number is checked against these tables.
• This system can store information up to 100 calls. If more calls are
originated or received, previous records are deleted starting from the
oldest one.
• It is possible to select the SMDR format, page length, skip perforation
and page width. If 80 characters for page width is selected, the last five
digits of account codes are not printed out.
• This data is not deleted when you reset the system.
• If the system clock is not set by system programming or if the calendar IC
is out of order, the date and time is not printed out.
• If Register Recall signal is manually sent out during a conversation, the
call record is printed and a new record is started.
• “(8) Cost” is printed out in the format selected in program [117] “Charge
Display Selection.”
• It is programmable to enable or disable the printout of secret dial
numbers.
3-158 Features
3 Features S
• If the account code stored in location 001 of the programming table is
dialled, the dialled number is not printed out to SMDR (Private Call).
Refer to the seventh line on an example of printed call records.
• When the paper of the printer runs out or the printer is out-of-service, the
indication “Check Printer” is displayed on the telephone of Operator 1.
• It is possible to select whether or not to print out the data when the system
receives a call and a call is answered.
• It is possible to select whether the account code is printed out or not. If it
is not printed out, it is shown in dots.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.7 Printer Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[000] Date and Time Set
[212] Call Duration Count Start Time
[800] SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call Log Printout
[801] SMDR Format
[802] System Data Printout
[806]–[807] EIA (RS-232C) Parameters — Port 1 / Port 2
[990] System Additional Information, Area 04 – Bit 11, Area 05 – Bit 9,
Area 07 – Bit 14
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Charge Fee Management
Features 3-159
S 3 Features
Station Program Clear
Description Allows the extension user to cancel the functions set on the user’s
own telephone. The following functions will be cancelled by this
feature:
Absent Message Capability – The message set on the
telephone
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
Background Music that has been turned on
Call Forwarding
Call Pickup Deny
Call Waiting enabled
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
CO Incoming Call Information Log – Over-stored mode
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Log-Out status
Message Waiting – All the messages that have been left by
other extension users
Parallelled Telephone enabled
Paging Deny
Pickup Dialling
Timed Reminder
Conditions None
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Station program clear
3-160 Features
3 Features S
Station Programming
Description Allows the proprietary telephone (PT) user to customize the extension
to their needs. The following are the programming items available:
For any PT,
Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment
Flexible Button Assignment
Full One-Touch Dialling Assignment
Intercom Alerting Assignment
Preferred Line Assignment – Incoming / Outgoing
Station Programming Data Default Set
For digital PT,
Handset / Headset Selection
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Ringing Tone Selection for Intercom Calls
For display PT,
Charge Fee Reference (pre-assigned extensions only)
Self-Extension Number Confirmation
For digital display PT (KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436 and KX-
T7235 only),
Station Speed Dialling Number / Name Assignment
For operator extension PT only,
Incoming Call Log Lock Control
Live Call Screening Password Control
Remote Station Lock Control
Detailed information and programming instructions are described
in the User Manual, Station Programming.
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual
Operator Operation – Extension Control ......................User Manual
Changing the Settings
Features 3-161
S 3 Features
Station Programming Data Default Set
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to return all the following
items programmed on the telephone to default setting.
Conditions None
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Initial Settings – To clear all settings
3-162 Features
3 Features S
Station Speed Dialling
Description Allows an extension user to store frequently dialled numbers in
order to place a call with abbreviated dialling. It is performed by
dialling the feature number and a speed dial number from 0 through
9. Up to 10 numbers can be stored for each telephone.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Station speed dialling, Station speed dialling
programming
Features 3-163
S 3 Features
System Connection*
Description System Connection allows two main units (KX-TD1232) to work
together as one system. This expands the capacity of the system,
number of extensions, CO lines and so on. Two connected systems
are called the master and the slave systems.
A maximum capacity of the system is as follows:
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[115] Adjust Time
Conditions The default setting for each programming item is listed in Section 5.2,
“Default Values.”
Programming References
No programming required.
Features 3-165
S 3 Features
Remote Programming
You can perform system programming and maintenance from a
remote site using a PC. Install the Remote Card / Unit and assign
the floating number of the modem in system programming.
Starting system administration from a remote location can be done
in the following ways.
• Call an extension (probably the operator) from a remote
location and request a transfer to the modem.
• Assign the modem as the destination of the DIL 1:1 feature.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[107] System Password
[813] Floating Number Assignment
[814] Modem Standard
[817] TD197 Baud Rate Set
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment — Day / Night
[107] System Password
Features 3-167
S 3 Features
System Speed Dialling
Description This feature supports 500 abbreviated dial numbers available to all
users. A system speed dial number is dialled out by pressing the
AUTO button and a 3-digit code (000 through 499). It is possible to
store five hundred 24-digit telephone numbers per system
(maximum).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialling Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialling Name Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, System speed dialling
[509]–[510] Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialling
— Day / Night
3-168 Features
3 Features S
System Working Report
Description The Digital Super Hybrid System automatically records the
system’s working state. A printer connected to the EIA (RS-232C)
port can be used to print the recorded data.
Conditions Connect a printer to the EIA (RS-232C) connector located on the main
unit. After connecting a printer, do not press the RETURN key, if
provided on the printer, in 10 seconds.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation
2.3.7 Printer Connection
Features 3-169
T 3 Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, System working report
[806]–[807] EIA (RS-232C) Parameters — Port 1 / Port 2
Terminate
Description The Terminate button is used to allow the proprietary telephone
user to disconnect the current call and originate another call without
hanging up first.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Terminate Button
3-170 Features
3 Features T
Time-Out, Variable
Description Provides timers to control various features or functions.
The following timers are programmable:
Features 3-171
T 3 Features
Voice Mail Integration Timer Items
DTMF Signal Duration 80 / 160 ms
DTMF Signal Waiting Time 0.5 / 1.0 / 1.5 / 2.0 s
after VPS Answer
DTMF Signal Waiting Time 0.5 / 1.0 / 1.5 / 2.0 s
after VPS calls Extension
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[200] Hold Recall Time
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[202] Call Forwarding – No Answer Time
[203] Intercept Time
[204] Pickup Dial Waiting Time
[205] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time
[207] First Digit Time
[208] Inter Digit Time
[209] Automatic Redial Repeat Times
[210] Automatic Redial Interval Time
[212] Call Duration Count Start Time
[214] Message Waiting Ring Interval Time
[215] Ring-Off Detection Time
[216] Outgoing Message Time
[217] Timed Reminder Alarm Ring Time
[218] Doorphone-to-CO Line Call Duration Time
[404] DTMF Time
[405] CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set
[412] Pause Time
[413] Register Recall Signal Time
[414] Disconnect Time
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
[990] System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bits 10 through 14,
Area 02 – Bits 11, 12, 14 and 15, Area 07 – Bits 15 and 16
3-172 Features
3 Features T
Timed Reminder
Description Each telephone can be set to generate an alarm ringing at a preset
time as a wake up or reminder. This feature can be programmed to be
active only once or every day. With the optional unit or card, a voice
message can be recorded for this feature.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.4.9 9600bps Speed Remote Unit* / Message Unit Installation
2.4.10 9600bps Speed Remote Card / Message Card* Installation
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Timed reminder
[217] Timed Reminder Alarm Ring Time
[818] Timed Reminder Message Assignment
There are eight toll restriction levels available. Toll restriction level
1 is the highest level and the level 8 is the lowest. That is, level 1
allows all toll calls and levels 7 and 8 disallows all toll calls.
Levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining pre-
programmed deny and excepted code tables.
3-174 Features
3 Features T
Applicable Denied and Excepted Code Tables depend on the
assigned toll restriction level of an extension as follows:
[Explanation]
Level 1: allows all calls.
Level 2: denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Table
for Level 2 except the codes stored in Excepted
Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6.
Level 3: denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables
for Levels 2 and 3 except the codes stored in
Excepted Code Tables for Levels 3 through 6.
Level 4: denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables
for Levels 2 through 4 except the codes stored in
Excepted Code Tables for Levels 4 through 6.
Level 5: denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables
for Levels 2 through 5 except the codes stored in
Excepted Code Tables for Levels 5 and 6.
Level 6: denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables
for Levels 2 through 6 except the codes stored in
Excepted Code Table for Level 6.
Level 7: Allows intercom calls only.
Level 8: Allows operator calls only.
Features 3-175
T 3 Features
Flow Chart of
Toll Restriction
Yes
Is the call made by System Speed
Dialling ?
No
No Is TRS Override for System
Speed Dialling enabled?
Yes
No
Is the dialled number found in
applicable Denied Code Tables?
Yes
No
3-176 Features
3 Features T
Conditions • Toll restriction checks are applied to the following:
(1) Account Code Entry
(2) Dial Access, Automatic
(3) Least Cost Routing (LCR)
(4) Line Access, CO Line Group
(5) Line Access, Individual
(6) System Speed Dialling
• Emergency call numbers such as Police or Fire Department numbers
should be stored in program [311] “Emergency Dial Number Set” so
that they are excepted from toll restriction.
• If a stored Host PBX access code is found in the dialled number, a toll
restriction check starts for succeeding telephone number.
• Toll restriction for System Speed Dialling can be assigned in the Class
of Service setting.
• It is programmable whether the “ ” or “#” the user dials is to be
checked or not on the Toll Restriction code. This is useful to prevent
unauthorized calls which could be possible through certain Central
Offices’ exchange system.
• It is programmable to admit the press of the RECALL or FLASH/RCL
button, during an outside call on the extensions in levels 7 and 8.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[207] First Digit Time
[208] Inter Digit Time
[301]–[305] TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6
[306]–[310] TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6
[311] Emergenvy Dial Number Set
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night
[509]–[510] Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialling
— Day / Night
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 4
Features 3-177
T 3 Features
Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry
Description Allows the extension user to override toll restriction temporarily to
make a toll call from a toll-restricted telephone. The user can carry
out this feature by entering the appropriate account code before
dialling the telephone number.
Conditions • The toll restriction level of the user is changed to level 2 by this feature.
Thus this can be used by extension users assigned a toll restriction level
from 3 through 8. The levels 1 and 2 are not changed.
• A Class of Service which is assigned Account Code Entry – Verified
Toll Restriction Override permits the class members to override their
toll restrictions.
• Up to 40 account codes can be programmed for Verified Account code
operation. These are used for Toll Restriction Override.
• If the user does not enter any account code or enters an invalid account
code, an ordinary toll restriction check is done.
3-178 Features
3 Features T
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Account code entry
[508] Account Code Entry Mode
Conditions Same as the conditions of Toll Restriction feature except that the data for
System Speed Dialling are used as the toll restriction levels.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialling Number Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, System speed dialling
[509]–[510] Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialling
— Day / Night
Features 3-179
T 3 Features
Trunk (CO Line) Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
Description A tone signal is sent from the external pager when an incoming
outside call is received. Any extension user can answer the call.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.5 External Pager Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – external answer / TAFAS answer
[813] Floating Number Assignment
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 6
Programming References
System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons — Two-Way Record Button,
Two-Way Transfer Button
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Features 3-181
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one
that supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
U 3 Features
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Description Allows incoming calls to be distributed uniformly to a specific
group of extensions called an UCD group. Calls to an UCD group
hunt for an idle station in a circular way. This UCD feature is
particularly helpful when a certain extension receives a high
volume of calls compared with other extensions.
If all extensions in an UCD group are busy or not available, the
incoming outside call will be handled by the UCD Time Table.
An outline sketch of an UCD is shown below.
(1) When a number of calls have arrived (2) When the 1st call arrives at extension A,
at an UCD group, the 1st call is sent to the 2nd call is sent to extension B.
extension A first.
3rd call in queue
Calls have arrived at an UCD group.
2nd call in queue
(When extension B is
UCD group busy or UCD log out
has been set at
Extension A extension B, the call is
sent to extension C.)
(When extension A is busy
or UCD log out has been
set at extension A, the call Extension C
is sent to extension B.)
Extension B Extension A
(When extension B is busy
or UCD log out has been
set at extension B, the call
is sent to extension C.)
3-182 Features
3 Features U
(4) When all extensions in an UCD group are busy or not available, the incoming outside call
will be handled by the UCD Time Table.
An example is shown below.
UCD Time Table Assignment Sequence Assignment
UCD FN TT TT SEQUENCE
1 291 1 1 S1→ 4T → 4T → TR →
2 292 2 2 S1→ 2T → → →
: : : 3 S4→ RT → → →
32 4 TR→ → → →
UCD : UCD Group Number (1 – 32) S1 : Send Outgoing Message (OGM) 1
FN : Floating Number of the Hunting Group S2 : Send OGM 2
TT : Time Table Number (1 – 4) S3 : Send OGM 3
S4 : Send OGM 4
TR : Transfer to overflow extension
RT : Return to top
Blank : Disconnect the line
1T : Timer – 16 seconds
2T : Timer – 32 seconds
3T : Timer – 48 seconds
4T : Timer – 64 seconds
Sequence Activation Examples
❒ S4 → → → → : Sends OGM 4 and then disconnects the line.
❒ S4 → TR →N/A→N/A→N/A : Sends OGM 4 and then transfers to an overflow extension.
❒ S4 → 1T → → → : Sends OGM 4, Music on Hold for 16 seconds and then disconnects
the line.
❒ S1 → S2 → S3 → → : Sends OGM 1, OGM 2, OGM 3 and then disconnects the line.
❒ S4 → 1T → S1 → → : Sends OGM 4, Music on Hold for 16 seconds, OGM 1 and then
disconnects the line.
❒ S4 → 1T → 4T → RT →N/A : Sends OGM 4, Music on Hold for 16 + 64 seconds and then
OGM 4 again.
❒ S4 → RT →N/A→N/A→N/A : Sends OGM 4 repeatedly.
❒ TR →N/A→N/A→N/A→N/A : Directly transfers to an overflow extension.
❒ RT →N/A→N/A→N/A→N/A : Waits for an idle extension. The caller hears a ringback tone.
(Intercept Routing – No Answer (IRNA) works.)
❒ →N/A→N/A→N/A→N/A : Waits for an idle extension. The caller hears a ringback tone.
(IRNA works.)
❒ 1T → → → → : Waits for an idle extension. The caller hears a ringback tone.
(IRNA does not work.)
❒ 1T → RT →N/A→N/A→N/A : Waits for an idle extension. The caller hears a ringback tone.
(IRNA does not work.)
❒ 1T → TR →N/A→N/A→N/A : Waits for an idle extension for 16 seconds and then transfers to an
overflow extension.
† N/A: not available for assignment.
Features 3-183
U 3 Features
Note:
• The UCD Time Table is not available for incoming extensions or transferred calls.
• The overflow extension is the IRNA destination of the hunting group or the CO line
group assigned by program [134]–[135] “Hunting Intercept — Day / Night” or
[409]–[410] “Intercept Extension — Day / Night”. If both of them are assigned, the
IRNA destination of the hunting group will be effective.
• If the overflow extension is not assigned, the system will not answer the call and
waits for an idle extension.
• If the Time Table number is not assigned, the system will not answer the call. In this
case, IRNA will be employed.
• In sequence assignment, “Sx” can be assigned to a space other than the first only
when another “Sx” is assigned in the first space.
• In sequence assignment, an assignment after “TR”, “RT” or “Blank” is not available.
• If a timer is the first item in a Time Table sequence, it will delay answering
according to the Timer’s setting. The caller will hear a ringback tone.
• Music on Hold after an OGM can be changed to a ringback tone by program [990]
“System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bit 1.”
3-184 Features
3 Features U
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type
[134]–[135] Hunting Intercept — Day / Night
[137]–[138] UCD Time Table Assignment — Day / Night
[139] UCD Time Table
[216] Outgoing Message Time
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day / Night
[813] Floating Number Assignment
Conditions None
Programming References
System Programming.......................................................User Manual
Features 3-185
V 3 Features
Voice Mail Integration
Description This system can accommodate Voice Processing System (VPS)
equipment, which offers the user a Voice Mail and an Automated
Attendant Services. If an extension user has set Call Forwarding
destination to the VPS, a calling party will be forwarded to the
VPS and can leave a voice message in the mailbox of the
extension. When a call is transferred to the VPS by the Call
Forwarding or Intercept Routing – No Answer features, the
mailbox number is sent to the VPS automatically with DTMF
signalling (Follow On ID). Up to eight extension jacks can be
connected to VPS as extensions in the system.
System Explanation
1. Voice Mail Service
1.1 Call Forwarding to VM
If an extension user sets Call Forwarding (C. FWD) whose
destination is the VPS, an incoming call is forwarded to the
VPS under the proper conditions. The system sends to the
VPS a mailbox number of the corresponding extension at
that time. Therefore the calling party can leave his / her
message in the mailbox of the desired extension without
knowing the mailbox number.
Outside call
DIL 1:1
System
Intercom
Call
VPS
C.FWD
Extension VM 1 VM 2
VM Hunting
Chain
VM X VM 3
3-186 Features
3 Features V
Outside call
DIL 1:1
System
VPS
C.FWD
Operator Extension VM 1 VM 2
Transfer
VM Hunting
Chain
VM X VM 3
Outside call
DIL 1:1, DIL 1:N
System
VPS
IRNA
Extension VM 1 VM 2
VM Hunting
Chain
VM X VM 3
Features 3-187
V 3 Features
1.3 Transferring to VM
The extension user can transfer an outside call to the VPS so
that calling party can leave his / her message in the mailbox
of the desired extension. The extension user should use the
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to
the VPS. Pressing this button and entering the extension
number allows the extension user to transfer the call to the
mailbox of the corresponding extension.
Outside call
System
VM X VM 3
Outside call
DIL 1:1, DIL 1:N
System
VPS
C.FWD, IRNA
Operator VM→AA 1 VM→AA 2
VM→AA X VM→AA 3
3-188 Features
3 Features V
1.5 Listening to a Recorded Message
If the VPS receives a message, the VPS can turn on the
MESSAGE button indicator of the corresponding telephone
as a notification to the user of the telephone. The VPS
notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in
his / her mailbox. When the MESSAGE button indicator is
lit, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back
the stored message.
Outside call
DIL 1:1
System
VPS
Transfer
Extension AA 1 AA 2
AA Hunting
Chain
AA X AA 3
Features 3-189
V 3 Features
Conditions • A VPS can be assigned as the destination of the following features:
Call Forwarding – All Calls
Call Forwarding – Busy
Call Forwarding – Busy / No Answer
Call Forwarding – No Answer
Intercept Routing – No Answer
In these functions, the caller to the extension need not know the
mailbox number of the called extension because the code is
automatically transmitted to the VPS (Follow On ID function). If a DIL
1:N call is transferred to the VPS by IRNA, your system transmits the
mailbox number of the lowest jack number of the receiving extensions.
• A mailbox number is a respective extension number by default. The
mailbox number can be changed, only if program [990] “System
Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 8” is set to “free.”
• Pressing the Voice Mail Transfer button and dialling the extension
number allows the extension user to transfer to the corresponding
mailbox. In this case, Follow On ID function is available.
• The Voice Mail extension should be set to Data Line Security to
achieve proper recording.
• The KX-TD1232 has two Extension Cards and can have two 8-Station
Line Units. It is recommended that you do not connect more than two
VM ports to each card or units.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.2 Extension Connection
2.4.5 Extension Connection (Optional Unit)
Programming References
Common Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb, Message
waiting
[113] VM Status DTMF Set
[114] VM Command DTMF Set
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day / Night
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
[609] Voice Mail Access Codes
[990] System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bits 10 through 15,
Area 02 – Bit 8
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – MESSAGE Button,
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
3-190 Features
3 Features V
For VM Service Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type (Select Voice Mail Hunting.)
[990] System Additional Information, Area 05 – Bit 2
[131] Hunting Group Assignment
Features 3-191
V 3 Features
Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones†
Description The Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice
Processing System can be connected to the Digital Super Hybrid
System (DSHS) in a tightly integrated fashion.
The system sends the VPS data which contains the extension
number configuration information and the VPS automatically
creates mailboxes with this data (Automatically Configuration —
Quick Setup).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[126] Voice Mail Number Assignment
[127] Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment
[128] Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment
[611] Extension Connection Assignment
[617] Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment
3-192 Features †: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one
that supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
3 Features V
Volume Control – Speaker / Handset Receiver / Headset / Ringer
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to change the following as
desired:
Handset receiver volume
Headset volume
Ringer volume
Speaker volume
Programming References
No programming required.
Features 3-193
W 3 Features
Whisper OHCA
Description When attempting to call a busy extension, Whisper OHCA allows
the extension user to notify the busy party through the handset,
which will only be heard by the party. Only KX-T7400 series
telephone users can send or receive the Whisper OHCA.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call waiting / OHCA / whisper OHCA
[519] Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
[990] System Additional Information, Area 07 – Bit 6
3-194 Features
Section 4
System Programming
This section provides step-by-step programming instructions
for a proprietary telephone.
4.1 General Programming Instructions
Default Setting
This system has a default factory setting. If any of the
programming needs to be changed, you will find the necessary
information in Section 3, “Features.” This makes the system very
simple to install and customize as required by the customer. Any
required changes can be written in “Programming Tables.”
Buttons
Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT
Type 2
Press SHIFT
to alternate SKP- PREV
SKP+ CLR NEXT
Type 3
Press SHIFT
to alternate <- SEL- PREV
-> SEL+ NEXT
Type 4
Press SHIFT
to alternate
A B C a b c
You can use either the soft buttons or the overlay buttons. (For
overlay buttons, refer to “Using the Overlay” below.)
Throughout programming you will see instructions such as “Press
PREV.” If you use soft buttons, this means press SHIFT, release
SHIFT and then press Soft 3. The (PREV) function is performed.
Note If you use soft buttons and if programming instructions tell you to press
the following buttons, you may press soft buttons shown below.
KX-T7230 KX-T7235
1 2 3 1 2 3
VOLUME VOLUME
4 5 6 4 5 6
STORE STORE
7 8 9 7 8 9
SELECT SELECT
0 0
PREV RECALL END NEXT PREV RECALL END NEXT
KX-T7433 KX-T7436
Soft-1 Soft-2 Soft-3 SHIFT Soft-1 Soft-2 Soft-3 SHIFT
OPER OPER
KX-T7230 Display
SYS-PGM NO? → ← Message Line
CLR NEXT ← Function Line
SYS-PGM NO? → ← Message Line
CLR NEXT ← Function Line KX-T7235 / KX-T7436 Display
KX-T7433 Display
Note • If your telephone set does not have a PROGRAM button, substitute it
with the PAUSE button.
• If nothing is entered in five seconds after the PROGRAM (or PAUSE)
button is pressed, it is cancelled.
• The System Password entered is not shown on the display. The System
Password can be changed by System Programming. Refer to Section
4.3 [107] “System Password.”
• During the programming mode, your extension is treated as a busy
extension.
• Only one proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any
one time.
Example;
NEXT NEXT NEXT
#01-1 #01-2 #02-1 #02-2 ......
PREV PREV PREV
Note The first part of a jack is for a DPT of a XDP-assigned jack. The second
part is for a single line device. Program [600] “EXtra Device Port”
assigns which jacks are XDP.
Note The following programming instructions assume that you have already
entered the programming mode and that you will use Method (2).
Combination Tables
SHIFT & Soft SHIFT + SHIFT + SHIFT + SHIFT + SHIFT +
Combination S1 S1 S2 S2 S3 S3 SHIFT +S1 SHIFT +S2
Pressing
SELECT
(Times)
Keys 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1 Q q Z z ! ?
2 2 A a B b C c
3 3 D d E e F f
4 4 G g H h I i
5 5 J j K k L l
6 6 M m N n O o
7 7 P p Q q R r S s
8 8 T t U u V v
9 9 W w X x Y y Z z
0 0 . , ’ : ;
* / + – = < >
# # $ % & @ ( )
Combination Table 1
Rotating
Jog Dial
(Pulses)
Keys
Note • The alphabetical characters
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 correspond to the letters shown
1 1 Q q R r S s T t on the twelve dialing keys on the
2 2 A a B b C c D d proprietary telephone. (except
3 3 D d E e F f G g symbols)
4 4 G g H h I i J j • In Combination Table 1:
5 5 J j K k L l M m If your telephone is a KX-T7431,
do not use the provided SELECT
6 6 M m N n O o P p
button. Use the AUTO
7 7 P p Q q R r S s ANSWER/MUTE button which
8 8 T t U u V v W w becomes the SELECT button
9 9 W w X x Y y Z z when using the overlay.
0 0 ! ? . , ’ : ; • In Combination Table 2:
* / + – = < > # $ If you keep rotating the Jog Dial,
# # $ % & @ ( ) A a all of the characters in the table
will be displayed.
Combination Table 2
3. Enter 4. M4
G H I
4. Press SHIFT. M4
g h i
4-11.2
4.1.4 User Programming Mode
Some programming items are accessible by any display proprietary
telephone user in the system.
The programmable items are manager programs [000] through
[022].
Note • If your telephone set does not have a PROGRAM button, substitute it
with the PAUSE button.
• If nothing is entered in five seconds after the PROGRAM (or PAUSE)
button is pressed, it is cancelled.
• The User Password is not shown on the display. The password can be
changed by system programming. Refer to Section 4.3 [120] “User
Password.”
• During the programming mode, your extension is treated as a busy
extension.
• Only one proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any one
time.
001 (1) 4.2 Manager Programming(2) (1) Program address: This address is printed at the top
of every page to allow you to quickly find the
System Speed Dialing Number Set(3) desired program.
Description (4) Used to program the System Speed (2) Running title: tells you which group the program
Dial numbers. These numbers are belongs to.
available to all extension users. There (3) Program title.
are 500 numbers from 000 through (4) Provides a more detailed description of the
499. program.
(5) Shows you choices that you can assign.
Selection (5) • Speed dial number: 000 through 499 (6) Shows you the default (factory setting).
• Telephone number: 24 digits (max.)
(7) Shows you programming procedures step by step.
Default(6) All speed dial numbers – Not stored • While programming, use the overlay.
Programming (7)
1. Enter 001.(8) • Before starting to program, enter the
Display: SPD Number Set(9)
programming mode. (See “Entering the
programming mode” on page 4-6.)
2. Press NEXT.(10) (8) Enter the program address.
Display: SPD Code?→(11) (9) The display shows the program title. If your
3. Enter a speed dial number. telephone has soft buttons, the lower line shows
To enter speed dial number 000, the functions that are currently assigned to them.
you can also press NEXT. (10) Press either Soft 3 (NEXT) shown on the display
Display example: 000:Not or the NEXT shown on the overlay.
Stored(12) (11) The message line advises you to enter a speed dial
4. Enter a telephone number. (13) number.
(12) If the telephone number has already been stored,
To delete the current entry, press
the number is displayed.
CLEAR. (14)
To change the current entry, press (13) Enter the telephone number that you want to store.
CLEAR and the new number.
Your entry is displayed as you enter the digits.
(14) Pressing CLEAR erases the whole entry.
5. Press STORE.(15)
(15) Your entry is now stored.
6. To program another speed dial
The indicator lights red and a confirmation tone
number, press NEXT or
lets you know that storage is complete.
PREV, or SELECT and the
desired speed dial number.(16) (16) Select the best way for you to store another speed
dial number. Pressing the NEXT / PREV allows
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6. (17)
you to select the next higher / lower speed dial
8. Press END. (18) number. You can also keep pressing them until the
desired one is displayed. If you press SELECT
Programming Structure
Program Address Programming Group Description
[0XX] Manager Programming These programs may meet frequent changes
requested by the customer.
[1XX] System Programming Entire system programming.
[2XX] Timer Programming Flexible system timer setting.
[3XX] TRS Programming Assignment of Toll Restriction.
[4XX] CO Line Programming Setting of CO line and CO line group values.
[5XX] COS Programming Setting of Class of Service (COS).
[6XX] Extension Programming Setting of extension values.
[7XXX] LCR Programming Assignment of Least Cost Routing.
[8XX] Resource Programming Assignment of customer-supplied peripherals
connected to the system.
[9XX] Option Programming Used to answer the user’s requirements or
troubles, if needed.
NOTICE
It is assumed that you have read Section 4.1 “General Programming Instructions.” The use of
the soft buttons is discussed in the section, therefore we will not make any reference to them in
the following instructions. At any time the soft buttons can be used in place of the overlay
keys.
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: 1 Jan. ’94 SAT
4. Press .
6. Press .
8. Press .
13. Press .
15. Press .
Conditions • After changing an entry, you can press STORE. You do not have
to perform all of the rest of the steps.
• To go back to the previous field, press at steps 4 through 9 and
steps 13 through 16.
• If you hear the alarm after pressing STORE, check that the date is
valid.
• The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Description Used to program the System Speed Dial numbers. These numbers
are available to all extension users. The stored numbers are also
applied to CO Incoming Call Information Display / Log features.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: SPD Code?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 500 speed dial numbers. Each speed dial
number has a maximum of 24 digits. The valid characters are 0
through 9, , and # keys, RECALL or FLASH, PAUSE, SECRET
and – (hyphen) buttons.
– To store the register recall signal, press RECALL or FLASH.
Note: The stored recall will be in effect only during an
established call. (Refer to Section 3 “External Feature
Access.”)
– To store a hyphen, press the “–” button.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: SPD Code?–>
4. Enter a name.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another speed dial number, press NEXT or
PREV, or SELECT and the desired speed dial number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?–>
Display: #01-1:EXT201
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?->
4. Enter a name.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name.
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 32 names for KX-TD816, and 128 names for
KX-TD1232. Each name has a maximum of 10 characters.
• Program [003] “Extension Number Set” is used to assign extension
numbers.
• In the case of KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital System Programming 4-23
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one
that supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
005 4.2 Manager Programming
Flexible CO Button Assignment (contd.)
Default • KX-TD816
All jacks – CO buttons 1 through 8 = Single-CO 01 through 08;
Ring tone type 2
• KX-TD1232
All jacks – CO buttons 1 through 24 = Single-CO 01 through 24;
Ring tone type 2
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?→
6. Press STORE.
7. • To program another CO button of the same jack, repeat steps
4 through 6.
• To program another jack, press SELECT and repeat steps 3
through 6.
8. Press END.
4-24.2
4.2 Manager Programming 006
Operator / Manager Extension Assignment — Day / Night
Description Assigns the jack number for a manager and / or operators. The
manager extension can perform system programming. The
operator has the ability to perform operator services.
4. Press STORE.
7. Press END.
Description Assigns the jack numbers for the Console and the paired extension.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: DSS NO?–>
5. Press .
7. Press STORE.
Conditions • The jack number for the Console and that for the paired extension must
be entered together.
• Multiple Consoles cannot be assigned to the same Console jack.
• Multiple Consoles can be paired with the same proprietary telephone
jack.
• A Console jack cannot be assigned the jack 01 and the jack number of
Manager set in program [006] “Operator / Manager Extension
Assignment — Day / Night.”
• If all incoming outside calls are set to ring at the operator extension
telephone in program [407]–[408] “DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night,”
assigning the Consoles to the operator extension makes the operator’s
job much easier.
• If a Console - assigned jack is programmed for eXtra Device Port, an
SLT can be connected to the jack in parallel with the console.
• If an SLT is assigned as the pair extension, the paired Console will not
function.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?→
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new number.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • If the charge limitation is set “0,” no restriction is applied.
• To assign all jack number to one selection, press the key in step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
• The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by [125]
“Assignment of Denomination.”
Description Assigns the margin rate of a telephone charge and the tax rate to the
total charge. This program is used for printing out the total charge
when a guest checks out.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Margin : 0.0%
4. Press .
5. Enter a charge margin rate (decimal fraction part).
To delete the charge limitation, press CLEAR.
6. Press STORE.
7. Press NEXT.
Display: Tax 1 : 0.0%
9. Press .
10. Enter a tax 1 rate (decimal fraction part).
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
11. To program another tax rate, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired tax rate number.
12. Repeat steps 8 through 10.
13. Press STORE.
14. Press END.
Conditions None
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • Each extension number can be one, two or three digits, consisting of 0
through 9. The and # keys cannot be used.
• A multiple subscriber number (MSN) is determined regarding to this
assignment. The MSN must be up to 4 digits, consisting of the assigned
extension number and an additional number (1 or 2 digits). The MSN
additional number digit can be selected in programs [427] “ISDN
Extension Multiple Subscriber Number” and [445] “TD286 ISDN
Extension Multiple Subscriber Number.”
Example) In case that the ISDN extension number is assigned “3”;
30 through 39 are effective as MSN’s. The extension user can call any
terminal equipment on the ISDN S0 bus with MSN individually.
Pressing “30” calls all extensions on the ISDN S0 bus simultaneously.
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• An extension number is invalid if the leading first or second digits
disagree with the setting of the program [100] “Flexible Numbering, 1st
through 16th hundred extension blocks.” If one digit is assigned as the
leading digit, some extensions have one through three digits. If two
digits are assigned, some have three digits.
• Double entry or incompatible entry is invalid including the assignment
of programs [003] “Extension Number Set,” [127] “Voice Mail
Extension Number Assignment,” [130] “Phantom Extension Number
Assignment” and [813] “Floating Number Assignment.” Valid entry
examples: 10 and 11; 10 and 110. Invalid entry examples: 10 and 106;
210 and 21.
• Program [013] “ISDN Extension Name Set” is used to give names to
the extension numbers.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
4. Enter a name.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through 12
are for the Slave, if available.
Description Assigns the charge limitation of a call on the ISDN port basis.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Description Assigns how many decimal places to set for the charge rate.
Default 2
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Fraction place 2
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • This program is used when the rate is assigned in program [016]
“Charge Rate Assignment.”
• According to this assignment, the charge is displayed during the
conversation and shown on the SMDR print out.
• This assignment is used for the charge fee reference.
Default 0.01
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?→
5. Press .
7. Press STORE.
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • Each extension number can be one through three digits, consisting of 0
through 9. The and # keys cannot be used.
• A multiple subscriber number (MSN) is determined regarding this
assignment. The MSN consists of the assigned extension number and
an additional digit, 0 through 9.
Example) In case that the ISDN extension number is assigned “3”;
30 through 39 are effective as MSN’s. The extension user can call any
terminal equipment on the ISDN S0 bus with MSN individually.
Pressing “30” calls all extensions on the ISDN S0 bus simultaneously.
• For the KX-TD1232, port number 01 through 06 are for the Master
System and 07 through12 are for the Slave, if available.
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Port NO?→
4. Enter a name.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new name.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD1232, port number 01 through 06 are for the Master
System and 07 through12 are for the Slave, if available.
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Description Assigns the phone number where doorphone calls are forwarded.
This feature is one of the ISDN service.
Programming 1. Enter a program address (021 for day or 022 for night).
Display example: D-phone FWD Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: D-phone NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Select NO?→
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another selection, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired selection number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
1. Enter 100.
2. Press NEXT.
3. Enter 00.
Display: All Feature CLR?
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • Each extension block has one or two digits, consisting of 0 through 9.
Assign the leading digits for extension numbers of the respective blocks.
• Assignment of extension blocks defines the limits for programs [003]
“Extension Number Set,” [012] “ISDN Extension Number Set,” [127]
“Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment,” [130] “Phantom
Extension Number Assignment” and [813] “Floating Number
Assignment.”
• Each feature number has one through three digits, consisting of 0
through 9, , and #.
• If or # is included in a feature number, dial pulse telephone users
cannot access the feature.
• Double entry and incompatible combinations are invalid. Valid entry
example: 30 and 31, 210 and 211. Invalid entry example: 5 and 5, 30
and 301.
• If you delete a feature number, the feature cannot be used by dialling
operation.
• You can remove all the feature numbers except selections (01) through (16).
• To clear an extension block (01) through (16), it is required to change the
corresponding numbers assigned in programs [003] “Extension Number
Set,” [012] “ISDN Extension Number Set,” [127] “Voice Mail Extension
Number Assignment,” [130] “Phantom Extension Number Assignment”
and [813] “Floating Number Assignment.”
4-38 System Programming †: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one
that supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
4.3 System Programming 101
Day / Night Service Switching Mode
Default Manual
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: D/N Mode:Manual
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Description Sets the starting time on a day of the week basis, when automatic
day / night switching is programmed in program [101] “Day / Night
Service Switching Mode.”
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Day of Week?–>
5. Press .
7. Press .
9. Press STORE.
Conditions • To select the desired day, you may keep pressing NEXT at step 3. To
assign every day of the week to one selection, press the key at step
3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Sunday.
• If day / night switching is unwanted, select “Disable” at step 4.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Default 12345678
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Access:12345678
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Description Assign a feature number for each quick dial location number.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?→
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new number.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
4-42.2
4.3 System Programming 105
Account Codes
Description Assigns the account codes for Account Code Entry, Verified – All
Calls and Verified – Toll Restriction Override modes. If Verified –
All Calls is assigned in program [508] “Account Code Entry
Mode,” an account code is required to make an outside call. If
Verified – Toll Restriction Override is assigned, an account code is
only required for a toll call and overrides toll restriction.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?→
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another location, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired location number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 128 verifiable account codes. Each code has a
maximum of 10 digits, consisting of 0 through 9.
• Program [508] “Account Code Entry Mode” is used to select the
Account Code Entry mode.
• Account codes having “99” in any part or ending with “9” are invalid,
as “99” is used as a delimiter when entering an account code.
• The account code recorded in location 001 is not printed out on the
SMDR (Private Call feature).
Description Used to enable or disable hunting and set the Station Hunting type
for each hunting group. There are six Station Hunting types
available: Circular, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD), Voice Mail
(VM), Automated Attendant (AA), Ring, and No Reply . If
circular hunting is assigned for a group, all of the extensions in the
group are hunted until an idle one is found. If VM hunting is
assigned, all of the VM ports of an extension group are hunted
until an idle one is found to permit Voice Mail Service. If AA
hunting is assigned, all of the AA ports of an extension group are
hunted until an idle one is found to permit AA Service. If UCD is
assigned, group members are hunted in circular way, starting at the
extension following the last one called. If Ring hunting is assigned,
all of the extensions in the group ring simultaneously. If No Reply
hunting is assigned, the extensions in the group are hunted in order
of registration for a programmed interval of time.
Selection • Hunting group number: 01 through 32
• Disable (no hunting) / Circular / VM (voice mail) /
AA (automated attendant) / UCD / Ring / No Reply
Conditions • The system supports a maximum of eight jacks (16 jacks during System
Connection*) for connection to a Voice Processing System as VM or
AA port.
Default 1234
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Password:1234
3. Enter a password.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new password.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • The password can be from four to seven digits long. The valid numbers
are from 0 through 9.
• If less than four digits are entered, they are not stored.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Default Enable
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Auto HLD:Enable
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions This assignment applies to all DSS buttons on all Consoles and on all
proprietary telephones in the system.
Selection KX-TD816
• Areas 1; 2; 3 = 1 (Inside the system): C (4CO) / S (2S0)
2; 3 (Expansion Area): C (4CO) / S (2S0) /
S2 (6S0) / S3 (1 PRI) / E (EXT)
KX-TD1232
• Master / Slave
• Areas 1; 2; 3; 4 = 1 (Inside the system): C (8CO) / S (4S0)
2; 3; 4 (Expansion Area): C (4CO) / S (2S0) /
S2 (6S0) / S3 (1 PRI) / E1 (EXT1) / E2 (EXT2)
Default KX-TD816: C; C; E
KX-TD1232: Master and Slave – C; C; E1; E2
Programming KX-TD816
1. Enter 109.
Display: Expansion Card
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Mast.:C;C;E
KX-TD1232
1. Enter 109.
Display: Expansion Card
Conditions • When starting the system for the first time or performing System Data
Clear, the application for location will use practical installation instead
of the system default setting.
• For KX-TD816, there is one expansion area inside the system, area 1,
and there are two expansion areas on the system, area 2 and 3 from
bottom to top.
• For KX-TD1232, there is one expansion area inside the system, area 1,
and there are three expansion areas on the system, area 2, 3 and 4 from
bottom to top.
• If the Slave System of KX-TD1232 is out-of-service, skip the steps 8
and 9.
• After changing the setting, to make your setting effective, turn the
Power Switch off and on again. Otherwise the previous setting will be
maintained.
Selection BT / EURO - BT
Default BT
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: BT
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions None
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?→
5. Press .
Display example: CO01:3,
7. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions Example:
If the removed digits are assigned as “6” and the added number is
assigned as “2,” the number sent from the network is changed as follows:
85492603 (DDI number: 2 digits)
Six digits are deleted and “2” is added, and the number becomes “203.”
Description Sets the DTMF signals (“inband”) that are transmitted to the Voice
Processing System (VPS), by the Panasonic telephone system,
under all the dial and connect events which the VPS can occur.
The following signals are sent to the VPS with the assigned DTMF
signals:
RBT (ringback tone) : This signal is sent when calling an
extension.
BT (busy tone) : This is sent when the called extension is
busy.
ROT (reorder tone) : This is sent when the dialled number is
invalid.
DND (DND tone) : This is sent when the other extension has
DND assigned.
Answer : This is sent when the other extension
answers the call.
Disconnect : This is sent when the other extension
hangs up.
Confirm (confirmation tone) :
This is sent when the feature number for
“Message Waiting Lamp” is valid.
FWD VM RBT (FWD to VM ringback tone) :
Not available (reserved).
FWD VM BT (FWD to VM busy tone) :
This is sent when the called extension
has set Call Forwarding to VPS.
FWD EXT RBT (FWD to extension ringback tone) :
Not available (reserved).
4. Press STORE.
7. Press END.
Conditions • A DTMF signal number can have a maximum of three digits, consisting
of 0 through 9, , # and PAUSE.
• The DTMF signals are sent to the extensions in the extension group that
is assigned as “VM” or “AA” in program [106] “Station Hunting
Type.”
4. Press STORE.
5. To program another selection, keep pressing NEXT or PREV
until the desired selection is displayed.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5.
7. Press END.
Description Used to set the time for checking the normality of the system.
Every day at the programmed time, system data is checked. If an
error is checked, it is recorded onto error log.
Default 1:00 AM
8. Press STORE.
9. Press END.
Description Confirms the version of the ROM of Master and Slave Systems.
Version Date
2. Press NEXT.
Display: System NO?–>
5. Press END.
Default Pound
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Pulse
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions None
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • In the case of KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all jack numbers to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
Default 1234
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Code:1234
3. Enter an ID code.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new code.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions None
Default 1234
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Password:1234
3. Enter a password.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new password.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • The password can be from four to seven digits long. The valid numbers
are from 0 through 9.
• If less than four digits are entered, they are not stored.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Description Assigns whether the pulse dial from the extension can be received
or not by the system.
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Ext Puls:Enable
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions None
4. Press STORE.
7. Press END.
Conditions This programming is applied to the doorphone which provides the door
opener.
Default Disable
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Hotel : Disable
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Default £
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Denomi.: £
3. Enter a denomination.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new
denomination.
To enter characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions If more than two characters are entered, they are ignored.
Description Assigns the jack number corresponding to the voice mail port for
data transmission to the Voice Processing System.
Selection KX-TD816
• Jack number: 02 through 16
KX-TD1232
• Master / Slave
• Jack number: 02 through 32 / Master; 33 through 64 / Slave
Programming KX-TD816
1. Enter 126.
Display: VMS Port Asn
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Mast1:# # #
KX-TD1232
1. Enter 126.
Display: VMS Port Asn
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital System Programming 4-65
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one
that supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
126 4.3 System Programming
Voice Mail Number Assignment (contd.)
Conditions • A maximum of six jacks can be assigned (twelve jacks during System
Connection for KX-TD1232).
• Neither Jack number 01 nor the manager extension can be assigned as a
voice mail port jack.
• The jack numbers correspond to the voice mail port in numerical order.
Example: Stored jack numbers: Jacks 02, 03, 05, 08, 11, 13
Jack 02=Voice mail numbers 01, 02; Jack 03=Voice mail numbers 03, 04;
Jack 05=Voice mail numbers 05, 06; Jack 08=Voice mail numbers 07, 08;
Jack 11=Voice mail numbers 09, 10; Jack 13=Voice mail numbers 11, 12
Description Assigns the extension number for the voice mail number. These numbers
can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital System Programming 4-67
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one
that supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
128 4.3 System Programming
Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment †
Description Assigns each voice mail number to a voice mail extension group
number.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: VM NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another voice mail number, press NEXT or
PREV, or SELECT and the desired voice mail number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD1232, VM-01 through VM-12 are for the Master system
and VM-13 through VM-24 are for the Slave system, if available.
• The display shows “VM-XX:#YY-1:EXG Z” in step 3.
“XX” means a voice mail number. “YY” means the jack number of the
voice mail port programmed in [126] “Voice Mail Number Assignment”.
“-1” of YY-1 means the first part of jack number in digital line.
“YY-2” means the second part of the jack number in digital line.
• To assign all voice mail numbers to one selection, press the key in
step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for
voice mail number 01.
4-68 System Programming †: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one
that supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
4.3 System Programming 129
Operator Queue
Description Assigns the limited number of queue and the number of Hurry-Up.
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Queue:8, H-UP: 4
3. Enter a queue.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
4. Press .
6. Press STORE.
7. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?→
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another location, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired location number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Group NO?→
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another extension to the same group, press
NEXT and repeat steps 4 and 5.
7. To program another hunting group, press SELECT and
repeat steps 3 through 6.
8. Press END.
Conditions • One extension can belong to more than one hunting group
simultaneously.
• You can assign the floating number of the Ring hunting group for No
Reply hunting.
• It is possible to assign the ISDN extension numbers. In this case, the
MSN additional number can be added. The MSN must be up to 4 digits,
consisting of an ISDN extension number and an additional number (1 or
2 digits). The MSN additional number digit can be selected in programs
[427] “ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number” and [445] “TD286
ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number.”
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Group NO?→
4. Enter a name.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new name.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions None
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Group NO?→
5. Press .
7. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions None
Description Sets the Intercept destination in both day and night modes for each
hunting group.
Programming 1. Enter a program address (134 for day or 135 for night).
Display example: Hunt Intercp Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Group NO.?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • You can set the extension numbers in programs [003] “Extension
Number Set,” [127] “Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment,” [130]
“Phantom Extension Number” and also floating numbers of the external
ringer, hunting groups, and pagers in program [813] “Floating Number
Assignment.”
Description Assigns the Time Table when all extensions in the Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD) group are busy.
Programming 1. Enter a program address (137 for day or 138 for night).
Display example: UCD T.Table Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Group NO?→
5. Press STORE.
6. Press END.
Conditions • If the Time Table number is not assigned, the system will not answer
the call and waits for any extension to become idle. In this case,
Intercept Routing – No Answer (IRNA) will be employed.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Table No.?→
5. Press .
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5.
7. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • “Sx” can be assigned to a space other than the first only when another
“Sx” is assigned in the first space.
• An assignment after “TR,” “RT” or “Blank” is not available.
Default Enable
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Monitor:Enable
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions Off-Hook Monitor is only available for the KX-T7431, KX-T7433 and
KX-T7436 telephone users.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • The DDI number can be a maximum of 16 digits. Valid numbers are
from 0 to 9.
• Programs [151]–[152] “ISDN DDI Ringing Assignment — Day /
Night” are used to assign an extension to each location number in the
day and night modes.
• This program becomes available when “DDI” is selected in program
[420]/[429] “ISDN Ring Service Assignment — Day / Night.”
Description Assigns the destination of each DDI number in the day and night modes.
Programming 1. Enter a program address (151 for day or 152 for night).
Display example: DDI Ring Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Default Disable
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: CCBS: Disable
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions None
4-69.14
200 4.4 Timer Programming
Hold Recall Time
Description Assigns the length of the hold recall timer. This timer is used to
alert an extension that a call has been held for an extended period
of time.
Default 60 s
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 60 sec
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Description Sets the number of rings before the transfer recall occurs. If a
transferred call is not answered before the programmed time of
rings, the call returns to the original caller.
Default 12 rings
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time:12 rings
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Description Sets the number of rings for the Call Forwarding – No Answer
feature. If a call is not answered before the programmed number of
rings, the call is forwarded to the destination.
Default 3 rings
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 3 rings
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Description Sets the number of rings for the Intercept Routing – No Answer
(IRNA) feature. If a call is not answered before the programmed
number of rings, the call is redirected to the programmed station.
Default 12 rings
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 12 rings
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Description Sets the number of seconds for Pickup Dialling. If the telephone
user lifts the handset, the programmed party is called when the time
expires.
Default 1s
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time:1 sec
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions This time gives the user an opportunity to dial digits before the automatic
dialling process takes place.
Description Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation with an outside
party. If an outside call is originated or answered by a programmed
extension user and the timer expires, the call is disconnected.
Default 10 min
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time:10 min
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Description Sets the maximum time allowed between the start of outside dial
tone and the first digit dialled on an outgoing outside call. If an
extension user fails to dial any digits during this time, the DTMF
receiver is released.
Default 10 s
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 10 sec
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Default 10 s
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time:10 sec
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Default 4 times
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Attempt: 4
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • Program [210] “Automatic Redial Interval Time” is used to set the
interval time between Automatic Redial attempts.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Default 12 (120 s)
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 120 sec
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • You enter a number from 3 through 120. The actual time is 10 times
your input.
• Program [209] “Automatic Redial Repeat Times” is used to set the
number of times Automatic Redial is tried.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Description Sets the number of milliseconds the system waits before dialling
after a CO line is seized.
Default 0 ms
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 000 msec
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • You enter a number from 0 through 40. The actual time is a 100 times
your input.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Description Sets the number of seconds the system waits between the end of
dialling and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing toll calls.
When the system has sent out all the digits to the central office and
this timer expires, the system starts counting the call. A display
telephone shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and
the duration of a call are recorded in the SMDR record.
Default 0s
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 0 sec
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • The timer starts counting after all the digits are dialled. This timer is
not applied to incoming calls. The timer for incoming calls starts
immediately.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Description Sets the Message Waiting ring interval time for a single line
telephone.
Default 0 min
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Interval: 10 min
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions When the internal time is set “0,” the telephone does not ring for Message
Waiting notification.
Description Sets the ring-off time so that the system can detect that the central
office stops ringing.
Default 6s
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time : 6 sec
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions None
Description Sets the maximum allowable recording time for outgoing messages
(OGM).
7. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • Enter the times starting from the left for OGM 1 to OGM 4.
• The total time of the outgoing messages cannot exceed 64 seconds.
Description Sets the number of seconds the Timed Reminder alarm rings.
Default 30 s
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Reminder: 30sec
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions None
Description Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation between a caller
at a doorphone and an outside party. When the timer expires, the
call is disconnected.
Default 0 sec
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 0 sec
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions You can enter a number from 0 through 30. The actual time is 10 times
your input.
If the duration time is set to "0", there is no time limit.
4-83.4
301-305 4.5 TRS Programming
TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6
Description These allow you to specify the numbers which are toll-restricted for
each toll restriction level as follows:
Program [301]: restricts levels 2 through 6
Program [302]: restricts levels 3 through 6
Program [303]: restricts levels 4 through 6
Program [304]: restricts levels 5 through 6
Program [305]: restricts level 6
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another location, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired location number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 20 toll call numbers which can be restricted for
each program. Each number has a maximum of seven digits, consisting
of 0 through 9, and . The character “ ” can be used as a wild card
character.
• Programs [306]–[310] “TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through
6” are used to assign exceptions to these numbers. Programs
[500]–[501] “Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night” are used to set the
toll restriction value for each COS.
Description These allow you to assign numbers which are exceptions to the toll
restriction specified in programs [301] through [305] as follows:
Program [306]: applies to level 2
Program [307]: applies to levels 2 through 3
Program [308]: applies to levels 2 through 4
Program [309]: applies to levels 2 through 5
Program [310]: applies to levels 2 through 6
Selection • Location number: 01 through 20
• Exceptional number: 7 digits (max.)
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?–>
3. Enter a location number.
To enter location number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 01:Not Stored
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another location, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired location number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Conditions There is a maximum of five numbers for each program. Each number has
a maximum of seven digits, consisting of 0 through 9, and . The
character “ ” can be used as a wild card character.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Description Used to identify the CO lines which are connected to the system(s).
This prevents users from originating a call to a line which is not
connected.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?→
Conditions • In the case of KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• CO09 through CO16 of KX-TD816 and CO025 through CO54 of KX-
TD1232 become available when the expansion unit KX-TD290 is
installed in the main unit. However, CO09 through CO16 or CO09
through CO54 of the maximum number of B channels which are
assigned in the program [450] “PRI Configuration” can be set to
“Connect.” We recommend to set the required number of B channel to
“Connect.”
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key in step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Conditions • In the case of KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• CO09 through CO16 of KX-TD816 and CO025 through CO54 of KX-
TD 1232 become available when the expansion unit KX-TD290 is
installed in the main unit.
• To assign all CO lines to one CO line group, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
Description Each CO line can be programmed for DTMF, pulse (rotary) or call
blocking. This program assigns your choice for each line.
DTMF: The dialling signals from an extension, either tone or pulse, are
converted to tone signals and transmitted to the CO line.
Pulse: The dialling signals from an extension, either tone or pulse, are
converted to pulse signals and transmitted to the CO line.
Call blocking: If your central office can receive both DTMF and pulse signals but
you are contracted for pulse, select this mode. When dialling on
the line with an MF4 telephone, only the pulse signals are sent to
the CO line.
Selection • CO line number:
KX-TD816 – 01 through 08, ( =all CO lines)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24, ( =all CO lines)
• DTMF / Pulse / C. Block (call blocking)
2. Press NEXT.
Display : CO Line NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • In the case of KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all lines to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
• If DTMF is assigned, set the DTMF time of the line in program [404]
“DTMF Time.”
• If pulse or call blocking is assigned, set the pulse speed of the line in
program [403] “Pulse Speed Selection,” and set the pulse break ratio
and inter-digit pause in program [990] “System Additional Information,
Area 02 – bits 7, 12 and 11,” if needed.
Description A CO line set for pulse or call blocking mode in program [402]
“Dial Mode Selection” can have two pulse rates, 10 pps (low) and
20 pps (high). This program sets the pulse speed for each CO line
set to pulse or call blocking mode.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
Conditions • In the case of KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
• The pulse speed required is determined by the CO or PBX line.
• Program [990] “System Additional Information, Area 02 - Bit 07, 11
and 12” are used to select a pulse break ratio and inter-digit pause, if
needed.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • In the case of KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
• The DTMF time required is determined by the CO line or PBX line.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • In the case of KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
• You may disable CPC Signal Detection for a CO line.
• Program [415] “CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set” is used to
program CPC Signal Detection for outgoing outside calls.
Description The Direct In Lines (DIL) 1:1 feature allows incoming outside calls
to be directed to a specific extension. When a CO line is assigned
as DIL 1:1, it is necessary to assign the destination. These
programs specify the extension number for day or night mode.
Programming 1. Enter a program address (407 for day or 408 for night).
Display example: DIL 1:1 Asn Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
3. Enter a CO line number.
To enter CO line number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: CO01:Disable
4. Enter an extension number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
To disable DIL 1:1, press CLEAR.
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Conditions • In the case of KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available. CO
line numbers in the out-of-service system are unacceptable.
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
• You set the extension numbers in program [003] “Extension Number
Set,” ISDN extension numbers in program [012] “ISDN Extension
Number Set” and [017] “TD286 Extension Number Set,” voice mail
extension numbers in program [127] “Voice Mail Extension Number
Assignment,” phantom extension numbers in program [130] “Phantom
Extension Number Assignment” or floating numbers of pagers in
program [813] “Floating Number Assignment.”
• If a CO line is also programmed for DIL 1:N in program [603]–[604]
“DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night,” it is
regarded as a DIL 1:1 line.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Direct In Lines (DIL) Night Service
Programming 1. Enter a program address (409 for day or 410 for night).
Display example: TRG Intercpt Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: TRK GRP NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another CO line group, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line group number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Conditions • You set the extension numbers in program [003] “Extension Number
Set,” ISDN extension numbers in program [012] “ISDN Extension
Number Set” and [017] “TD286 Extension Number Set,” voice mail
extension numbers in program [127] “Voice Mail Extension Number
Assignment,” phantom extension numbers in program [130] “Phantom
Extension Number Assignment” or floating numbers of pagers in
program [813] “Floating Number Assignment.” You cannot assign the
floating number of the modem.
• To assign all CO line groups to one selection, press the key at step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1.
• Program [401] “CO Line Group Assignment” is used to assign each CO
line to a CO line group.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Intercept Routing
Description Assigns Host PBX access codes. If the system is installed behind a
host PBX system, an access code is required to make an outside
call. Up to four codes can be stored for a CO line group assigned
the line.
2. Press NEXT.
Display : TRK GRP NO?–>
5. To enter more access codes for the same CO line group, press
and enter the access codes until all the required entries
are completed.
Display example: TRG1:01,08,10,22
6. Press STORE.
9. Press END.
Conditions • This program is only required if a host PBX line is connected to the
system. Program [401] “CO Line Group Assignment” is used to assign
the line to a CO line group.
• There is a maximum of four access codes per CO line group. Each
code has one or two digits, consisting of 0 through 9, and .
• If conflicting access codes (such as 8 and 81) are stored for the same
CO line group, the 1-digit code (8) only will be in effect.
• When the programmed codes are dialled, Automatic Pause Insertion
and Toll Restriction are applied to the calls. The programmed pause
time (in program [412] “Pause Time”) is automatically inserted after the
access code.
• To assign all CO line groups to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO line
group 1.
Description Assigns the length of the pause time. The programmed pause time
is automatically inserted after a line access code or a host PBX
access code programmed in [411] “Host PBX Access Codes” or
manually inserted if the PAUSE button is pressed by the user.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: TRK GRP NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all CO line groups to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO line
group 1.
• Program [401] “CO Line Group Assignment” is used to assign each CO
line to a CO line group.
• If the programmed pause time is 1.5 or 2.5 seconds and you are storing
an external number in program [001] “System Speed Dialling Number
Set,” it is required to store a pause manually after the line access code.
Description Assigns the length of the register recall signal time. If your system
is installed behind a host PBX, External Feature Access (EFA) is
necessary to obtain its services. To enable it, select a required
register recall signal sending time for the CO line group.
Selection • CO line group (TRG) number: 1 through 8,
( =all CO line groups)
• Time (milliseconds): Disable (no EFA) / 80 / 96 / 112 / 200 / 300 /
400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 / 900 / 1000 /
1100 / 1200
Default All CO line groups – 96 ms
Programming 1. Enter 413.
Display: Register Recall
2. Press NEXT.
Display: TRK GRP NO?–>
2. Press NEXT.
Display : TRK GRP NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • The disconnect time must be longer than the requirements of the central
office or the host PBX.
• To assign all CO line groups to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO line
group 1.
• Program [401] “CO Line Group Assignment” is used to assign each CO
line to a CO line group.
Description Enables or disables CPC Signal Detection during the time between
the originated outside call and the established outside call. If this is
enabled, the system disconnects the line with the time set in
program [405] “CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set” when CPC
Signal is detected.
Default Disable
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
Conditions • Some central offices (CO) may send CPC-like signals during the
dialling sequence and an attempt to make a call may be terminated. If
your CO is such a type, select “Disable.”
• Program [405] “CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set” is used to set
CPC Signal Detection Time.
• In the case of KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another CO line number, press NEXT or PREV,
or SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Description Assign the contract status of the Direct Dialling In (DDI) Service or
Multiple Subscriber Number on a CO line basis in both day and
night modes. This setting is also used for Calling Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP) and Connected line
Identification Presentation (COLP).
Programming 1. Enter a program address (420 for day or 429 for night).
Display example: DDI Service Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and 13 through 24 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all CO lines to one, press the key in step 3. In this case,
the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
• If “DDI” is selected, the subscriber number and extension number is
provided to ISDN for CLIP and COLP.
Description Assigns the company or customer names to each CO line so that the
operator or extension user can find the destination where the caller
is trying to reach before answering.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?→
4. Enter a name.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Conditions • In the case of KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• There is a maximum of 24 names. Each name has a maximum of 10
characters.
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key in step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
Description Assigns the type of each port either CO line or extension line on
ISDN port basis.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• If one equipment is connected to the ISDN port, select “Point,” If
multiple equipment are connected, select “Multipoint.”
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
Description Assigns the Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) mode on ISDN port
basis.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
4. Enter TEI.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
To assign “Automatic,” press CLEAR.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• If the “Point” is selected in program [424], assign the fixed TEI. If
“Multipoint” is selected, assign “Automatic.”
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
6. Press STORE.
Programming 1. Enter a program address (438 for day or 439 for night).
Display example: MSN Ring Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
6. Press STORE.
Conditions • For the KX-TD1232, port number 01 through 06 are for the Master
System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave, if available.
• Each extension number consists of 0 through 9. The and # keys
cannot be used.
• You can set the extension numbers in programs [003] “Extension
Number Set,” [127] “Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment,” [130]
“Phantom Extension Number Assignment” and also floating numbers of
the external ringer, hunting groups, and pagers in program [813]
“Floating Number Assignment.”
• When assigning ISDN extension numbers, the MSN additional number
can be added. The MSN must be up to 4 digits, consisting of an ISDN
extension number and an additional number (1 or 2 digits). The MSN
additional number can be selected in programs [427] “ISDN Extension
Multiple Subscriber Number” and [445] “TD286 ISDN Extension
Multiple Subscriber Number.”
• When “0” is assigned, the incoming MSN number is sent to the
destination assigned in program [990] “System Additional Information,
Area 01 – Bits 5 and 6.”
Description Assigns the type of each port either CO line or extension line on a
TD286 ISDN port basis.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD816, port numbers 05 and 06 are fixed as “Extension.”
• For the KX-TD1232, port number 01 through 06 are for the Master
System and 07 through12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to the same selection, press the key in step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for the first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
Description Assigns the active mode of Layer 1 on a TD286 ISDN port basis.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD1232, port number 01 through 06 are for the Master
System and 07 through12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to the same selection, press the key in step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for the first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • For KX-TD1232, port number 01 through 06 are for the Master System
and 07 through12 are for the Slave, if available.
• If one equipment is connected to the ISDN port, select “Point.” If
multiple equipment are connected, select “Multipoint.”
• To assign all ports to the same selection, press the key in step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for the first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
Description Assigns the data link mode on a TD286 ISDN port basis.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD1232, port number 01 through 06 are for the Master
System and 07 through12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to the same selection, press the key in step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for the first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD1232, port number 01 through 06 are for the Master
System and 07 through12 are for the Slave, if available.
• If the “Point” is selected in program [442], assign the fixed TEI. If
“Multipoint” is selected, assign “Automatic.”
• To assign all ports to the same selection, press the key in step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for the first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD1232, port number 01 through 06 are for the Master
System and 07 through12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to the same selection, press the key in step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for the first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
• You must assign the extension number to an ISDN terminal beforehand.
For details, refer to your terminal’s manual.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD1232, port number 01 through 06 are for the Master
System and 07 through12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to the same selection, press the key in step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for the first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
Programming 1. Enter a program address (500 for day or 501 for night).
Display example: TRS Level Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
• Program [601] “Class of Service” is used to assign a Class of Service to
each extension.
Description This program allows you to restrict the duration of outside calls on
a Class of Service (COS) basis.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
• Program [601] “Class of Service” is used to assign a Class of Service to
each extension.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
• Program [601] “Class of Service” is used to assign a Class of Service to
each extension.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
• Program [601] “Class of Service” is used to assign a Class of Service to
each extension.
Description There are three account code modes: Option, Verified-All Calls and
Verified-Toll Restriction Override. This program determines the
mode to be used by each Class of Service (COS).
Option mode: The user can enter any account code, if needed.
Verified – All Calls mode:
The user must always enter a pre-assigned account code to make a
CO call.
Verified – Toll Restriction Override mode:
The user must enter a pre-assigned account code when the user
needs to override toll restriction.
Conditions • To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
• Station programming is used to define the Account Codes for the
Verified modes.
• Program [601] “Class of Service” is used to assign a Class of Service to
each extension.
Description These programs set the toll restriction value used in System Speed
Dialling for each Class of Service (COS) in day or night mode.
When the user makes a call with System Speed Dialling, the system
will check the phone number with this level.
Programming 1. Enter a program address (509 for day or 510 for night).
Display: SPD TRS LVL Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
• The operator extension can switch the mode regardless of setting.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all COS to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
• The operator extension cannot reject the call regardless of setting.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
2. Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display will show the contents programmed for COS 1.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all COS to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
• Program [601] “Class of Service” is used to assign a Class of Service to
each extension.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display will show the contents programmed for COS 1.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display will show the contents programmed for COS 1.
Description EXtra Device Port (XDP) allows a single line telephone (SLT) to be
connected to the same jack as a digital proprietary telephone
(DPT). This program assigns which jacks are XDP. The SLT and
DPT of the programmed jack work as independent extensions.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • In the case of KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
• Immediately after changing your assignment, changed setting may not
work for a maximum of eight seconds.
Description Programs each extension for a Class of Service (COS). The COS
determines the call handling abilities of each extension.
A primary and a secondary COS numbers can be assigned per
extension.
Selection • Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2),
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2),
( =all jacks, -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• COS number: 1 through 8
Default All jacks-1/2 – COS 1, COS 1
Programming 1. Enter 601.
Display: COS Assign
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?→
3. Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack number.
Display example: #01-1:COS1, COS1
4. Enter a COS number for primary number.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
5. Press .
6. Enter a COS number for secondary number.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
7. Press STORE.
8. To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
9. Repeat steps 4 through 8.
10. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of eight Classes of Services. Every extension must
be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to the COS Programming
of programs [5XX] and [991]. The restriction of program [991], bits 1
through 4, applies only for analogue outside lines.
• In the case of KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available. Jack
numbers in the out-of-service system are unacceptable.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks to one COS, press the key in step 3. In this case,
the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
Description A DIL 1:N line can be assigned to ring more than one extension.
All incoming calls from the programmed CO lines are directed to
the specified extensions. These programs assign the extensions and
the notification method for each CO line in both day and night
modes.
Programming 1. Enter a program address (603 for day or 604 for night).
Display example: DIL 1:N Asn Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?–>
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack
number.
6. Press STORE.
9. Press END.
Programming 1. Enter a program address (605 for day or 606 for night).
Display example: CO Out Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?–>
6. Press STORE.
9. Press END.
Conditions • In the case of KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
Jack numbers in the out-of-service system are unacceptable.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks or all CO lines to one selection, press the key at
step 3 or 4. In these cases, the display shows the contents programmed
for Jack 01 or CO01.
• To assign no CO line group for a station, press CLEAR at step 4.
Description These programs assign the extensions which will ring when a
doorphone call is received during the day and night modes.
Programmed extensions are also allowed to open the door.
Programming 1. Enter a program address (607 for day or 608 for night).
Display example: Doorphone in Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • In the case of KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
Description Assigns a mailbox number for each extension, only if program [990]
“System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 8” is set to “free.”
Conditions • In the case of KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available. Jack
numbers in the out-of-service system are unacceptable.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
• The system supports a maximum of eight jacks (16 jacks during System
Connection for KX-TD1232) for connection to a Voice Processing
System as the Voice Mail or Automated Attendant ports.
• Each mailbox number has a maximum of 16 digits, consisting of 0
through 9, , # and PAUSE.
• To display parts of the mailbox number which have scrolled off the
display, press or .
Description Assigns whether the extension can perform all accesses or not.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Description Sets or cancels the Data Line Security mode on an extension basis.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
Description Programs each ISDN port for a Class of Service (COS). The COS
determines the call handling abilities of each port.
A primary and a secondary COS numbers can be assigned per port.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press .
6. Enter a COS number for secondary number.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
7. Press STORE.
8. To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
9. Repeat steps 4 through 8.
10. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of eight Classes of Services. Every ISDN
extension must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to the
COS Programming of programs [5XX] and [991]. The restriction of
program [991], Bit 1 through 4, applies only for analogue outside
lines.
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Class of Service (COS)
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Extension
Programming 1. Enter a program address (615 for day or 616 for night).
Display example: CO Out(ISDN) Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
6. Press STORE.
9. Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09
through 12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key in step 4. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO 01.
• When you change a port number by pressing NEXT or PREV, the CO
line number is not changed.
Example #03:CO02.......Pressing NEXT....#04:CO02
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for jack 01.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital System Programming 4-141
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one
that supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
620-621 4.8 Extension Programming
Extension Intercept Routing — Day / Night
Description Sets the Intercept Routing destination of for each jack in both day
and night modes.
Selection • Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
( =all jacks, -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Extension number: 2 through 4 digits / Disable (no Intercept
Routing)
Programming 1. Enter a program address (620 for day or 621 for night).
Display example: EXT Intercep Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?→
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another jack number, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Conditions • You can set the extension numbers in programs [003] “Extension
Number Set,” [127] “Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment,” [130]
“Phantom Extension Number” and also floating numbers of hunting
groups, and pagers in program [813] “Floating Number Assignment.”
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for jack 01.
• When “Disable” is selected, Intercept Routing is provided according to
the assignment in program [409]–[410].
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master
System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for jack 01.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Description Programs each TD286 ISDN port for Class of Service (COS). The
COS determines the call handling abilities of each port.
A primary and a secondary COS numbers can be assigned per port.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press .
6. Enter a COS number for secondary number.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
7. Press STORE.
8. To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
9. Repeat steps 4 through 8.
10. Press END.
Programming 1. Enter a program address (629 for day or 630 for night).
Display example: CO Out(TD286) Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
6. Press STORE.
9. Press END.
Conditions • For KX-TD1232, port number 01 through 06 are for the Master System
and 07 through12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for the first port.
• To assign all CO lines to the same selection, press the key in step 4.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO 01.
• When you change a port number by pressing NEXT or PREV, the CO
line number is not changed.
Example #01:CO02.......Pressing NEXT....#02:CO02
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • For KX-TD1232, port number 01 through 06 are for the Master System
and 07 through12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for the first port.
4-142.8
4.9 LCR Programming 7000
LCR Mode
Description Allows you to turn on or off the Least Cost Routing (LCR) mode.
LCR, if enabled, selects the least expensive route to be used for an
outside call.
Selection On / Off
Default Off
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: LCR:Off
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions If “Off” is selected, the Automatic Line Access feature functions in place
of LCR.
4-144
4.9 LCR Programming 7002
BTL Access Code
Default 121
2. Press NEXT.
Display: example: 121
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new code.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Description By entering numbers into leading digit plan for a maximum of eight
carriers, you are starting the process to determine which CO line
group will be used to route the call.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?–>
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
• The same code with different digits may be assigned in this program or
in program [7X20] “LCR Exceptional Code Set.” In this case, the code
which has smaller digits takes the more expensive route is priority. To
prevent this, enter “ ” (wild card) after the code with the smaller
digits. Examples are shown below:
<Examples>
(1) The code priority is as follows:
“44” in program [7201] > “444” in program [7101]
In this case, “44 ” should be assigned in program [7201].
(2) The code priority is as follows:
“332” in program [7120] > “3323” in program [7120]
In this case, “332 ” should be assigned in program [7120].
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Week NO?–>
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new time.
8. Enter the fee (pounds and pence), moving the cursor with
and buttons.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new fee.
9. Press STORE.
Description Assigns dialling numbers that are excepted from LCR routing plans
of the specified carrier. They are sent out to a CO selected from
automatic access CO line groups.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?–>
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new code.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
• The same code with different digits may be assigned in this program or
in program [7X01] “LCR Leading Digit Entry.” In this case, the code
which has smaller digits takes the more expensive route is priority. To
prevent this, enter “ ” (wild card) after the code with the smaller
digits. Examples are shown below:
<Examples>
(1) The code priority is as follows:
“44” in program [7201] > “444” in program [7101]
In this case, “44 ” should be assigned in program [7201].
(2) The code priority is as follows:
“332” in program [7120] > “3323” in program [7120]
In this case, “332 ” should be assigned in program [7120].
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: 131
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: CPTAIH
5. Press STORE.
6. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: 12345678
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new numbers.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: CO Line NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Selection • Outgoing calls: All (all calls) / Toll (toll calls only) /
Off (no printing)
• Incoming calls: On (all calls) / Off (no printing)
4. Press STORE.
7. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Description Used to match the SMDR output to the paper size being used in the
printer. Page length determines the number of lines per page. Skip
perforation determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of
every page. Page width determines the number of characters per line.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press NEXT to program skip perforation.
Display example: Skip Perf: 0
7. Press STORE.
8. Press NEXT to program page width.
Display example: Page Width: 80
Conditions • The page length should be four lines or more longer than the skip
perforation length.
• If 80 characters for page width is selected, the last five digits of account
codes are not printed out.
• A title is positioned on the first three lines on every page.
• The programmed format becomes valid only if the EIA (RS-232C)
cable is connected. If a printer is already connected, disconnect it and
connect again. Otherwise the former format becomes valid.
Description Starts or stops printing of the system data. All the current system-
programmed data is printed out.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Print-Out:Start
Display: Print-Out:Finish
4. Press STORE.
Display: Print-Out:Stop
5. Press END.
Description Assigns the music source to be used for Music on Hold and
Background Music (BGM).
4. Press STORE.
5. Press NEXT to program BGM.
Display example: BGM :Music1
Conditions • The music source is a user-supplied item. Two music sources can be
installed per system. For KX-TD1232, music sources 1 and 2 are
connected to the Master System, 3 and 4 are to the Slave, if available.
Any music source can be used by either system.
• The system is provided with an internal music source. By default
setting, external music source is used as Music Source 1. Program
[990] “System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 10” is used to
select internal music source for Music Source 1.
• To disable music, press CLEAR at steps 3 and 6.
• Program [804] “External Pager BGM” is used to enable / disable BGM
for each external pager.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Pager NO?–>
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • The external pager is a user-supplied item. Two external pagers can be
installed per system. For KX-TD1232, external pagers 1 and 2 are
installed in the Master System, 3 and 4 in the Slave, if available.
• Program [006] “Operator / Manager Extension Assignment” is used to
assign an extension as an operator.
• Program [803] “Music Source Use” is used to select the music source to
be used for BGM.
Description Used to remove the confirmation tone for external pagers. The
default setting sends confirmation tone 2 to the external pagers
before paging is broadcast. This programming applies to all the
external pagers.
Selection On / Off
Default On
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Tone:On
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions The external pager is a user-supplied item. Two external pagers can be
installed per system. For KX-TD1232, external pagers 1 and 2 are
installed in the Master System, 3 and 4 in the Slave, if available.
Default New line code = CR+LF; Baud rate = 9600; Word length = 8;
Parity bit = Mark; Stop bit = 1 — Port 1 / Port 2
Programming 1. Enter a program address (806 for Port 1 or 807 for Port 2).
Display example: RS232C Paramet.1
4. Press STORE.
7. Press STORE.
Description Assigns the floating numbers for the External Pager, modem,
Digital Test Access (DTA) and Hunting Groups. These numbers
can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station
access.
4. Press STORE.
7. Press END.
• The leading one or two digits of the floating numbers are subject to
program [100] “Flexible Numbering, (01) through (16) 1st through 16th
hundred extension blocks.”
• Floating numbers and extension numbers should be unique. Double
entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid. Valid entry
example: 10 and 11, 10 and 110; Invalid entry example: 10 and 106,
210 and 21.
• You can leave the entry empty.
• To avoid making an invalid entry, check the other extension number in
programs [003] “Extension Number Set,” [012] “ISDN Extension
Number Set,” [017] “TD286 Extension Number Set,” [127] “Voice
Mail Extension Number Assignment” and [130] “Phantom Extension
Number Assignment.” The default of each extension number is as
follows:
[003] Extension Number Set
KX-TD816 – 201 through 216, 301 through 316
KX-TD1232 – 201 through 264, 301 through 364
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set
Not stored
[017] TD286 Extension Number Set
Not stored
[127] Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment
265 through 288
[130] Phantom Extension Number Assignment
Not stored
Description Assigns the modem standard. There are two standards available –
BELL and CCITT.
Default CCITT
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: MODEM:CCITT
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Description Assigns the KX-TD197 modem standard. There are two standards
available – BELL and CCITT-V.34.
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Mast.:V.34-33600
4. Press NEXT.
Display example: Slave:V.34-33600
6. Press STORE.
7. Press END.
Description Assigns the message number which is used when the Outgoing
Message (OGM) for Timed Reminder is set.
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: MSG:Not Stored
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions None
Explanation
Area Bit Description Selection Default References
01 1 Sound source during transfer. 0 : ringback tone 1 • CALL
1 : Music on Hold TRANSFER
FEATURES
• Music on Hold
2 Result of pressing the hookswitch lightly 0 : Consultation 0 Call Hold
and then replacing the handset (during a Hold
CO line call (single line telephones only). 1 : disconnection
3 Result of pressing the RECALL or 0 : disconnection 1 • External
FLASH/RCL button on proprietary signal Feature Access
telephones (during an outside call). 1 : register recall • Recall
signal
4 Enables or disables the CO Pulse 0 : disable 0 Dial Type
feedback tone. 1 : enable Selection
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Area NO?→
7. Press STORE.
Conditions None
Display Example
Bit Number
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1111111111110000
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?→
7. Press STORE.
Conditions • To assign all COS numbers to one selection, press the key in step 3.
Confirmation Tone 1
Confirmation Tone 2
Confirmation Tone 3
Confirmation Tone 4
Dial Tone 1
Dial Tone 2
Dial Tone 3
Dial Tone 4
Busy Tone
Reorder Tone
Ringback Tone
5-2 List
5.1 Tone / Ring Tone
<TONE> 15 sec
Hold Recall
4 sec
Hold Tone
<RING TONE>
1 sec
Intercom Calls /
Intercom Hold Recall
Outside Calls /
Outside Hold Recall
Doorphone Calls /
Timed Reminder
Callback Ringing
(Camp-on Recall)
List 5-3
5.2 Default Values
Address Program Default
Manager Programming
[000] Date and Time Set 1 Jan. ’94 SAT 12:00 am
[001] System Speed Dialling Number Set Not Stored
[002] System Speed Dialling Name Set Not Stored
[003] Extension Number Set • KX-TD816
Jack 01-1 through 16-1=201 through 216
Jack 01-2 through 16-2=301 through 316
• KX-TD1232
Jack 01-1 through 64-1=201 through 264
Jack 01-2 through 64-2=301 through 364
[004] Extension Name Set Not Stored
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • KX-TD816
CO buttons 1 through 8 of all jacks – Single-
CO 01 through 08; ringing tone type 2
• KX-TD1232
CO buttons 1 through 24 of all jacks=Single-
CO 01 through 24; ringing tone type 2
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Operator 1 (Day / Night) and manager – Jack 01;
Assignment Operator 2 – Unassigned
[007] Console Port and Paired Telephone Not Stored
Assignment
[008] Absent Messages 1: Will Return Soon; 2: Gone Home
3: At Ext %%%; 4: Back at %%:%%
5: Out Until %%/%%; 6: In a Meeting
7 through 9: Not Stored
[009] Quick Dial Number Set Not Stored
[010] Budget Management 0£
[011] Charge Margin and Tax Rate 0, 0%
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set All ports – Not Stored
[013] ISDN Extension Name Set All ports – Not Stored
[014] Budget Management on ISDN Port All ports – 0 £
[015] Charge Rate Fractional Point 2
Assignment
[016] Charge Rate Assignment 0.01
[017] TD286 Extension Number Set All ports – Not Stored
[018] TD286 Extension Name Set All ports – Not Stored
[019] Budget Management on TD286 Port All ports – 0
[021]–[022] Doorphone Call Forwarding — All doorphones – Disable
Day / Night
System Programming
[100] Flexible Numbering See page 4-37 and 4-38.
5-4 List
5.2 Default Values
Address Program Default
[101] Day / Night Service Switching Mode Manual
[102] Day / Night Service Starting Time Every day of the week – Day=9:00 am /
Night=5:00 pm
[103] Automatic Access CO Line Group 12345678
Assignment
[104] Quick Dial Assignment Not Stored
[105] Account Codes Not Stored
[106] Station Hunting Type All hunting groups – Disable
[107] System Password 1234
[108] One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button Enable
[109] Expansion Card / Unit Type • KX-TD816: C;C;E
• KX-TD1232: C;C;E1;E2 (Master and Slave)
[110] Network type Assignment BT
[111] ISDN DDI / MSN Removed Digit / All CO lines – Removed digit=01; Added
Added Number Assignment number=Not Stored
[113] VM Status DTMF Set RBT=1; BT=2; ROT=3; DND=4; Answer=5;
Disconnect=#9; Confirm =9; FWD VM RBT=6;
FWD VM BT=7; FWD EXT RBT=8
[114] VM Command DTMF Set LV-MSG=H; GETMSG= H; AA-SVC=#8;
VM-SVC=#6
[115] Adjust Time 1:00 am
[116] ROM Version Display Not applicable
[117] Charge Display Selection Pound
[118] Charge Fee Reference Extension All jacks – Enable
Assignment
[119] Charge Fee Reference ID Code Set 1234
[120] User Password 1234
[121] Pulse Dial Reception Assignment Puls: Enable
[122] Automatic Door Open Assignment Disable
[123] Hotel Application Disable
[125] Assignment of Denomination £
† [126] Voice Mail Number Assignment All jacks – Blank (Not Stored)
† [127] Voice Mail Extension Number VM-01=265, VM-02=266, VM-03=267,
Assignment VM-04=268, VM-05=269, VM-06=270,
VM-07=277, VM-08=278, VM-09=281,
VM-10=282, VM-11=283, VM-12=284,
VM-13=271, VM-14=272, VM-15=273,
VM-16=274, VM-17=275, VM-18=276,
VM-19=279, VM-20=280, VM-21=285,
VM-22=286, VM-23=287, VM-24=288
† [128] Voice Mail Extension Group All voice mail numbers – EXG 1
Assignment
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital List 5-5
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one
that supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
5.2 Default Values
Address Program Default
[129] Operator Queue Queue: 8, H-UP: 4
[130] Phantom Extension Number Not Stored
Assignment
[131] Hunting Group Assignment All hunting groups – Disable
[132] Hunting Group Name Assignment Not Stored
[133] Hunting Overflow All hunting groups – Busy, 0
[134]–[135] Hunting Intercept — Day/Night All hunting groups – Disable (Day / Night)
[137]–[138] UCD Time Table Assignment — All UCD groups – Not Stored
Day / Night
[139] UCD Time Table All time tables – Not Stored
[148] Off-Hook Monitor Enable
[150] ISDN DDI Translation Table All locations – Not Stored
[151]–[152] ISDN DDI Ringing Assignment All locations – Not Stored
— Day / Night
[153] Completion of Calls to Busy Disable
Subscriber (CCBS)
Timer Programming
[200] Hold Recall Time 60 s
[201] Transfer Recall Time 12 rings
[202] Call Forwarding – No Answer Time 3 rings
[203] Intercept Time 12 rings
[204] Pickup Dial Waiting Time 1s
[205] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration 10 min
Time
[207] First Digit Time 10 s
[208] Inter Digit Time 10 s
[209] Automatic Redial Repeat Times 4 times
[210] Automatic Redial Interval Time 120 s
[211] Dial Start Time 0 ms
[212] Call Duration Count Start Time 0s
[214] Message Waiting Ring Interval Time 0 min
[215] Ring-Off Detection Time 6s
[216] Outgoing Message Time 32, 0, 32, 0
[217] Timed Reminder Alarm Ring Time 30 s
[218] Doorphone-to-CO Line Call 0s
Duration Time
TRS Programming
[301]–[305] TRS Denied Code Entry for Not Stored
Levels 2 through 6
[306]–[310] TRS Excepted Code Entry for Not Stored
Levels 2 through 6
5-6 List
5.2 Default Values
Address Program Default
[311] Emergency Dial Number Set Location 01 – 999; Location 02 – 112;
Others – Not Stored
CO Line Programming
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment All CO lines – Connect
[401] CO Line Group Assignment CO01=TRG 1; CO02=TRG 2;
CO03=TRG 3; CO04=TRG 4;
CO05=TRG 5; CO06=TRG 6;
CO07=TRG 7; (KX-TD816)
CO08 through CO16=TRG 8;
(KX-TD1232)
CO08 through CO54=TRG8
[402] Dial Mode Selection All CO lines – DTMF
[403] Pulse Speed Selection All CO lines – 10 pps
[404] DTMF Time All CO lines – 96 ms
[405] CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set All CO lines – 352 ms
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension – Day/Night All CO lines – Disable—Day/Night
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension – Day/Night All CO line groups – Disable—Day/Night
[411] Host PBX Access Codes Not Stored
[412] Pause Time All CO line groups – 3.5 s
[413] Register Recall Signal Time All CO line groups – 96 ms
[414] Disconnect Time All CO line groups – 2.0 s
[415] CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set Disable
[416] Reverse Circuit Assignment All CO lines – Regular
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment Not Stored
[420]/[429] ISDN Ring Service Assignment All CO lines – DDI
— Day / Night
[421] CO Line Name Assignment Not Stored
[422] ISDN Port Type All CO lines – Enable
[423] ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode Not Stored
[424] ISDN Configuration All ports – CO
[425] ISDN Data Link Mode All ports – Permanent
[426] ISDN TEI Mode All ports – Point
[427] ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber All ports – Permanent
Number All ports – Fix 0
[428] ISDN Extension Progress Tone All ports – Disable
[437] Multiple Subscriber Number Set Not Stored
[438]–[439] Extension Ringing Assignment All ports – All locations – Disable (Day /
— Day / Night for ISDN MSN Night)
[440] TD286 ISDN Port Type All ports – Extension
[441] TD286 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode All ports – Call
[442] TD286 ISDN Configuration All ports – Multipoint
[443] TD286 ISDN Data Link Mode All ports – Call
List 5-7
5.2 Default Values
Address Program Default
[444] TD286 ISDN TEI Mode All ports – Automatic
[445] TD286 ISDN Extension Multiple All ports – Disable
Subscriber Number
[446] TD286 ISDN Extension Progress All ports – Disable
Tone
[450] PRI Configuration KX-TD816 : 0YY – – / CRC4 : Enable
KX-TD1232 : 0YYYY / CRC4 : Enable
[451] PRI Reference CO KX-TD816 : All CO limes (PRI line) – CO5
KX-TD1232 : All CO lines (PRI line) – CO9
[452] CO – to – TIE Transfer All CO line groups – Disable
[453] TIE – to – CO Transfer All CO line groups – Disable
[454] TIE – to – TIE Transfer All CO line groups – Enable
[455] TIE Secunty Type Non
[456] Line Hunting Sequence All CO line groups – Large → Small
[457] Voice Path Type All CO lines – 4 Wire
[458] Voice Level (Transmit) All CO lines – 3db
[459] Voice Level (Receive) All CO lines – 3db
[460] TIE Receive Dial All CO line ports – Yes
COS Programming
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level – Day / All COS – Level 1 (Day / Night)
Night
[502] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration All COS – Disable
Limit
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line All COS – Enable
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line All COS – Disable
[507] Do Not Disturb Override All COS – Disable
[508] Account Code Entry Mode All COS – Option
[509]–[510] Toll Restriction Level for All COS – Level 1 (Day / Night)
System Speed Dialling – Day / Night
[511] Door Opener Access All COS – Enable
[513] Night Service Access All COS – Enable
[514] Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In All COS – Disable
Call
[516] Calling Line Identification All COS – Disable
Restriction
[517] Connected Line Identification All COS – Disable
Restriction
[518] CFU / CFB / CFNR Assignment All COS – Disable
[519] Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) All COS – Enable
[520] Call Forwarding from Hunting Group All COS – Disable
[521] Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO All COS – Disable
Line
5-8 List †: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one
that supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
5.2 Default Values
Address Program Default
Extension Programming
[600] EXtra Device Port All Jacks – Disable
[601] Class of Service All Jacks-1/2 – COS 1, COS 1
[602] Extension Group Assignment All Jacks-1/2 – Extension group 1 – Enable
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed All Jacks-1/2 – All CO lines – Immediate
Ringing — Day / Night Ringing (Day / Night)
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line All Jacks-1/2 – All CO lines – Enable (Day /
Assignment — Day / Night Night)
[607]–[608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment Jack 01-1 – All doorphones;
— Day / Night Other jacks – No doorphone (Day / Night)
[609] Voice Mail Access Codes Not Stored
[611] Extension Connection Assignment All jacks – Connect
[612] Data Line Security All jacks – Off
[613] ISDN Class of Service All ports – COS 1, COS1
[615]–[616] Outgoing Permitted CO Line All ports – All CO lines – Enabl (Day / Night)
Assignment — Day / Night for ISDN
Extension
† [617] Live Call Screening Recording Mode All jacks – Stop Record
Assignment
[620]–[621] Extension Intercept Routing — All jacks – Disable (Day / Night)
Day / Night
[622] Incoming Call Display All jacks – Caller
[623] CLIP / COLP Number Assignment All jacks – Not Stored
for Extension
[624] CLIP / COLP Number Assignment All jacks – Not Stored
for ISDN Extension
[627] TD286 Class of Service All ports – COS 1, COS 1
[629]–[630] Outgoing Permitted CO line All ports – All CO lines – Enabl (Day / Night)
Assignment — Day / Night for
TD286 Extension
[632] CLIP / COLP Number Assignment All ports – Not Stored
for TD286 Extension
LCR Programming
[7000] LCR Mode Off
[7002] BTL Access Code 121
[7003] Itemized Code Set • KX-TD816
Jack 01-1 through 16-1=201 through 216
Jack 01-2 through 16-2=301 through 316
• KX-TD1232
Jack 01-1 through 64-1=201 through 264
Jack 01-2 through 64-2=301 through 364
List 5-9
5.2 Default Values
Address Program Default
[7004] Iternal ISDN Itemized Code Set All Ports – Not Stored
[7005] TD286 Internal ISDN Itemized Code set All Ports – Not Stored
[7X01] LCR Leading Digit Entry Carrier 1–Location 1=
Other locations – Not Stored
[7X11] LCR Time and Fee Set Not Stored
[7X20] LCR Exceptional Code Set Not Stored
[7X21] LCR Carrier Code Carrier 1 – 131; Other carriers – Not Stored
[7X22] LCR Carrier Modify Command Carrier 1 – CPTAIH; Other carriers – Not Stored
[7X23] LCR CO Line Group Assignment Carrier 1 – 12345678;
Other carriers – Not Stored
[7X24] Authorization Code Set Not Stored
Resource Programming
[800] SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call All calls – Off
Log Printout
[801] SMDR Format Page length – 66; Skip perforation – 0;
Page width – 80
[802] System Data Printout Not Applicable
[803] Music Source Use Hold and BGM – Music 1
[804] External Pager BGM All external pagers – Disable
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone On
[806]–[807] EIA (RS-232C) Parameters – New line code – CR+LF; Baud rate – 9600;
Port 1/ Port 2 Word length – 8; Parity bit – Mark;
Stop bit – 1 (Port1 / Port2)
[813] Floating Number Assignment • KX-TD816: Pager 1=296; Pager 2=297;
DTA=299; Hunting groups 01 through 32
=Not Stored
• KX-TD1232: Pager 1=296; Pager 2=297;
Pager 3=396; Pager 4=397; MODEM=399;
DTA=299; Hunting groups 01 through 32
=Not Stored
[814] Modem Standard CCITT
[817] TD197 Baud Rate Set Master and slave – V.34-33600
[818] Timed Reminder Message Not Stored
Assignment
Option Programming
[990] System Additional Information See pages 4-168 through 4-174.
[991] COS Additional Information See page 4-176.
5-10 List
Section 6
Troubleshooting
This section provides information for system and telephone
troubleshooting.
6.1 Troubleshooting
6.1.1 Installation
Noise in external paging. Induced noise on the wire Use a shielded cable as the
between the system and the connection wire between the
amplifier. system and amplifier. A short
shielded cable is recommended.
Volume distortion from Excessive input level from Decrease the output level of the
external music source. external music source. external music source by using the
volume control on the music
source.
Speed Dialling or One- Bad programming. Enter the CO line access number
Touch Dialling does not (9, 81 through 88) into program-
function. ming.
6-2 Troubleshooting
6.1 Troubleshooting
6.1.2 Connection
Connection between the DSHS and a proprietary telephone:
No CAUSE SOLUTION
Can you dial
The A/B is connected to the H/L. Use the correct cord (inner 2
an extension?
wires are for A/B and the
H● ● H outer 2 wires are for H/L).
A● ● A
B● ● B
L● ● L
DSHS extension
*The P1/P2 is connected to the L/H. Use the correct cord (2 wires
second from the outside for
P2 ● ● P2
H● H/L and the outer 2 wires are
● H
A● ● A for P1/P2).
B● ● B
L● ● L
P1 ● ● P1
DSHS extension
(Continued to the
following page.)
Troubleshooting 6-3
6.1 Troubleshooting
Connection between the central office and the DSHS:
CAUSE SOLUTION
(Continued from the
CO lines are connected to the A/A. Reconnect the CO lines to
previous page.)
the paired A/B of the
● A telephone jack using 2-
● ● B conductor wiring.
● ● A
Can you dial No ● B
out on a CO
line? CO line DSHS
● A
● ● B
● ● A
● B
CO line DSHS
6.1.3 Operation
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION
• When using the speaker- • The HANDSET / • When the headset is not used, set
phone mode with a HEADSET selector of the HANDSET / HEADSET
proprietary telephone the KX-T7130 is set to selector to the “HANDSET”
KX-T7130, nothing is the “HEADSET” position.
audible. position.
• When using the speaker- • The “HEADSET” mode • When the headset is not used,
phone/monitor mode with is selected by station pro- select the “HANDSET” mode by
a digital proprietary gramming, station programming.
telephone, nothing is “Handset/Headset
audible. Selection.”
The unit does not ring. The Ringer Volume Set to “HIGH” or “LOW.”
Selector is set to “OFF.”
During a power interrup- • A DPT or APT is • Disconnect the DPT or APT and
tion, extensions connected connected to the jack. connect a single line telephone.
to Power Failure Transfer • The dialling mode (tone • Set the Tone / Pulse switch to the
jacks do not operate. or pulse) is improper. other position.
6-4 Troubleshooting
6.1 Troubleshooting
Notes:
(a) When the System Clear Switch is set to “NORMAL,” pressing
the Reset Button causes the following:
1. Camp-on is cleared.
2. Calls on Hold are terminated.
3. Calls on Exclusive Hold are terminated.
4. Calls in progress are terminated.
5. Call Park is cleared.
Other data stored in memory except the above are not cleared.
(b) When the System Clear Switch is set to the “CLEAR” position,
you must press the Reset Button with caution, because all data
stored in memory will be cleared by the following operation:
pressing the Reset Button and setting the System Clear Switch
to the “ NORMAL” position while the Power Indicator is
flashing.
6-6 Troubleshooting
Section 7
PRI Section
This section provides information on using the Primary Rate
Interface (PRI) ISDN line with the optional expansion unit.
7.1 Overview
The KX-TD290 Primary Rate Interface (PRI) ISDN Expansion
Unit adds one PRI ISDN line.
When this unit is installed in the KX-TD816, the maximum number
of available CO lines is limited to 12 and when it is installed in the
KX-TD1232 for the system connection, the maximum number of
available CO lines is limited to 38.
Therefore, if another CO card or unit is used, it is required to program
which area it is installed in by program [450] beforehand. One PRI
ISDN line adds 8 CO lines (CO 09 through 16) to the KX-TD816 and
adds 30 CO lines (CO 25 through CO54) to the KX-TD1232.
This unit cannot be installed in the KX-TD1232 Slave system.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
D816
DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic
Panasonic
1 PRI ISDN line can be added.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[109] Expansion Card/Unit Type — Assign “S3” to the desired area.
Section 7.3, System Programming
[450] PRI Configuration
[451] PRI Reference CO
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual
Flexible Button Assignment – Group-CO (G-CO) Button, Loop-CO
(L-CO) Button, Single-CO (S-CO) Button
Area 1
One of the following CO/ISDN
line units
• 4-CO Line Unit, KX-TD180
Panasonic
• 2-ISDN S0 Line Unit, KX-TD280
• 6-ISDN S0 Line Unit, KX-TD286
• 1-PRI ISDN Line Unit, KX-TD290
D816
Expansion Unit
Connectors
Notes • When starting the system for the first time or performing System Data
Clear, the application for location will use practical installation instead
of the system default setting.
• System Programming is required for location identification.
Refer to program [109], “Expansion Card/Unit Type,” in Section 4.
Default: Area 1= 4-CO Line Unit, Area 2= 8-Station Line Unit
Area 3
Max. two extension line units
8-Station Line Units, KX-TD170
Area 2
Area 1
One of the following CO/ISDN
line units
Panasonic
• 4-CO Line Unit, KX-TD180
• 2-ISDN S0 Line Unit, KX-TD280
• 6-ISDN S0 Line Unit, KX-TD286
• 1-PRI ISDN Line Unit, KX-TD290
Expansion Unit D1232
Connectors
Notes • ISDN card/unit installation should not be done only in the Slave system
for system connection.
• When starting the system for the first time or performing System Data
Clear, the application for location will use practical installation instead
of the system default setting.
• System Programming is required for location identification. Refer to
program [109], “Expansion Card/Unit Type,” in Section 4.
Default: Area 1= 4-CO Line Unit, Area 2, 3= 8-Station Line Unit
1. Loosen the two the screws on the cover 3. Hook the cabinet on the main unit and slide
plate. Insert fingers into the slits to the cabinet to the left until it is secured.
remove the cover plate.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
Panasonic
Inside screw
Panasonic
Panasonic
TB ← From
To the unit ← RB
RA
TA
Network
2
1
Cord holder
Panasonic
RB ← From
To the unit ← TB
TA
RA
Network
7. Insert the plug into a jack on the unit. 11. Fix the cords to the wall at the shown
position so that the front cover can be
opened.
8
7
6 RB
IS
D
N 5 RA
D
IG
IT
A
L
S
U
P
E
R
H
Y
B
R
ID
S
Y
4
S Panasonic
TE
M
2C
O
3
2 TB
1 TA
P
an
as
on
ic
Cut here
8. Tie up all the cords into a bundle. If
other cords are coming from the upper
cabinets, tie them, too.
Description Assigns the number of B channels which are actually used out of
the 8 PRI line channels (for KX-TD816) or 30 PRI line channels
(for KX-TD1232) and the installation location of the CO line card
(KX-TD181 or KX-TD182) or BRI card (KX-TD281 or KX-
TD282), the CO line unit (KX-TD180), or BRI unit (KX-TD280 or
KX-TD286). The CRC4 mode can be also assigned.
Selection KX-TD816
• B channel number and installation spot: 8 Y– – –/0 YY – –
(Y=the card can be installed, – =this area is not changeable)
ex.: 8 Y – – –
Not available.
Status of the expansion area of the system.
Status of the basic area of the system.
the number of available B channels
Programming example:
1. To install TD290 and TD282: 8 Y– – –
KX-TD1232
• B channel number and installation spot: 30 Y–NN/30 N–YN/
30 N–NY/26 Y–NY/
26 N–YY/ 22 Y–YN/
18 Y–YY/0 YYYY
(Y=the card can be installed, – =this area is not changeable,
N=the card is not installed.)
ex.: 30 Y – N N
Status of the expansion area of the slave system.
Status of the basic area of the slave system.
Status of the expansion area of the master system.
Status of the basic area of the master system.
the number of available B channels
Programming example:
1. To install TD290 and TD281 to the Master system: 30 Y–NN
2. To install TD290 to the Master and TD280 to the Slave systems:
30 N–NY
• CRC4: Disable / Enable
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: 0 YYYY
4. Press STORE.
7. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Description Assigns which CO line number system data each PRI line uses
except for the following programs:
• [401] CO Line Group Assignment
• [419] Subscribers Number Assignment
• [421] CO Line Name Assignment
After assigning this program, the following program data will
become available for PRI line CO 09 through CO16 (for KX-
TD816) or CO 25 through 54 (for KX-TD1232).
• [111] ISDN DDI / MSN Removed Digit / Added Number
Assignment
• [407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night
• [420]/[429] ISDN Ring service Assignment — Day / Night
• [603]–[604] DIL 1:N extension and Delayed ringing — Day / Night
• [605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
• [615]–[616] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
— Day / Night for ISDN Extension
• [629]–[630] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
— Day / Night for TD286 Extension
• [659]–[660] PS DIL 1:N Extension — Day / Night
• [661]–[662] PS Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
— Day / Night
Selection KX-TD816
• CO line number of PRI line: 09 through 16, ( =all CO lines)
• CO line number: 1 through 8
KX-TD1232
• CO line number of PRI line: 25 through 54, ( =all CO lines)
• CO line number: 01 through 24
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?→
5. Press STORE.
6. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master system
and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• CO09 through CO16 become available when the expansion unit KX-
TD290 is installed in the KX-TD816 and CO25 through CO54 become
available when the expansion unit KX-TD290 is installed in the KX-
TD1232.
• To assign all CO lines to the same selection, press the key in step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO09 for
the KX-TD816 and CO25 for the KX-TD1232.
KX-TD144 × 2 – 4 4
KX-TD146 6 6 6
KX-TD146 × 2 – 12 12
KX-TD144+ – 8 8
KX-TD146
PS (Portable Station) 16 64 64
RF Specifications
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Radio Access Method Multi Carrier TDMA-TDD
Frequency Band 1.881 – 1.907 MHz
Number of Carriers 10
Carrier Spacing 1.728 MHz
Gross Bit Rate 1.152 bps
Carrier Multiplex TDMA, 24 (T × 12, R × 12) sliots per frame
Frame Length 10 msec
Modulation Scheme GFSK
Roll–off factor = 0.5 50% roll–off in the transmitter
Data Coding for Modulator Differencial Coding
Voice CODEC 32 Kbps ADPCM (CCITT G.721)
Transmission Output Max. 250 mW
Survey the site for the Cell Station. (See pages 8-18 through 8-28.)
Note The master CS number must be assigned before using a Cell Station.
(Refer to the program [680] “Cell Station Number Assignment for
Master CS” in Section 8.4.)
Cell Station
1. Reflection
Column
2. Diffraction
3. Penetration
Object
CS CS
5 – 10 m Cell Stations
(KX-TD142)
• The Cell Station should be kept free of dust, moisture, high tem-
perature (more than 40˚C), low temperature (less than 5˚C),
vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• If a backup system for use during a Cell Station power failure is
required, set the system cable resistance within 20 Ω.
• Keep distance between the equipment listed below in order to
prevent noise, interference or the disconnection of a conversa-
tion.
EQUIPMENT DISTANCE
Cell Station and office equipment such as a computer, more than 1.8 meters
telex, fax, etc., or microwaves.
Cell Station and portable station more than 1 meter
Two portable stations more than 0.5 meter
Portable station and proprietary wired telephone more than 1 meter
The system and Cell Station more than 2 meters
Note • In Cell Station overlap areas, if the signal from one Cell Station
becomes weak, the DECT portable station will start call handover to
the next Cell Station. However if there is no free channel for a call
handover, the DECT portable station will remain with its current Cell
Station until out of range and the call is lost.
• Too many Cell Stations in a small area can cause problems due to con-
flicts over which signal channels each Cell Station can use.
Ideally Cell Stations should be a minimum of 25 to 40 meters apart.
Expansion
area 2
Expansion CS INF
DECT
area 1
KX-TD144
DECT
Panasonic
KX-TD142
D816
Expansion Unit
Connector
Remove the front cover
plate(s).
Expansion
area 3
Expansion
area 2
DECT
CS INF
Expansion KX-TD144
area 1
DECT
KX-TD142
Panasonic
D1232
Expansion Unit
Connectors
Expansion
area 2
KX-TD142
Expansion CS INF
DECT
area 1
KX-TD146
DECT
Panasonic
DECT
D816
DECT
Expansion Unit
Connector
Remove the front DECT
cover plate(s).
DECT
AC Adapter (KX-A277E)
Expansion
area 3
Expansion KX-TD142
area 2 CS INF
DECT
KX-TD146
Expansion
area 1 DECT
DECT
Panasonic
D1232
DECT
Expansion Unit
Connectors
DECT
AC Adapter (KX-A277E)
1. Loosen the two screws on the cover 3. Hook the cabinet on the main unit and slide
plate. Insert your fingers into the slits the cabinet to the left until it is secured.
to remove the cover plate(s).
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
Panasonic
Slit
4. Loosen the outside screw and slide the
Slit cover to the right.
Panaso
nic
Panasonic
Inside screw
Panasonic
Panasonic
6-1. Insert the wires of the 4-conductor wiring cord into the holes
in the plug to connect pins “D1”, “D2”, “V1” and “V2”.
D1: Data 1 V1: Voltage +
D2: Data 2 V2: Voltage –
Press the transparent part into the black part.
Insert the other end of the wires into the modular plug.
Note: Do not peel off the wire coating. Insert the wires all the way.
2
1
6-2. Insert the 4-pin plug into a cell station jack on the unit, and
attach the ferrite core (included) to the plug cord.
KX-TD144 KX-TD146
CS CS
no. no. D1
D1
V1
2 V1 6 V2
V2
D2
D2
5
C C
S S
IN IN
F F 6C
S 4
3
1 2
P
an P
1
an
as as
on on
ic ic
5 cm
Ferrite Core
To the Cell Station Roll the cord once around
the ferrite core and close
Connect the ground terminal to ground.
the core.
Note: If other expansion units are
Note: Put it in the cabinet
installed, the frame ground connection
when closing the cabinet cover.
is required for only one unit.
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Ferrite Core
Roll the cord once
around the ferrite core
15 cm
and close the core.
6-4. Survey the site for the Cell Station by testing the radio signal.
Refer to Section 8.2.5, “ Site Survey.”
C
S
IN
F
P
an
as
Programming References
Section 8.4, DECT PS System Programming
[650] PS Registration
[653] PS Extension Name Set
[671] PS Extension Number Set
[672] PS Password Set
[681] PS Radio System ID Reference
7-1. Insert the required telephone wires into the holes in the plug.
Press the transparent part into the black part.
Note: Do not peel off the wire coating. Insert the wires all the way.
2
1
4-pin plug
D1 D1
T T
R R
D2 D2
Jack
D1 no.
C
S T
IN
F R
20
D2 (28)
19
(27)
18
(26)
P
an
as
on
17
ic
(25)
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic
Check the Cell Station ID number. (See pages 8-19 and 8-20.)
Assign the Cell Station ID number to the PS. (See page 8-21.)
Unplug the cable from the Cell Station. (See page 8-22.)
Survey the site using the PS. (See pages 25 through 27.)
Input Format
1. In the Main Menu Display
Enter 2 and press the ENTER key to select “System Data
Programming(INTERACTIVE)”.
KX-TD144 KX-TD146
CS 012
CS 08
EXPI 2 EXPII 2
CS 07 CS INF
CS 07 CS INF
CS 02 CS 06
EXPI 1 EXPII 1
CS INF CS INF
CS 01
Panasonic
CS 01 Panasonic
Master Master
CS ID1=
→
4. Press (Talk). Example
CS ID1=
→
5. Enter the Cell Station ID number. Example
• To enter letters, press the following but-
CS ID1=
A (Hold) D (Function) →0123456789
B OK (OK) E (Redial)
C (Book) F (Flash)
tons.
Example
6. Press (Talk).
CS NO?(1-8)
• The assignment is completed.
After assigning the Cell Station ID number to the PS, unplug the
cable from the Cell Station once.
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
After unplugging the Cell Station once, set the DIP-Switch as fol-
lows.
DIP-Switch
Channel Number Switch Radio Signal
(Default: Channel 0) Test Switch
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
ON
OFF
0
0
1 2 3 4 5 6
Note • To see the signal strength of more than one Cell Station, the channel
for each Cell Station needs to be set.
• Up to eight Cell Stations can be surveyed at the same time. If more
than one Cell Station is in Radio Signal Test mode, each DIP-Switch
channel must be different.
2. Press .
• To survey other slots, scroll by
pressing (Next) or (Previous).
• To survey other channels, enter the chan-
nel number (0 through 9).
Example:
When synchronised When not synchronised
RECOMMENDATION
Example
3-3. Enter the log number
(0 through 9).
LOG NO.?(0-9) 0
FLASH=ALL CLR
Example
3-4. Press (Talk).
LOG NO.?(0-9) 0
• The result is recorded. STORED
Note • The results of measurement for the 24 slots on the channel are saved
each time a channel is set. If the same channel is set, the new results
override the previous ones. Therefore, a measurement of 10 channels x
24 slots in total can be made.
• If correct results cannot be obtained (e.g., there are many error coun-
ters), change the allocation of the Cell Station and repeat the site sur-
vey to select the best location.
• When a slot is synchronised in step 2 (“SYNC” is displayed), the other
slots in the same channel show “OTHER”.
• Please do not use several PSs for the test simultaneously. This may
cause interference problems, so that the test may not be executed prop-
erly.
2. Press .
RESULT OF SCAN
LOG NO.?(0-9)
2. Switch the Radio Signal Test Switch of the Cell Station from
ON to OFF.
1
ON
OFF
0
1 2 3 4 5 6
3. Connect the cable from the Cell Station Interface Unit to the
Cell Station, and pass the cord through the groove on the unit.
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Conditions • The KX-TD816 system supports up to 16 PSs and the KX-TD1232 sys-
tem supports up to 64 PSs.
• To support the PSs, a Cell Station Interface Unit (KX-TD144 / KX-
TD146) and a Cell Station (KX-TD142) are required.
• Up to four calls can be made at the same time in the range.
• If you do not want your PS to ring, you can select the VIBRATION fea-
ture, which is convenient while in a meeting, etc.
• The following procedures are required to utilise a PS:
1) Assign the radio system ID in program [680] “Cell Station Number
Assignment for Master CS.”
2) Reset the system.
3) Register a PS in program [650] “PS Registration.”
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[109] Expansion Card / Unit Type
Section 8.4, DECT PS System Programming
[020] PS Flexible CO Button Assignment
[650] PS Registration
[651] PS Termination
[653] PS Extension Name Set
[654] SXDP Assignment
[655] PS Budget Management
[656] PS Charge Verification Assignment
[657] PS Class of Service
[658] PS Extension Group Assignment
[659]–[660] PS DIL 1:N Extension — Day / Night
[661]–[662] PS Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
[663]–[664] PS Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
[665] PS Voice Mail Access Codes
[667] PS Extension Connection Assignment
[668] PS Data Line Security
[671] PS Extension Number Set
[672] PS Password Set
[673] PS CLIP / COLP Number Assignment
[674]–[675] PS Extension Intercept Routing — Day / Night
[676] PS Incoming Call Display
[677] PS Itemized Code Set
[680] Cell Station Number Assignment for Master CS
[681] PS Radio System ID Reference
[682] Radio Information Data Clear
TITLE PS CONDITION
Budget Management • Program [655], “PS Budget Management,” is required to assign the
charge limit of a call on a PS basis.
Button, Flexible • Program [020], “PS Flexible Button Assignment,” is used to deter-
mine the use of the PS flexible buttons.
Calling / Connected Line • Program [673], “PS CLIP / COLP Number Assignment,” is required
Identification Presentation to assign the CLIP / COLP number for each PS.
(CLIP / COLP)
Class of Service (COS) • Program [657], “PS Class of Service,” is required for assigning each
PS a Class of Service (COS).
CO Incoming Call • The display type for a PS when an incoming call is received can be
Information Display selected by program [676], “PS Incoming Call Display.”
Data Line Security • Data Line Security for a PS can be set or cancelled by program [668],
“PS Data Line Security.”
Direct In Lines (DIL) • A PS can be assigned as the DIL 1:N destination. In this case, program
[659]–[660], “PS DIL 1:N Extension — Day / Night,” is required.
• Intercept Routing applies to DIL 1:1. When the line is busy, the PS is
out of range or the PS power switch is OFF.
Flexible Numbering • In addition to current flexible numbering, the feature number for the
Super EXtra Device Port (SXDP) can be assigned. For details, refer to
the program [100], “Flexible Numbering.”
Handset / Headset • To use a headset with your PS, just connect the user-supplied headset
Selection to the PS. Moreover, it is possible to answer calls without lifting up
the PS or pressing any key. In this case, PS Programming, “Automatic
Answer Mode Set,” is required to select the answering mode.
Handsfree Answerback • This feature allows PS users to answer calls, all or intercom, without
lifting up the PS or pressing any key only when the user-supplied
headset is connected to the PS. If the PS user receives a call in this
mode, a handsfree conversation is established immediately after the
user hears beep tone and the caller hears a confirmation tone.
PS Programming, “Automatic Answer Mode Set,” is required to
select the answering mode.
Intercept Routing • Program [674]–[675], “PS Extension Intercept Routing — Day / Night,”
is required for assigning the Intercept Routing destination for each PS.
• The possible destinations of intercepted calls are as follows.
1) a wired extension
2) an external pager
A PS cannot be a destination.
Least Cost Routing (LCR) • Program [677], “PS Itemized Code Set” is required for assigning the
itemized code for each PS.
LED Indication, CO Line • The LED indicators of the Flexible CO buttons do not work while on-
hook.
Module Expansion • In addition to the current expansion unit, a Cell Station Interface Unit
(KX-TD144 / KX-TD146) can be installed to the system.
One KX-TD144 supports up to two Cell Stations (KX-TD142). And
one KX-TD146 supports up to six Cell Stations. One KX-TD144 /
KX-TD146 can be installed to the KX-TD816, and up to two KX-
TD144s / KX-TD146s can be installed to the KX-TD1232.
Night Service • PS users cannot confirm the current mode on the display.
Paging — All / Group • PS users can page and answer a page, which is being announced over
a nearby wired proprietary telephone or external pager. However, you
cannot be directly paged at the PS.
Pulse to Tone Conversion • The Tone button can be activated by selecting it on the display. Refer
to “Selecting the Feature Button on the Display” in the User Manual.
User Programming • Program [020], “PS Flexible Button Assignment,” can also be
(Manager Programming) changed by any display proprietary telephone user in the system.
Voice Mail Integration • A mailbox number can be assigned for each PS in program [665], “PS
Voice Mail Access Codes.”
Call Directory
Description PS users can store names and/or phone numbers in the directory.
A stored number is dialled out by selecting a name or phone num-
ber in the directory.
There are four types of directory features, including one PS directo-
ry and three PBX directories, as follows.
PS Dialling Directory:
PS users can make an outside call by selecting privately-assigned
names and phone numbers (100 max.).
PBX System Speed Dialling Directory:
PS users can make a call via the system by selecting system-
assigned names and phone numbers (500 max.).
PBX Extension Dialling Directory:
PS users can make a call via the system by selecting system-
assigned extension names.
PBX Station Speed Dialling Directory:
PS users can make a call via the system by selecting privately-
assigned names and phone numbers (10 max.).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[001] System Speed Dialling Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialling Name Set
[003] Extension Number Set
[004] Extension Name Set
DECT Portable Station – Customising Your PS............User Manual,
PS Programming – Directory Lock Control
PS Programming
Description PS users can change the default settings of PS Programming
according to their needs.
There are two passwords, a PS Programming password and System
Lock password, to enter into the programming mode. The PS
Programming password is programmed in PS Programming, and
the System Lock password is programmed in the initial PS registra-
tion or in PS Programming. The displayed PS programming menu
differs depending on the password level as follows.
Level 0: A password is not required.
Level 1: A PS Programming password is required.
Level 2: A System Lock password is required.
The combination of the passwords are as follows.
Conditions • If only one DECT system is connected, the “DECT System Selection”
display will not appear.
• If your PS is not registered, the “DECT System Selection” and “PS
Registration Cancellation” displays will not appear.
Programming References
Section 8.4, System Programming
[650] PS Registration
DECT Portable Station – Customising Your PS............User Manual,
PS Programming
Conditions • This feature can only be set from a PS. The wired telephone can enable
or disable this feature in program [654] “SXDP Assignment” (default:
enable).
• When the paralleled wired telephone receives a call, both the wired tele-
phone and PS will ring. If either of the paralleled telephones is busy, it
is not possible to make a call from the other telephone.
• Types of incoming calls which are received while in SXDP mode are:
Outside calls – DIL 1:1; Intercept Routing; DDI; MSN; IRNA
Intercom calls – Extension; Transfer
Other type of calls will not be sent to the PS.
• When you receive a call reaching the paired telephone by the PS or
when making a call from a PS, the display message of the wired tele-
phone is shown on the calling or called party’s display (e.g., extension
number and name).
• Paralleled telephones can call each other or transfer a call by dialling
their own extension number.
• If a PS receives a call by its own extension number, it works as usual.
FEATURE CONDITION
Call Log, Outgoing • The memory of Call Log is used together. The call logged by
the wired telephone can be used by the PS and vice versa.
Budget Management • The call charge of the PS is included with the wired tele-
phone. If the pre-assigned limit is reached, both telephones
cannot make further calls without authorisation.
Call Forwarding • Calls to the wired telephone due to the setting of the wired
telephone.
• The Call Forwarding – All feature for the wired telephone
can be set from a PS so that all incoming calls to the wired
telephone will be forwarded to the desired destination.
Class of Service (COS) • The COS level of the wired telephone becomes available.
Do Not Disturb (DND) • Calls to the wired telephone due to the setting of the wired
telephone.
Electronic Station Lockout • The PS can make a call even if the wired telephone is locked.
Pickup Dialling • The memory of the Pickup Dialling exists individually.
Redial, Saved Number • The memory of the Saved Number Redial of the wired tele-
phone cannot be used by the PS.
Station Speed Dialling • The memory of the Station Speed Dialling (PS Dialling
(PS Dialling Directory) Directory) exists individually.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[100] Flexible Numbering, Super extra device port (SXDP)
Section 8.4, System Programming
[654] SXDP Assignment
Note For location identification of the Cell Station Interface Unit (KX-TD144 /
KX-TD146), refer to program [109], “Expansion Card/Unit Type,” in
Section 4. Then select “E” for the Cell Station Interface Unit (KX-
TD144 / KX-TD146) with the KX-TD816, or “E1” or “E2” with the KX-
TD1232. This type is the same for an 8-Station Line Unit (KX-TD170).
Description Used to determine how the flexible CO buttons are used on PSs.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
6. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
2. Enter 2.
3. Press STORE.
4. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
• Display (if enabled): Executing
Continue programming from step 6 with a PS within five minutes.
(With a PS)
6. Slide the Power switch ON.
7. Press the Function button.
Display: KEY
10. Press the Book button repeatedly until the display below
appears.
Display: REGISTRATION
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
4. Press STORE.
Display: Executing
7. Press END.
Display: Delete?
6. Press STORE.
9. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Description Disables or enables the Super EXtra Device Port (SXDP) feature
for wired extensions.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for the jack 01.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is activated.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
7. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all PSs to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has
the lowest PS registration number.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
5. Press .
6. Enter a secondary COS number.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
7. Press STORE.
8. To program another PS, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT
and the desired PS registration number.
9. Repeat steps 4 through 8.
10. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
Description A DIL 1:N line can be assigned to call more than one extension.
All incoming calls from the programmed CO lines are directed to
the specified PSs. This program assigns the PSs for each CO line
in both the day and night modes.
Programming 1. Enter a program address (659 for day or 660 for night).
Display example: PS DIL 1:N Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
6. Press STORE.
9. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key in step 4. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for ]CO line 01.
• When you change the PS registration number by pressing NEXT or
PREV, the CO line number will not changed.
<Example> PS01:CO06.....Press NEXT.....PS02:CO06
Programming 1. Enter a program address (661 for day or 662 for night).
Display example: PS CO Out Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
6. Press STORE.
9. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all PSs or all CO lines to one selection, press the key in
step 3 or 4. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for
CO line 01 or the PS which has the lowest PS registration number.
• To not assign a CO line for a PS, press CLEAR in step 4.
• When you change the PS registration number by pressing NEXT or
PREV, the CO line number will not changed.
<Example> PS01:CO06.....Press NEXT.....PS02:CO06
Description These programs assign which PSs will ring when a doorphone call
is received during the day and night modes. Programmed PSs are
also allowed to open the door.
Programming 1. Enter a program address (663 for day or 664 for night).
Display example: PS DPH in Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another PS, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT
and the desired PS registration number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD1232, Doorphone 1 and 2 are installed in the Master
System and 3 and 4 in the Slave, if available.
• You can enter up to two (KX-TD816) or up to four (KX-TD1232)
doorphone numbers for each extension.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another PS, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT
and the desired PS registration number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Conditions • The system supports a maximum of eight jacks (16 jacks during System
Connection) for connection to a Voice Processing System as the Voice
Mail or Automated Attendant ports.
• Each mailbox number has a maximum of 16 digits, consisting of 0
through 9, , # and PAUSE.
• To display parts of the mailbox number which have scrolled off the
display, press or .
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all PSs to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has
the lowest PS registration number.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all PSs to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has
the lowest PS registration number.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new name.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • If you modify the PS password, re-register the PS to the system in order
to use the password.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Description Sets the Intercept Routing destination for each PS in both day and
night modes.
Programming 1. Enter a program address (674 for day or 675 for night).
Display example: PS Intercept Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another PS, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT
and the desired PS registration number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Conditions • You can set the extension numbers in programs [650] “PS
Registration,” [671] “PS Extension Number Set,” [003] “Extension
Number Set,” [127] “Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment,” [130]
“Phantom Extension Number” and also floating numbers of the external
ringer, hunting groups, and pagers in program [813] “Floating Number
Assignment.”
• To assign all PSs to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for PS 01.
• When “Disable” is selected, Intercept Routing is provided according to
the assignment in program [409-410].
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
Conditions • To assign all PSs to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has
the lowest PS registration number.
• If the receiving call is in the 1:N status, the display only shows “CO
Line.”
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Description Assigns the cell station number which is used for the master CS.
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: M-CS:Not Stored
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • For changing the assignment of the Master CS, the assigned system
programming data or radio information data should be cleared in
program [862] “Radio Information Data Clear.” In this case, the re-
registration of PSs is essential.
• CSs do not work without this assignment.
• The Master CS must support GAP. In case a CS doesn’t support GAP,
the operation under this CS is not guaranteed (except with a proprietary
telephone).
2. Press NEXT.
Before a Radio System ID is assigned;
Display: Not Stored
Display: 00123456
3. Press END.
Conditions • The radio system ID must be assigned to support the DECT system
(KX-TD144 or KX-TD146 / KX-TD142). Otherwise, the wired
extension port of the KX-TD144 can be used.
• If the radio system ID is not assigned properly, the registered PS may
not work properly.
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Clear OK?
3. Press STORE.
4. Press END.
168mm
Additional Information
for the KX-TD184 E
If you purchase the E&M (TIE) Line Unit (KX-TD184 E),
please read this leaflet.
In this manual, the last letter of each model number is omitted. The model number of
your unit is found on the label affixed to the unit.
MODEL NO. – – – – –
(label)
Introduction
E&M (TIE) Line Unit (KX-TD184)
Four E&M (TIE) lines can be connected.
This unit can be installed per system.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
D816
DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic
Panasonic
Specifications
(1) E&M (TIE) Line Types................................. Type 5 only
(2) Transmission ................................................. 2-wire or 4-wire voice path (Programmable)
(Note) Maximum cabling distance of the E&M line cord (twisted cable):
22 AWG: Under 9.6 km
(3) Transmission levels
2-wire voice path........................................... -3 db (transmit/receive)
4-wire voice path........................................... -3 db normal (transmit/receive)
Programmable (-6 db, -3 db, 0 db, +3 db)
(4) Signalling DTMF or Pulse
(5) E lead Battery -48 VDC, 20 mA to ground (max.)
Sensitivity 5 mA or 2000 Ω to ground (max.)
(min.)
(6) M lead Available current : 30mA (max.)
Available voltage: ±100V (max.)
Note:
After assigning a KX-TD184 in the system programming [109], turn the Power Switch off and on again.
Otherwise the previous setting will be maintained.
2
Contents
Features..................................................................................................4
Installation ...........................................................................................13
System Programming .........................................................................20
[100] Flexible Numbering....................................................................20
[109] Expansion Unit Type ..................................................................21
[154] PBX Code...................................................................................23
[155] E&M Signal Assignment............................................................24
[220] TIE First / Inter Digit Time ........................................................25
[340] TIE Line Routing Table..............................................................26
[341] TIE Modify Removed / Added Digit .........................................28
[430] TIE Table Number Assignment..................................................29
[431] TIE Incoming Assignment .........................................................30
[432] TIE Outgoing Assignment..........................................................31
[433] TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit ....................................32
[434] TIE Added Number ....................................................................33
[435] TIE Wink Time Out Assignment................................................34
[452] CO-to-TIE Transfer ....................................................................35
[453] TIE-to-CO Transfer ....................................................................36
[454] TIE-to-TIE Transfer ...................................................................37
[455] TIE Security Type ......................................................................38
[456] Line Hunting Sequence ..............................................................39
[457] Voice Path Type..........................................................................40
[458] Voice Level (Transmit)...............................................................41
[459] Voice Level (Receive) ................................................................42
[460] TIE Receive Dial ........................................................................43
[811] TIE User Codes ..........................................................................44
[990] System Additional Information, Area 08 (Bit 03)......................45
Programming Tables...........................................................................46
3
Features
System Explanation
1. Making a TIE Call
One of the following two methods can be used to make a TIE call.
1.1 Extension Number method
Dial the [Extension Number] only to make a TIE call.
<Example>
KX-TD816/1232 Other PBX
TIE Line
E&M E&M
2011
Explanation
To use this method, it is necessary to change the first one or two
digits of extension numbers of either PBX to avoid having the
same extension number.
1. Extension 1011 dials extension number “2011”.
2. Extension 1011 is connected to extension “2011” of the other
PBX.
4
Features
1.2 PBX Code method
Dial the [TIE Line Access Code] [PBX Code] [Extension
Number] to make a TIE call.
<Example>
KX-TD816/1232 Other PBX
TIE Line
E&M E&M
7-952-1011
PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952
Explanation
To use this method, it is necessary to have the code for each PBX
in order to identify the location of an extension.
1. Extension 1011 dials TIE line access code “7”, PBX code
“952” and extension number “1011”.
2. Extension 1011 is connected to extension 1011 of the other
PBX which has PBX code “952”.
5
Features
2. TIE Line and CO Line Connection
To connect the TIE line with a CO line, the following patterns are
available.
2.1 CO-to-TIE Transfer
The system transfers incoming outside calls to the other PBX
through the TIE line.
Explanation
The outside caller dials the phone number, and the call is
forwarded or transferred to extension 1011 of the other PBX which
has PBX code “952”.
Note: Setting the destination of Call Forwarding to the TIE line is
the same as Call Forwarding to a CO Line.
Transferring a call to the TIE line is the same as a Call
Transfer to a CO Line.
6
Features
Explanation
Extension 1011 dials as follows:
1. TIE line access code “7”, PBX code “952” and CO line access
code “9”. A special dial tone is heard.
2. The TIE user code (if required) and desired phone number.
Extension 1011 is connected to the desired outside party through
the other PBX which has PBX code “952”.
Note: The TIE user code (assigned in program [811]) is required
when the CO line security mode is selected in program
[455].
7
Features
Explanation
Extension 1011 dials as follows:
1. TIE line access code “7”, PBX code “952” and extension
number “1011”.
2. The call is forwarded or transferred by extension 1011 of the
other PBX, which has PBX code “952”, to the designated CO
line.
Programming Example
<Example>
Your system is PBX-1 and there are four PBXs in your TIE line
network. To identify the CO line route as illustrated below, you
should make the following routing table.
c)2xx
→
TRG 6 →
TRG 7
b) 953-xxxx
If you dial:
a) 7-952-xxxx TRG 5 →
b) 7-953-xxxx
Ext. 1xxx a) 952-xxxx Ext. xxxx
c) 2xx PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952
(7: TIE line access code)
PBX-1 PBX-3
8
Features
TIE Line Routing Table of PBX-1
Location PBX Code Removed Added CO Line Group Hunt Sequence
No. / Ext. No. Digit Digit 01 02 03 04 05
01 952 0 5 6
02 953 0 6 5
03 2xx 0 7
Explanation
Location 01: The hunt sequence by dialling [7+PBX Code 952]:
The 1st route — CO line group (TRG) 5
The 2nd route — CO line group (TRG) 6
Location 02: The hunt sequence by dialling [7+PBX Code 953]:
The 1st route — CO line group (TRG) 6
The 2nd route — CO line group (TRG) 5
Location 03: The hunt sequence by dialling [Ext.no. 2xx]:
The 1st route — CO line group (TRG) 7
If the received number does not match the PBX Code, the system
checks the number in the routing table. If it is found, the system
automatically sends the number to the corresponding PBX.
For example, if PBX-1 receives the number “952-xxxx” from
PBX-4, PBX-1 automatically sends the number through CO line
group 5.
9
Features
Your telephone Dialling Method Dial Modification
SLT Extension no. Enable
TIE line access code + (PBX code) + Extension no. Enable
TIE line access code + PBX code (+ Account code) + Enable
Phone no.
Select CO line group + (PBX code) + Extension no. Disable
Select CO line group + PBX code (+ Account code) + Disable
Phone no.
In addition to the methods above, the system can use the TIE line
for sending CO line access code “9” through the other PBX. When
you dial the CO line access code and the CO line is busy, the
system automatically sends CO line access code “9” to a TIE line
so that you can access the CO line through the other PBX. This is
enabled by program [990] “System Additional Information, Area
08 (Bit 03)”.
Is the dialled number identified with the stored No Not treated as a TIE
numbers? (Checks in program [100]) call.
Yes:
TIE line access code – 7
Other PBX extension no – de
Yes
NG
Modifies the dialled number if a removed or added
Reorder tone
number is assigned. (Checks in program [341])
10
Features
Receiving a Call through a TIE Line
Yes
Modifies the dialed number if a removed or added Analyses the number Incorrect
number is assigned. (Checks in programs [430–435]) of incoming call
Correct
abcxxxx dexx xxxx Line Access
Code
Checks the PBX code “abc”. Found in a TIE Line Routing Extension no. Seize the Co
(Checks in program [154]) Table. (Checks in program [340]) Line
xxxx
Ext. no. Line access
code Modifies the dialed number if a
removed or added number is
Calls an Checks the code assigned. (Checks in program [341])
extension. in program [100].
No
Is the TIE-to-CO Transfer Does the The corresponding extension does not
No
(Checks in program [453]) or corresponding exist. (Checks in program [220])
TIE-to-TIE Transfer (Checks in extension exist?
program [454]) enabled?
Yes
Enable
Did you employ the CO line security Is the corresponding 1.When the IRNA is set, the call is
mode? (Checks in program [455]) extension idle? routed to IRNA.
2.When the IRNA is not set, a busy
No Yes Yes No tone or reorder tone is heard.
Is a TIE user code received?
(Programs in program [811]) No
• Call Waiting
Yes • 1.When the IRNA is set, the call is
routed to IRNA.
Routes to a CO or TIE line. Calls an extension. (A 2.When the IRNA is not set, a busy
(ARS / Local / TRG routing) ringback tone is sent.) tone or reorder tone is heard.
11
Features
Conditions • It is possible to program the E&M signal, voice path type and voice
level (transmit / receive) of the E&M Line Unit by system
programming. For details about the E&M signal, voice path type and
voice level, refer to “Installation” in this manual.
• The FLASH button does not function as the disconnection key.
• The ability to perform Call Forwarding/Call Transfer to TIE line is
determined on a Class of Service basis. See programs [503] and [504].
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[100] Flexible Numbering
[109] Expansion Unit Type
[154] PBX Code
[155] E&M Signal Assignment
[220] TIE First / Inter Digit Time
[340] TIE Line Routing Table
[341] TIE Modify Removed / Added Digit
[430] TIE Table Number Assignment
[431] TIE Incoming Assignment
[432] TIE Outgoing Assignment
[433] TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit
[434] TIE Added Number
[435] TIE Wink Time Out Assignment
[452] CO-to-TIE Transfer
[453] TIE-to-CO Transfer
[454] TIE-to-TIE Transfer
[455] TIE Security Type
[456] Line Hunt Sequence
[457] Voice Path Type
[458] Voice Level (Transmit)
[459] Voice Level (Receive)
[460] TIE Receive Dial
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line
[811] TIE User Codes
[990] System Additional Information, Area 08 (Bit 03)
12
Installation
Installation Installing one unit to the system allows four E&M (TIE) lines to be
connected to CO lines 05 through 08 for the KX-TD816, or CO
lines 09 through 12 or 21 through 24 for the KX-TD1232. This
unit can be installed to any of the expansion areas provided on the
front of the system.
For unit installation, refer to the procedure “Section 2.4.6 Installing
Expansion Unit (KX-TD170/KX-TD180/KX-TD280/KX-TD286)”
in the main Installation Manual. Steps 1 through 5 and 7 through
10 of the installation procedure are the same as for other expansion
units. Step 6 is different for each unit. Please follow the
instructions below for the installation of this unit.
Notes • System Programming [109] Expansion Unit Type is required for
expansion unit location identification.
■ If a KX-TD184 is to be installed:
6-1. The 50-pin connector (Jack) on the Expansion Unit has two
hook-pins. Take out the screw, and remove the hook-pin.
Screw
4
E
&
M
D
IG
IT
A
L
S
U
P
E
R
H
Y
B
R
ID
S
Y
S
T
E
M
50-pin
Connector
Hook-pins
13
Installation
Notes • When connecting a connector of the type shown below, unscrew the
lower hook-pin too. Then drive both accessory screws.
4
Connector type
E
&
M
D
IG
50-pin (Amphenol 57JE
IT
25 1
50 26
P
an
as
on
ic
14
6-3. To attach the Amphenol 57JE type (Plug) to the connector,
drive the accessory screw at the upper part.
Fasten the accessory wire tie around the lower hook-pin and
the Amphenol 57JE type, as shown.
Notes • Be sure to secure the inside screw, or the unit may not work properly.
• For jack connection, please see “Cable Pin Number to Be Connected”
on the next page.
15
Installation
1 WHITE / BLUE T
26 BLUE / WHITE R
2 WHITE / ORANGE T1
27 ORANGE / WHITE R1
3 WHITE / GREEN NO.1 E Lead
28 GREEN / WHITE SG Lead
4 WHITE / BROWN SB Lead
29 BROWN / WHITE M1 Lead
5 WHITE / GRAY SG0
30 GRAY / WHITE M Lead only for Type 5
6 RED / BLUE T
31 BLUE / RED R
7 RED / ORANGE T1
32 ORANGE / RED R1
8 RED / GREEN E Lead
NO. 2
33 GREEN / RED SG Lead
9 RED / BROWN SB Lead
34 BROWN / RED M1 Lead
10 RED / GRAY SG0
35 GRAY / RED M Lead only for Type 5
11 BLACK / BLUE T
36 BLUE / BLACK R
12 BLACK / ORANGE T1
37 ORANGE / BLACK R1
13 BLACK / GREEN NO. 3 E Lead
38 GREEN / BLACK SG Lead
14 BLACK / BROWN SB Lead
39 BROWN / BLACK M1 Lead
15 BLACK / GREY SG0
40 GRAY / BLACK M Lead only for Type 5
16 YELLOW / BLUE T
41 BLUE / YELLOW R
17 YELLOW / ORANGE T1
42 ORANGE / YELLOW R1
18 YELLOW / GREEN E Lead
NO. 4
43 GREEN / YELLOW SG Lead
19 YELLOW / BROWN SB Lead
44 BROWN / YELLOW M1 Lead
20 YELLOW / GRAY SG0
45 GRAY / YELLOW M Lead only for Type 5
16
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be Connected (E&M Line)
• E&M Line Wiring
50-pin
Connector Block Terminal
26 1 1
1 2 2
27 3 3
2 4 4
28 5 5
E&M Line 1
3 6 6
29 7 7
4 8 8
30 9 9
5
31 11 11
6 12 12
Bridging Clips
T T
R R
E E
SG SG
M1 M1
SB SB
T T
R R
T1 T1
R1 R1
E E
SG SG
M1 M1
SB SB
17
Installation
■ Connecting to the E&M Central Office
(1) 2-wire voice path
T
R
-48V E
M
-48V
GROUND GROUND
T
Voice Voice
Transmit R
Receive
T1
Voice Voice
Receive R1 Transmit
E
-48V
M
-48V
GROUND GROUND
18
■ E&M Sequences
You can choose one of the following E&M sequences by System
Programming [155] “E&M Signal Assignment”.
∼
E-Wire
Wink
M-Wire
E-Wire
ACK
M-Wire
(Answer signal)
E-Wire
ACK
M-Wire
19
100 System Programming
Flexible Numbering
Description Assigns the TIE line access code and the leading one or two digits
of the other PBX extension numbers.
Default
Number Feature Default
86 TIE line access code None
87 Other PBX Extension 01 None
88 Other PBX Extension 02 None
89 Other PBX Extension 03 None
90 Other PBX Extension 04 None
91 Other PBX Extension 05 None
92 Other PBX Extension 06 None
93 Other PBX Extension 07 None
94 Other PBX Extension 08 None
95 Other PBX Extension 09 None
96 Other PBX Extension 10 None
97 Other PBX Extension 11 None
98 Other PBX Extension 12 None
99 Other PBX Extension 13 None
100 Other PBX Extension 14 None
101 Other PBX Extension 15 None
102 Other PBX Extension 16 None
For the programming sequence and more information, refer to the program [100] “Flexible
Numbering” in the main Installation Manual.
20
System Programming 109
Expansion Unit Type
Selection KX-TD816
• Areas 1; 2; 3 = 1 (Inside the system) : C (4CO) / S (2SO)
2; 3(Expansion Area) :
C (4CO) / S (2SO) / S2 (6SO) / S3 (1PRI)/
E (EXT) / EM (4E&M)
KX-TD1232
• Master / Slave
• Areas 1; 2; 3;4 = 1 (Inside the system) : C (8CO) / S (4SO)
2; 3; 4 (Expansion Area) :
C (4CO) / S (2SO) / S2 (6SO) / S3 (1PRI) /
E1 (EXT1) / E2 (EXT2) / EM (4E&M)
Default KX-TD816: C; C; E
KX-TD1232: Master and Slave – C; C; E1; E2
Programming KX-TD816
1. Enter 109.
Display: Expansion Card
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Mast.: C; C ;E
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
KX-TD1232
1. Enter 109.
Display: Expansion Card
21
109 System Programming
Expansion Unit Type (contd.)
4. Press .
7. Press STORE.
If only one system is in operation, go to step 8.
Conditions • When starting the system for the first time or performing System Data
Clear, the application for location will use practical installation instead
of the system default setting.
• For KX-TD816, there is one expansion area inside the system, area 1,
and there are two expansion areas on the system, areas 2 and 3 from
bottom to top.
• For KX-TD1232, there is one expansion area inside the system, area 1,
and there are three expansion areas on the system, area 2, 3 and 4 from
bottom to top.
• If the Slave system is out-of-service, skip steps 8 and 9.
• After changing the setting, to make your setting effective, turn the
Power Switch off and an again. Otherwise, the previous setting will be
maintained.
Note:
After assigning a KX-TD184 in this program register, turn the Power
Switch off and on again. Otherwise the previous setting will be
maintained.
22
System Programming 154
PBX Code
Description Assigns the PBX Code as your location number if the “PBX Code
method” is employed for Tie Line Network calling.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Code:
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
23
155 System Programming
E&M Signal Assignment
Description Assigns the E&M signal. There are three signals available:
Continuous: Continuous E&M (Wink/Immediate)
Pulsed Ans: Pulsed E&M with Answer Signal (Wink only)
Pulsed No Ans: Pulsed E&M without Answer Signal (Wink only)
Default Continuous
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Continuous
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • If you select “Pulsed Ans” or “Pulsed No Ans”, you must select “Wink”
as the start type.
24
System Programming 220
TIE First / Inter Digit Time
Description Assigns the maximum time allowed between the start of the dial
tone and the first digit dialled (First Digit Time), and between digits
(Inter Digit Time) on a TIE call. If an extension user fails to dial
any digits during this time, the DTMF receiver is released. This
timer applies until the Toll Restriction check is completed.
Default 5s
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time:5 sec
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
25
340 System Programming
TIE Line Routing Table
Description The TIE line routing table can be programmed. This table is
referenced by the system to identify the CO line route, when an
extension user makes a TIE call.
A routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the first
three digits (except the TIE line access code) of the dialled
number. This program assigns the TIE line access code and CO
line group hunt sequence.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?→
7. Press STORE.
26
System Programming 340
TIE Line Routing Table (contd.)
Conditions • Each TIE line access code has a maximum of three digits, consisting of
0 through 9 and . The character “ ” can be used as a wild card
character.
• Program [341] “TIE Removed / Added Digit” is used to modify the TIE
line access code.
27
341 System Programming
TIE Modify Removed / Added Digit
Description Assigns the removed and added digits of the TIE call received
digits. Digits are removed and added from the beginning of the
dialled digits.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?→
7. Press STORE.
28
System Programming 430
TIE Table Number Assignment
2. Press NEXT.
Display: TRK GRP NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions This is the first and basic programming for the TIE features. If this
assignment is changed, it affects other programming ([431] through
[435]).
29
431 System Programming
TIE Incoming Assignment
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Table NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions To assign all TIE tables to one selection, press the key in step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for TIE table
number 1.
30
System Programming 432
TIE Outgoing Assignment
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Table NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • The time the system waits for the confirmation wink signal can be
programmed in program [435] “TIE Wink Time Out Assignment”. The
system disconnects the CO line when the time-out time expires.
• To assign all TIE tables to one selection, press the key in step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for TIE table
number 1.
31
433 System Programming
TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit
Description Assigns the removed digits of the received and TIE subscriber
numbers to each TIE table. Digits are removed from the beginning
of the received digits.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Table NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
32
System Programming 434
TIE Added Number
Description Assigns the added number to the TIE subscriber number which is
determined in program [433] “TIE Subscriber Number Removed
Digit”. This makes the final number which serves as the extension
number. Note that digits are inserted at the beginning of the
number.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Table NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
33
435 System Programming
TIE Wink Time Out Assignment
Description The TIE outgoing method can be set to the wink mode in program
[432] “TIE Outgoing Assignment”. This program sets the time the
system waits for the confirmation wink signal after a CO line is
seized depending on your central office service. The system
disconnects the CO line when the time-out expires.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Table NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
34
System Programming 452
CO-to-TIE Transfer
2. Press NEXT.
Display: TRK GRP NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions None
35
453 System Programming
TIE-to-CO Transfer
2. Press NEXT.
Display: TRK GRP NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions None
36
System Programming 454
TIE-to-TIE Transfer
2. Press NEXT.
Display: TRK GRP NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions None
37
455 System Programming
TIE Security Type
Description Assigns the security mode for TIE calls. There are two modes, Non
Security and Trunk Security (CO line security). Non Security
mode allows the caller to access a CO line without dialling a TIE
user code. Trunk Security mode requires the caller to enter a TIE
User Code assigned in program [811] “TIE User Codes” before
making a TIE call.
Default Non
2. Press NEXT.
Display: TRK GRP NO?→
5. Press STORE.
6. Press END.
Conditions None
38
System Programming 456
Line Hunting Sequence
Description Assigns the hunting sequence of idle lines, seizing from the
smallest to the largest line number or vice versa in a CO line group,
on a CO line group basis.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: TRK GRP NO?→
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions The default setting (Large → Small) may often cause a busy situation
between two PBXs, as the same line may be seized by both sides
simultaneously. In this case, we recommend changing the setting of
either PBX to Small → Large.
39
457 System Programming
Voice Path Type
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?→
5. Press STORE.
6. Press END.
Condition To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key in step 3.
40
System Programming 458
Voice Level (Transmit)
Description Assigns the transmitted voice level on a CO line port basis. This
program is valid only when the voice path type is set to “4 wire”.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?→
5. Press STORE.
6. Press END.
Conditions To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key in step 3.
41
459 System Programming
Voice Level (Receive)
Description Assigns the received voice level on a CO line basis. This program
is valid only when the voice path type is set to “4 wire”.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?→
5. Press STORE.
6. Press END.
Conditions To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key in step 3.
42
System Programming 460
TIE Receive Dial
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?→
5. Press STORE.
6. Press END.
Conditions To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key in step 3.
43
811 System Programming
TIE User Codes
Description Assigns the TIE User Codes and a Class of Service (COS) to each
code. The code COS determines the toll restriction level of the
TIE caller.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: User Code NO?→
7. Press STORE.
8. To program another user code, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired TIE user code number.
9. Repeat steps 4 through 8.
10. Press END.
Conditions • This setting is required if the Trunk (CO line) Security mode is selected
in programs [455] “TIE Security Type”.
• Each user code should be unique and composed of eight numerical
digits, 0 through 9.
• You cannot leave an entry empty.
44
System Programming 990
System Additional Information
Description Bit 03 in Area 8 gives additional information about the TIE line
service.
Area 08
Display 1111111111111111
example
↓
Field number (03)
45
Programming Tables
[100] Flexible Numbering [154] PBX Code
Item Feature Default Parameter
Parameter :
86 TIE line access code – Default 1 – 3 digits, 0 – 9
87 Other PBX Extension 01 – Not stored
88 Other PBX Extension 02 –
89 Other PBX Extension 03 –
90 Other PBX Extension 04 – [155] E&M Signal Assignment
91 Other PBX Extension 05 –
Default Selection
92 Other PBX Extension 06 –
93 Other PBX Extension 07 – Continuous ✔
94 Other PBX Extension 08 – Pulsed Ans
95 Other PBX Extension 09 – Pulsed No Ans
96 Other PBX Extension 10 –
97 Other PBX Extension 11 –
98 Other PBX Extension 12 – [220] TIE First / Inter
99 Other PBX Extension 13 – Digit Time
100 Other PBX Extension 14 –
Default 5s
101 Other PBX Extension 15 –
Other PBX Extension 16 – Parameter
102
(Selection) No.86: 1 – 3 digits, No.87 – 102: 1 or 2 digits, Selection 3 – 30
(Valid Entries) 0 – 9
46
Programming Tables
[341]
[340] TIE Line Routing Table TIE Modify Removed / Added Digit
Parameter : TIE line access Parameter : CO line group hunt Parameter : Parameter : No. to be
Item : code (3 digits max.), sequence no. (1 – 8), 5 entries No. of digits to added (4 digits max.),
Location No. consisting of 0 – 9, . max., consisting of 0 – 9, . be deleted (0 – 4) consisting of 0 – 9.
Default: all Not Stored Not Stored 0 Not Stored
all locations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
47
Programming Tables
[430] TIE Table Number [452] CO-to-TIE [453] TIE-to-CO [454] TIE-to-TIE
Assignment Transfer Transfer Transfer
Item : CO Line Parameter: TIE Table No. Selection Selection Selection
Group No. (1 – 4) Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable
Default : all Not Stored ✔ ✔ ✔
all CO line groups
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
48
Programming Tables
[433] TIE Subscriber [434] [435] TIE Wink Time Out
Number Removed Digit TIE Added Number Assignment
Item : Parameter : Parameter :
TIE Table No. Selection:
No. of digits to be No. to be added
1 – 127 (✕ 64 msec)
deleted (0 – 6) (4 digits max.), consisting of 0 – 9.
Default: all 0 Not Stored 16
all tables
1
2
3
4
49
Programming Tables
[811] TIE User Codes
Default — — — — — — — — — — — — — 1 — —
Selection
<Selection>
Area 08 Bit 03
50
Panasonic Business Systems U.K.
Panasonic House, Willoughby Road, Bracknell,
Berkshire RG12 4FP
D816
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
User Manual
MODEL
KX-TD816E/KX-TD1232E
Panaso Panaso
nic nic
This system can connect digital and analogue This system can double the extension capacity
Panasonic proprietary telephones. Single line by connecting a proprietary telephone and a
devices such as a single line telephone, single line telephone. The proprietary
facsimile, cordless telephone, voice telephone can share the extension with
processing system, etc. can also be another single line telephone. Furthermore,
connected. D1232 you can connect a Panasonic digital
+ 1-4 proprietary telephone and D1232
Message
Message
Message
Message
Note:
In this manual, the suffix of each model number is omitted.
ii
Precaution
WARNING
THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVICED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
!! Hints Conditions
iii
Attention
• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices such as
fluorescent lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can interfere with the
performance of the unit.
• This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40˚C) and vibration,
and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc., into the vents or holes of this unit.
• If there is any trouble, disconnect the unit from the telephone line. Plug the telephone directly into
the telephone line. If the telephone operates properly, do not reconnect the unit to the line until the
problem has been repaired by an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre. If the telephone
does not operate properly, chances are that the problem is in the telephone system, and not in the
unit.
• Do not use benzine, thinner, or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet. Wipe it with a soft cloth.
The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the unit. You
should note the model number and the serial number of this unit in the space provided
and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase, to aid in identification in
the event of theft.
MODEL NO.:
SERIAL NO.:
DATE OF PURCHASE
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER’S ADDRESS
KX-TD816 KX-TD1232
iv
Safety Instructions
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to
reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
1. Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or
laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
2. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electric storm. There may be a
remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
3. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
4. Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a
fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions.
v
Table of Contents
1-2 Capacity
1-3 Names and Locations
1-4 Connection Example
1-5 Adding Another Telephone in Parallel
Overview
vi
Overview
3-2 Extension Control
3-2 Assigning Level of Service
3-3 Changing the Settings
3-4 System Control
3-4 Forwarding a Waiting Call
Operator 3-5
3-7
Day / Night Service
Turning on the External Background Music
Operation 3-8 Recording Outgoing Messages
3-9 Using the ANSWER / RELEASE Button
3-10 Hotel Use Features
Operation
3-15 Printing the System Working Report
Operator
4-14 Date and Time Set (000)
Your 4-15 System Speed Dialling Number Set (001)
Phone & System 4-16 System Speed Dialling Name Set (002)
4-23 Extension Number Set (003)
4-24 Extension Name Set (004)
Customising
5-4 Before Operating the DECT Portable Station
5-6 Operation
5-9 Making Calls
5-11 Receiving Calls
DECT 5-12 Redial
Portable Station 5-13 Holding a Call
5-15 Transferring a Call
5-16 Using the Call Directory
5-23 Using Your PS in Parallel with the Wired Telephone
5-25 Locking the Keypads
Portable Station
5-26 Selecting the Feature Button on the Display
5-27 Other Operations
DECT
5-34 Customising Your PS
5-34 Programming Information
5-35 PS Programming
5-40 PBX Programming
Appendix
6-2 Troubleshooting
6-7 Feature Number List
6-10 Directory
6-17 What is This Tone?
Appendix 6-20 Specifications
6-21 Quick Reference Card for a Single Line Telephone
7-2 Index
Index
Index
vii
Overview
This section briefly outlines your system.
Overview
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
D816
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
Panaso Panaso
nic nic
Capacity
You can connect the following number of outside lines, wired extensions and wireless extensions to your
system.
KX-TD1232
Outside line 0 38 38
Wired extension 16 32 64
Wireless extension* 0 64 64
D816
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
Panaso Panaso
nic nic
1-2 Overview
Names and Locations
Overview
KX-TD816
Paging Jack 1
External Music Jack 2
Serial Interface External Music Jack 1
(RS-232C) System Clear Switch
Reset Button
Ground Terminal Door Opener Jack
Doorphone Jack
Battery Adaptor
Connector
Panaso
nic
AC Inlet
Power Indicator
KX-TD1232
Inside view
D1232
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYST
Extension Connectors
EM
Paging Jack 2
Paging Jack 1
External Music Jack 2
External Music Jack 1
Serial Interface
System Clear Switch
(RS-232C)
Battery Adaptor Reset Button
Connector
Panaso
nic AC Inlet
Power Indicator
The two screws are attached to the front cover with springs so
that they will not be lost. A
Screw
2. Open the front cover in the direction of arrow A .
Screw
Overview 1-3
Connection Example
This diagram shows you a connection example including optional equipment.
D1232
D1232
DEGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
Battery Adaptor Car Battery
Panasonic
To AC Outlet
Panasonic
Panasonic
Cordless Phone
KX-T7431
Telephone Answering
Amplifier KX-T7436
Machine with Facsimile
External Speaker
KX-T7433
Voice Processing System
KX-T7440
DECT Portable Station
1-4 Overview
Adding Another Telephone in Parallel
Overview
A Panasonic proprietary telephone and a single line telephone, including a facsimile, cordless telephone,
etc., can be connected to one extension jack in parallel. There are two types of parallel connections.
Method 1
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
Master
socket
Overview 1-5
Adding Another Telephone in Parallel
Method 2
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
To single line
To system telephone
TO EMSS
Method 3
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
Master Master
socket socket
Single Line Telephone
Digital Proprietary Telephone
1-6 Overview
Operation
This chapter shows you how to operate each feature
step by step.
Read this chapter to become familiar with the many
Operation useful features of this system.
Before Operating the Telephones
What kind of telephone can be used?
You can use a single line telephone (SLT), such as a rotary pulse telephone or a Panasonic proprietary
telephone (PT) such as the KX-T7436. Operate the feature depending on the telephone you are using.
REDIAL
If you are using a Panasonic proprietary telephone with a special function button such as and/or
has a display (D – PT), you can follow the operation with the button or display messages
for easy programming.
If you use a large display telephone (e.g. KX-T7436), you can follow the displayed messages to operate
the features.
If your telephone does not have function buttons and/or a display, you may operate the unit by entering
a feature number instead. Follow the available operation with your telephone.
If you use a Console, you can use the buttons on the Console as the buttons on the connected
proprietary telephone.
!!• If you use a Panasonic proprietary telephone
which does not have function buttons, you may
change one of the unused flexible buttons to a
function button. Refer to “Customising the
Buttons” (Customising Your Phone & System).
Feature Numbers
To operate certain features, you need to enter specified feature numbers (and an additional parameter,
if required).
There are two types of feature numbers as follows:
• Flexible feature number
• Fixed feature number
Fixed feature numbers cannot be changed. However, you can change the flexible numbers to other
numbers for easier use. If you want to change the numbers, consult your dealer. In this manual, the
default numbers (factory installed) are used for operations.
A flexible number is shown as 0 (half-shaded key). Use the new programmed number if you have
changed the feature number. Write the new number in the “Feature Number List” (Appendix).
If you use a single line telephone which does not have the “ ” or “#” keys;
it is not possible to access features that have “ ” or “#” in their feature numbers.
Tones
You will hear various tones, during or after an operation, for confirmation. Refer to “What is This
Tone?” (Appendix).
2-2 Operation
Display
In this manual, you will see “the display ...”. This refers to the display of a Panasonic proprietary
telephone. If your telephone is not a Panasonic proprietary telephone with a display, the message will
not be displayed.
If you use a Panasonic display proprietary telephone, the display helps you confirm the settings. For
example, when you set the Do Not Disturb feature, the display shows “Do Not Disturb”. Some
proprietary telephones also give you easy access to operations. A message is displayed depending on
Operation
the operation. By pressing the corresponding button on the side or bottom of the display, or rotating a
jog dial, you can access the desired feature. For example, if turning background music on becomes
available, “BGM” will be shown on the display. Follow the instructions in each operation.
BGM
1 Jan
3:00PM
Extens
Featur ion STA
Call Lo es SYS Speed
BGM
Examples
The displays and the illustrations shown as examples are from a telephone connected to the
KX-TD1232.
Restrictions
Some features may be restricted at your extension under system programming. Consult your manager
or dealer.
Operation 2-3
Before Operating the Telephones
Icon Descriptions
The following icons show you the feature availability, notes and action to operate the features.
While operating the unit, you can easily refer to the Icons noted on the inside back cover of this manual.
This feature cannot be operated with a Seize an external line (One of the
(CO)
single line telephone. OR
following).
9 • Press the CO button.
OR • Dial automatic line access number 9.
8 1 • Dial outside line number 81 to 88.
Related Programming Title to
See “Programming”, if necessary. 8 8
Off-hook (One of the following). Press the Call button on the Doorphone.
• Lift the handset.
• Press the SP-PHONE button.
• Press the MONITOR button. (To start
talking, lift the handset.)
On-hook (One of the following). Press the Recall button on a single line
• Hang up. (Recall)
telephone.
• Press the SP-PHONE button.
• Press the MONITOR button.
extension no. Dial an extension number. You will hear a confirmation, dial or ring
tone.
C. Tone: confirmation tone
D. Tone: dial tone
R. Tone: ring tone
phone no. Dial the telephone number.
2-4 Operation
When You Use a Panasonic Proprietary Telephone
If you use a Panasonic proprietary telephone and the Console, they may have some of the useful
function buttons listed below. These buttons make operations simple. The illustrations may differ from
the buttons on your telephone.
ANSWER
ANSWER: Used to answer an incoming HOLD
HOLD: Used to place a call on hold.
call.
Operation
AUTO ANSWER / MUTE: Used to receive INTERCOM: Used to make or receive an
AUTO ANSWER
an incoming intercom call in the hands- INTERCOM
intercom call.
MUTE
free mode or mute the microphone during
a conversation.
MESSAGE: Used to leave a message
MESSAGE
waiting indication or call back the party
AUTO DIAL / STORE: Used for System who left the message waiting indication.
AUTO DIAL
Speed Dialling or storing program
STORE
changes. MODE: Used to shift the display to access
MODE
various features.
CO: Used to make or receive an outside
(CO)
call. A Loop-CO button supports all lines.
Pressing this button seizes an idle line MONITOR: Used for hands-free dialling.
automatically. (Button assignment is MONITOR
You can monitor the party’s voice hands-
required.) free.
Also used as the desired function
buttons. (Button assignment is required.)
(Only the CO “number” (e.g. 1, 2) may be PAUSE: Used to insert a pause during
shown on some telephones.) PAUSE
dialling. Used to enter the programming
mode instead of using the PROGRAM
Conference: Used to establish a three- button.
CONF party conversation.
PROGRAM: Used to enter and exit the
Programming mode.
DSS: Used to access the extension. PROGRAM
FWD/DND
Used to perform Call Forwarding or Do
Not Disturb.
SAVE: Used to store a dialled phone
Jog Dial: Used to adjust the volume and
number and redial.
the display contrast or select desired items (SAVE)
Operation 2-5
Before Operating the Telephones
If the term is in parentheses like (Account) in this
SELECT: Used to select the displayed
SELECT section, it means a flexible button has been made into
function or to call the displayed phone
an “Account” button.
number.
SHIFT
SHIFT: Used to alternate between the
subfunctions on the display.
SP-PHONE
Speakerphone: Used for the hands-free
operation.
Left Right
(counter-clockwise) (clockwise)
2-6 Operation
How to Follow the Steps
A sample operation is shown below.
Feature title
Operation
Calling Without a Restriction
PT / SLT Description
ACCNT
OR
(Account)
account code OR Operation steps
9 9
OR The description of the
Off-hook. 4 9 Enter account code Press # or dial 99.
(max. 10 digits). icons are explained
Press “ACCNT”,
Account or dial 49. on page 2-4 and the
inside back cover of
(CO)
OR
phone no.
this manual.
C.Tone line access
no.
Press CO or enter Enter phone number.
line access number
(9 or 81-88).
Conditions Hints
Operation 2-7
Making Calls
Basic Calling
extension no.
OR
(DSS)
<Example>
When you call Mr. Thomas....
Mr. Thomas’s extension number is 223.
PT / SLT
2 2 3
☞
a copy for your reference.
Customising Your Phone • For quick operation
• Customising the Buttons If you are an operator or dial some extensions
Create or re-arrange a DSS button. frequently, the DSS button is useful.
Customising Your System • Confirming the dialled number before
• Extension Number Set connecting
• Extension Name Set You can go off-hook after confirming the
number you dialled. If you misdial, press “ ”
to clear each number from the right or press
the FLASH/RCL button to clear all numbers.
PT / SLT
0
OR
operator
call number
Off-hook.
Dial 0 or enter
operator call number .
2-8 Operation
Calling an external party
You have to seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number because external calls are
made via your system.
Select one of the following methods:
• Press an idle (CO) button.
• Dial automatic line access number 9 .
An idle line is selected automatically.
Operation
• Dial outside line number 8 1 to 8 8 .
A specific line is selected.
PT / SLT
(CO)
OR
9
OR phone no.
8 1
to
Off-hook. Enter phone number. Talk.
8 8
Seize an external line
(CO, 9 or 81-88).
☞
parts of your conversation will be lost. To avoid
Customising Your Phone this, talk alternately.
• Initial Settings • To select the less expensive line
– Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing automatically, dial “9” or press the Loop-CO
Select the seized line when going off-hook. button to seize a line. (LCR = Least Cost
• Customising the Buttons Routing)
Create or re-arrange the Terminate button. • Confirming the dialled number before
• Charge Fee Management connecting
You can go off-hook after confirming the
number you dialled. If you misdial, press “ ”
to clear each number from the right or press
the FLASH/RCL button to clear all numbers.
• Call information
The following information can be referred to by
repeatedly pressing the CO button in use.
– Phone number (outgoing call) or
call duration (incoming call)
– Meter
– Call charge
• To call another party without hanging up,
just press the Terminate button or “TRM”
button on the display, re-access an outside line
and dial the new phone number.
Operation 2-9
Making Calls
Easy Dialling
PT
(One-Touch
Dialling)
PT / SLT
2-10 Operation
◆ To dial
PT / SLT
6 station speed
dial no.
Operation
Off-hook. Dial 6 . Enter station speed
dial number (0-9).
PT / SLT
AUTO DIAL
STORE
OR
system speed
dial no.
• More than one speed dial number can be used for long telephone numbers, if the number is divided when stored.
<Dialling Example>
If the number is divided and stored in system speed dial numbers 001 and 002:
AUTO DIAL AUTO DIAL
0 0 1 0 0 2
STORE STORE
Operation 2-11
Making Calls
To a pre-set party by going off-hook (Pickup Dialling)
You can make an outside call simply by going off-hook if you pre-assigned.
PT / SLT
desired
7 4 2 party’s no. #
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 742. Enter the desired Dial #. On-hook.
party’s number
(max. 24 digits).
◆ To set / cancel
PT / SLT
1 Set
OR
7 4
0 Cancel C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 74. Dial 1 to set On-hook.
or 0 to cancel.
◆ To dial
PT / SLT
Off-hook.
• You can set or cancel this feature by simply pressing the Pickup Dialling button. If set, the button light turns red.
• To call another party, dial the desired party’s phone number before the pre-set line is connected.
(Default: 1 second)
• “ ” can also be stored as a digit.
• This feature is not available for an ISDN telephone user.
2-12 Operation
Using a pre-assigned number (Quick Dialling)
You can make a call simply by pressing the number pre-assigned as quick dialling. Up to 80 parties
can be stored in the system. Consult your manager or dealer for details and refer to the directory on
page 6-16.
PT
PTand SLT
/ SLT
Operation
quick dial no.
(Phantom)
OR
phantom
extension no.
Press Phantom or enter
phantom extension number.
Operation 2-13
Making Calls
◆ To answer
PT
OR
(Phantom)
Off-hook or
press Phantom.
• The Phantom extension button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Idle
Red on: You are calling a phantom extension.
Flashing green: Incoming call
• To set ringing or not, refer to “Customising Your Phone”.
2-14 Operation
Redial
This is convenient when calling the same external party again.
– Redialling the last number you dialled
– Saving the number and redialling
!!
Operation
• Up to twenty-four digits can be programmed and
redialled. The line access number is not counted as a
• To redial automatically, go off-hook with the
digit.
SP-PHONE button and the REDIAL button, or
☞
press the REDIAL button directly. It will keep
Customising Your Phone
trying the busy number until the called party
• Initial Settings
answers within a specified time (Automatic
– Full One-Touch Dialling Assignment
Redial). You can perform other tasks during
Allow or cancel the one-touch operation while on-
dialling. To cancel, press the FLASH/RCL
hook. (Default: Allow)
button or perform another operation.
PT / SLT
REDIAL
OR
Operation 2-15
Making Calls
Saving the number and redialling (Saved Number Redial)
The saved number is retained until a new number is stored.
◆ To save
PT
PT
During a conversation or while hearing a busy tone
AUTO DIAL
STORE (Save)
◆ To dial
PT
(Save)
2-16 Operation
When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
Operation
Reserving a busy line (Automatic Callback Busy)
You can set the telephone to receive call-back ringing when a dialled line becomes idle.
When you answer the call-back ringing:
For an outside call: The line is seized.
For an intercom call: The called extension starts ringing automatically.
PT / SLT
While hearing a busy tone
C.BCK
OR
C.Tone
6
Press “C.BCK” or dial 6. On-hook.
PT / SLT
● Outside call ● Intercom call
phone no.
◆ To cancel
PT / SLT
4 6
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 46. On-hook.
• If you do not answer after four call-back rings, this feature will be cancelled.
• This feature is not available for an ISDN telephone user.
Operation 2-17
Making Calls
Sending a call waiting tone (Busy Station Signalling [BSS])
The party will know your call is waiting.
PT / SLT
While hearing a busy tone
BSS
OR
2
Press “BSS” or dial 2.
• If “BSS” is not displayed or you hear a reorder tone, this feature is not set at the other party’s phone.
This feature is only available if the called extension has set the “Call Waiting” feature.
• Depending on the other party’s telephone, the “Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)” and the “Whisper
OHCA” functions can be applied. You can talk to the other party through the speaker and the microphone
(OHCA) or you only send a call announcement through the handset (Whisper OHCA), while they are having
another conversation using the handset.
• This feature is not available for an ISDN telephone user.
2-18 Operation
Leaving a message waiting indication (Message Waiting)
The called extension receives a message waiting
indication (MESSAGE button light turns on and / or
indication tone* is emitted when going off-hook) to call
you back.
Operation
◆ To leave a message waiting indication
PT / SLT
When the called extension is busy or does not answer
MESSAGE
OR
4 C.Tone
Press MESSAGE On-hook.
or dial 4.
1 Leave
OR extension no.
7 0
0 Cancel C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 70. Dial 1 to leave or Enter extension On-hook.
0 to cancel. number.
T7431
MODE
→ MSG Off ext extension no.
SELECT MODE
C.Tone
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Enter On-hook.
“Feature Access” until “MSG Off” “MSG On”: Leave extension number.
is displayed. or “MSG On” “MSG Off”: Cancel.
is displayed.
T7433
→M S G O f f ext
SHIFT FEAT MSG On ext
MENU SEL
extension no.
C.Tone
Press SHIFT Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial Press “SEL”. Enter On-hook.
until “FEAT” until “MSG Off” “MSG On”: Leave extension number.
is displayed. or “MSG On” is “MSG Off”: Cancel
at the arrow.
Operation 2-19
Making Calls
◆ To leave / cancel a message waiting indication (contd.)
T7436 / T7235
Cancel
D – PT
While on-hook
MESSAGE
Press MESSAGE
until the desired extension appears.
• The extension number and name are shown in the received order.
• Single line telephone users may hear a special ring tone as notification while on-hook, if required.
• This feature is not available for an ISDN telephone user.
• * Indication tone
1s
◆ To call back
PT / SLT
MESSAGE
OR
7 0 2
Off-hook. Press MESSAGE or dial 702.
2-20 Operation
◆ To clear all message waiting indications
PT / SLT
your extension
7 0 0 no.
C.Tone
Operation
Off-hook. Dial 700. Enter your extension On-hook.
number.
Operation 2-21
Making Calls
PT / SLT
ACCNT
OR
account code OR
(Account)
OR
9 9
Off-hook. 4 9 Enter account code Press # or dial 99.
(max. 10 digits).
Press “ACCNT”,
Account or dial 49.
(CO)
OR
phone no.
C.Tone line access
no.
Press CO or enter Enter phone number.
line access number
(9 or 81-88).
2-22 Operation
To an extension refusing the call (DND Override)
PT / SLT
While hearing the DND tone
Over
Operation
OR
2
Press “Over” or dial 2.
PT / SLT
After the line is connected
desired no.
Operation 2-23
Making Calls
Alternating the Calling Method
(Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice)
◆ For voice-calling
PT / SLT
After dialling
Voice
OR
C.Tone
◆ For ring-calling
PT / SLT
After dialling
Tone
OR
Press “Tone” or .
• If the called party uses a single line telephone, only Ring-Calling is available.
• You can switch the desired calling method only once during a call.
2-24 Operation
Receiving Calls
Answering Calls
PT / SLT
Operation
Off-hook. Talk.
SHIFT SHIFT
Operation 2-25
Receiving Calls
Answering Hands-free
(Hands-free Answerback)
You can answer an intercom call without going off-hook as soon as the line is connected.
You will hear the caller talking without the phone ringing.
u To set / cancel
PT
While on-hook
AUTO ANSWER
MUTE
Press AUTO
ANSWER.
• The AUTO ANSWER button light shows the current status as follows:
On: Set.
Off: Not set.
2-26 Operation
Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone
(Call Pickup)
You can answer an incoming call that is ringing at another extension from your phone without
leaving your desk.
The following types are available:
Operation
Outside (CO) Call Pickup: Picks up an outside call.
Group Call Pickup: Picks up a call within your extension group.
Directed Call Pickup: Picks up a specified extension’s call.
PT / SLT
4 Outside call
OR
4 0 Group C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 4 for an outside call Talk.
or 40 for group.
C.Tone
T7431
l Group Call Pickup only
MODE
→ C.Pickup GRP
SELECT MODE
C.Tone
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Talk.
“Feature Access” until “C.Pickup GRP”
is displayed. is displayed.
T7433
l Group Call Pickup only
→C . P i c k u p G R P
SHIFT FEAT Call Park 0-9
MENU SEL
C.Tone
Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until Press “SEL”. Talk.
“FEAT” is displayed. “C.Pickup GRP” is
at the arrow.
Operation 2-27
Receiving Calls
T7436 / T7235
l Group Call Pickup only
2-28 Operation
Answering a Call via an External Speaker
(Trunk Answer From Any Station [TAFAS])
You can answer an incoming outside call paged through an external speaker from any extension.
PT / SLT
Operation
While hearing a tone from external speaker
4 2 speaker no.
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 42. Enter speaker Talk.
number (1-4).
T7431
While hearing a tone from external speaker
MODE
→Page-E ANS 1-4 extension
speaker no.
no.
SELECT MODE
C.Tone
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Enter speaker On-hook.
“Feature Access” until “Page-E ANS” number (1-4).
is displayed. is displayed.
T7433
While hearing a tone from external speaker
→P a g e - E A N S 1-4
SHIFT FEAT Page-GRP ANS
MENU SEL
speaker no.
C.Tone
Enter speaker Talk.
Press SHIFT Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial Press “SEL”. number (1-4).
until “FEAT” until “Page-E ANS”
is displayed. is at the arrow.
T7436 / T7235
While hearing a tone from external speaker
!!
• You can also receive a paged announcement
via a speaker with this operation.
Operation 2-29
During a Conversation
Holding a Call
• If a call is not retrieved within a specified time, you will hear an alarm as a reminder.
• If a call is not retrieved within thirty minutes, it is automatically disconnected.
Holding (regular)
PT SLT
During a conversation During a conversation
HOLD
(Recall)
5 0
C.Tone C.Tone
Press HOLD. On-hook. Press Recall. Dial 50. On-hook.
u To retrieve a call
PT / SLT
l At the holding extension
(CO) OR INTERCOM
OR
5 0
Off-hook. Press CO/INTERCOM Talk.
or dial 50.
(CO)
OR
2-30 Operation
• The CO or INTERCOM button light shows the current status as follows:
Flashing green: Your held call
Flashing red: Another extension’s held call
• A single line telephone user can hold either an intercom call or an outside call at one time.
• A proprietary telephone user can hold an intercom call and multiple outside calls.
• To hold multiple intercom calls, use the “Call Park” feature.
• This feature is not available for an ISDN telephone user.
Operation
Denying other people the possibility of retrieving
your held calls (Exclusive Call Hold)
Only the held extension can retrieve the call.
PT
During a conversation
HOLD HOLD
C.Tone
Press HOLD. Press HOLD again. On-hook.
u To retrieve a call
PT
(CO)
OR
INTERCOM
Off-hook. Press CO or
INTERCOM.
Operation 2-31
During a Conversation
Holding in a system parking zone (Call Park)
You can park a call and perform other operations. The parked call can be retrieved by any extension.
Up to ten calls can be parked.
u To park a call
PT
During a conversation
SLT
During a conversation
(Recall)
5 2 parking zone no.
C.Tone
Press Recall. Dial 52. Enter parking On-hook.
zone number (0-9).
T7431
During a conversation
MODE
→ Call Park 0-9
TRANSFER SELECT MODE
Press TRANSFER. Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT.
“Feature Access” until “Call Park”
is displayed. is displayed.
2-32 Operation
u To park a call (contd.)
T7433
During a conversation
SHIFT FEAT
Operation
TRANSFER
Press TRANSFER. Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until
“FEAT” is displayed. “Call Park” is at the arrow.
→C a l l P a r k 0-9
COS Primary ext
parking zone no.
MENU SEL
C.Tone
Press “SEL”. Enter parking On-hook.
zone number (0-9).
T7436 / T7235
During a conversation
C.Tone
On-hook.
Operation 2-33
During a Conversation
u To retrieve
PT / SLT
stored parking
5 2 zone no.
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 52. Enter stored parking Talk.
zone number (0-9).
T7431
MODE
→ Call Park 0-9
stored parking
SELECT MODE
zone no.
C.Tone
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Enter stored parking Talk.
“Feature Access” until “Call Park” zone number (0-9).
is displayed. is displayed.
T7433
→C a l l P a r k 0-9
SHIFT FEAT COS Primary ext
MENU SEL
Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until Press “SEL”.
“FEAT” is displayed. “Call Park” is at the arrow.
stored parking
zone no.
C.Tone
Enter stored parking Talk.
zone number (0-9).
T7436 / T7235
• This function is not available for an ISDN telephone user. !! • If you hear a busy tone when and entering
the zone number to park a call, the zone is
in use. Enter another number.
• If you hear a reoder tone when retrieving a
parked call, there is no held call. Confirm the
stored parking zone number.
2-34 Operation
Talking to Two Parties Alternately
(Call Splitting)
When talking to one party while the other party is on hold, you can swap the calls back and forth
(alternately).
Operation
PT
During a conversation with a held call During a conversation with a held call
l When either party is an outside party l When both parties are an extension party
Repeat to
alternate.
TRANSFER
OR
HOLD
(CO) HOLD
OR
SLT
During a conversation with a held call
(Recall)
Press Recall.
Operation 2-35
During a Conversation
Transferring a Call
Transferring to an extension
PT
During a conversation
extension no.
OR
TRANSFER
C.Tone (DSS)
SLT
During a conversation
(Recall)
extension no.
C.Tone
Press Recall. Enter extension Talk. On-hook.
number.
2-36 Operation
Transferring to an external party
Some extensions may be restricted from performing this function.
PT
During a conversation
Operation
(CO)
OR
phone no.
TRANSFER
C.Tone line access
no.
Press TRANSFER. Press CO or enter Enter phone number. Talk. On-hook.
line access number
(9 or 81-88).
SLT
During a conversation
Press Recall. Enter line access Enter phone number. Talk. On-hook.
number (9 or 81-88).
Operation 2-37
During a Conversation
During a conversation, a call waiting tone or voice announcement through the speaker or the handset
occurs when an outside call is received or another extension is letting you know another call is waiting.
To activate this feature, set to “On”. (Default: No tone) You can answer the second call by
disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold.
PT SLT
While hearing a tone While hearing a tone
HOLD (CO)
OR
(Recall)
5 0
INTERCOM
Press Recall and dial 50. On-hook. Off-hook.
• Depending on the other party’s telephone, the “Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)” and the “Whisper
OHCA” functions can be applied. You can talk to the other party through the speaker and the microphone
(OHCA) or you only receive a call announcement through the handset (Whisper OHCA), while they are having
another conversation using the handset.
• The calling extension’s name or number is displayed for five seconds in ten second intervals before answering a
call.
• This feature is not available for an ISDN telephone user.
Default 15 s
Special Tones 5s
Outside
Extension
2-38 Operation
Three-party Conversation
Operation
Adding a third party during a conversation (Conference)
PT
desired
CONF party’s no. CONF
C.Tone
Press CONF. Enter desired Press CONF. Talk.
party’s number.
SLT
desired
(Recall) party’s no. (Recall)
3
C.Tone
Press Recall. Enter desired Press Recall. Dial 3. Talk.
party’s number.
u To talk to one party by disconnecting the other when one of these parties is an
outside call
PT
(CO)
OR
INTERCOM
C.Tone
Press CO or Talk.
INTERCOM.
Operation 2-39
During a Conversation
Leaving a conference
The other two parties can continue their conversation.
PT / SLT PT
When you are talking with two extensions or When you are talking with two external parties
one extension party and one external party (Unattended Conference)
u To return
PT
While the others are talking
(CO)
Press CO.
2-40 Operation
Saving a Number
(Notebook Function)
You can store a desired outside phone number in memory during a conversation or while
on-hook. You can dial the stored number easily.
Operation
u To store
PT
PT
During a conversation or on-hook status
Press STORE. Press STORE again. Enter phone number. Press SAVE.
(max. 24 digits)
u To dial
PT
(Save)
• You do not have to store a line access number before the phone number. An outside line is automatically accessed.
• “ ” and “#” can also be stored as a digit.
Operation 2-41
During a Conversation
Mute
You can disable the microphone or the handset to consult privately with others in the
room while listening to the other party on the phone through the speaker or the
handset.
There are two types of mute as follows:
Handset Mute: During a conversation using the handset.
This function is available for the KX-T7400 series telephone users
only.
Microphone Mute: During a conversation using the microphone.
u To set / cancel
PT
AUTO ANSWER
MUTE
Press MUTE.
• The AUTO ANSWER/MUTE button light shows the current status as follows:
Flashing red: Mute
Off: Normal
2-42 Operation
Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation
(Off-Hook Monitor) [KX-T7400 series telephone only]
You can let other people in the room listen to the conversation through the speaker while continuing the
conversation using the handset.
Operation
u To set / cancel
PT
SP-PHONE
Press SP-PHONE.
Operation 2-43
Before Leaving Your Desk
Forwarding Your Calls
(Call Forwarding)
2-44 Operation
◆ To set (except “Call Forwarding by ISDN Line”)
PT / SLT
For “Follow Me”, dial
2 All Calls your extension number.
FWD/DND 3 Busy
OR 4 No Answer extension no.
5 Busy/No Answer
7 1 0 C.Tone
Operation
7 Follow Me
Off-hook. Press FWD/DND Enter extension On-hook.
or dial 710. Enter required number. number.
(Max. 24 digits)
C.Tone
Dial #. On-hook.
T7436 / T7235
FWD/DND Cancel
DND (0/*/ext)
FWD-All Calls (ext)
FWD-Busy (ext)
(ext)
extension no.
FWD/DND FWD-No Answer
MENU PREV NEXT C.Tone
OR
Off-hook. Press NEXT Enter extension On-hook.
FWD/DND. number.
FWD-BSY/NA (ext)
FWD-CO Line (dial)
FWD-From (ext)
FWD-From Cancel (ext) For “FWD-From” (Follow Me),
dial your extension number
MENU PREV NEXT
(Max. 24 digits)
C.Tone
Dial #. On-hook.
Operation 2-45
Before Leaving Your Desk
◆ To cancel (except “Call Forwarding by ISDN Line”)
PT / SLT
FWD/DND
OR 0
7 1 0 C.Tone
Off-hook. Press FWD/DND Dial 0. On-hook.
or dial 710.
From destination
C.Tone
your
8 extension no.
T7436 / T7235
FWD/DND
FWD/DND Cancel
C.Tone
Off-hook. Press Press FWD/DND Cancel. On-hook.
FWD/DND.
From destination
C.Tone
your
FWD-From Cancel (ext) extension no.
PT / SLT
9 2 1 CFU
FWD/DND OR
OR your MSN
9 3 1 CFB
7 1 0 OR
# phone no. #
C.Tone
Dial #. Enter phone Dial #. On-hook.
number.
2-46 Operation
◆ To cancel “Call Forwarding by ISDN Line”
PT / SLT
9 0 All
OR
FWD/DND
9 2 0 CFU
OR your MSN
OR
7 1 0
Operation
9 3 0 CFB
OR
Off-hook. Press FWD/DND Enter your multiple
or dial 710. 9 4 0 CFNR subscriber number
(MSN).
Enter required number.
#
C.Tone
Dial #. On-hook.
• Each call can be forwarded up to four times. The fifth time will be disregarded.
Incoming
call
A B C D E F
once twice three times four times five times
Original
destination
• Boss-Secretary function
The extension which has been set as the destination can call the forwarding extension. Also, any extension in the
receiving group which has been set as the forwarded destination can call the forwarding extension.
<Example> Call
Receiving group 1
Forward
Fowarding set
extension
• The FWD/DND button light flashes red when the Call Forwarding feature is set.
• This feature is not available for an ISDN telephone user.
Operation 2-47
Before Leaving Your Desk
Forwarding Calls from a Receiving Group
(Call Forwarding – from Hunting Group)
Pre-assigned extension users can forward calls arriving at any receiving group or calls arriving just at
your own receiving group. The destination can be another receiving group or a specific extension.
Some extensions may be restricted.
◆ To set
PT / SLT
◆ To cancel
PT / SLT
forwarding
7 1 4 0 group no.
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 7140. Enter forwarding On-hook.
group number.
• You can set or cancel this feature by simply pressing the Call Forwarding from Hunting Group button.
If set, the button light turns red.
• Each call can be forwarded up to four times. The fifth time will be disregarded.
Incoming
call
A B C D E F
once twice three times four times five times
Original
destination
• Boss-Secretary function
The destination extension can call the forwarding receiving group.
<Example>
Call
Receiving group 1
Forward
Destination set
extension
2-48 Operation
Showing an Absent Message on the Caller’s
Telephone Display (Absent Message Capability)
You can show the reason for your absence, if the calling extension uses a Panasonic proprietary
telephone with a display. This way the caller will know when you will be available. You can choose one
of nine messages.
Operation
Message no. Default Message
2 Gone Home
6 In a Meeting
◆ To set
PT / SLT
1 Will Return Soon
2 Gone Home
3 At Ext %%% + Extension no.
4 Back at %%:%% + Hour : Minute
7 5 0 5 Out until %%/%% + Month / Day
6 In a Meeting C.Tone
7
Off-hook. Dial 750. On-hook.
8
9
Enter required number.
Operation 2-49
Before Leaving Your Desk
◆ To set (contd.)
T7431
1 Will Return Soon
2 Gone Home
MODE 3
→ ABST MSG On 1-9 At Ext %%% + Extension no.
SELECT MODE
4 Back at %%:%% + Hour : Minute
5 Out until %%/%% + Month / Day
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. 6 In a Meeting
“Feature Access” until “ABST MSG On” 7
is displayed. is displayed. 8
9
Enter required number.
C.Tone
On-hook.
T7433
→A B S T M S G O n 1-9
SHIFT FEAT C.Pickup GRP
MENU SEL
Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until Press “SEL”.
“FEAT” is displayed. “ABST MSG On” is
at the arrow.
C.Tone
On-hook.
2-50 Operation
◆ To cancel
PT / SLT
7 5 0 0
C.Tone
Operation
Off-hook. Dial 7500. On-hook.
T7431
MODE
→ ABST MSG Off
SELECT MODE
C.Tone
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. On-hook.
“Feature Access” until “ABST MSG
is displayed. Off” is displayed.
T7433
→A B S T M S G O f f
SHIFT FEAT ABST MSG On 1-9
MENU SEL
C.Tone
Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until Press “SEL”. On-hook.
“FEAT” is displayed. “ABST MSG Off” is
at the arrow.
T7436 / T7235
!!
• To confirm the message, go off-hook.
It will be displayed.
Operation 2-51
Before Leaving Your Desk
Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone
(Electronic Station Lockout)
◆ To lock / unlock
PT / SLT
• If you forget the code or cannot unlock your phone, consult an operator. They can unlock your extension
(Remote Station Lock Control).
2-52 Operation
Leaving a Call Distribution Group
(Log-In / Log-Out)
Operation
receiving order. When you return, set Log-In so that
calls will reach your extension. (Default: Log-In)
PT / SLT
• The Log-In / Log-Out button alternates the setting between Log-In and Log-Out modes. The button light shows
the current status as follows:
Off: Log-In mode
Red on: Log-Out mode
Flashing red: a call waiting
• This feature is not available for an ISDN telephone user.
Operation 2-53
Making / Answering an Announcement
Paging
◆ All
PT / SLT
6 2
OR
6 3 C.Tone
◆ External
PT / SLT
6 2 OR
All
0 C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 62. Enter specific speaker number Announce. Talk.
(1-4) or 0 for all.
T7431
speaker no. Specific
MODE
→ Page Extrn 0-4 OR
SELECT MODE
0 All
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Enter specific speaker number
“Feature Access” until “Page Extrn” (1-4) or 0 for all.
is displayed. is displayed.
C.Tone
Announce. Talk.
2-54 Operation
◆ External (contd.)
T7433
→P a g e E x t r n 0-4
SHIFT FEAT Page GRP 00-16
MENU SEL
Operation
Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial Press “SEL”.
“FEAT” is displayed. until “Page Extrn”
is at the arrow.
0 All C.Tone
Enter specific speaker number Announce. Talk.
(1-4) or 0 for all.
T7436 / T7235
C.Tone
Announce. Talk.
◆ Group
PT / SLT
6 3 OR
0 0 All C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 63. Enter specific group number Announce. Talk.
(01-16) or 00 for all.
Operation 2-55
Making / Answering an Announcement
◆ Group (contd.)
T7431
group no. Specific
MODE
→ Page GRP 00-16 OR
SELECT MODE
0 0 All
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Enter specific group number
“Feature Access” until “Page GRP” (01-16) or 00 for all.
is displayed. is displayed.
C.Tone
Announce. Talk.
T7433
→P a g e G R P 00-16
SHIFT FEAT Parallel 1/0
MENU SEL
Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial Press “SEL”.
“FEAT” is displayed. until “Page GRP”
is at the arrow.
0 0 All C.Tone
Enter specific group number Announce. Talk.
(01-16) or 00 for all.
T7436 / T7235
PREV 0 0 All
C.Tone
Announce. Talk.
• A ringing, busy, Do Not Disturb extension, or a single line telephone cannot receive a paged announcement.
• The proprietary telephone user can deny a paged announcement. For more details, refer to the page 2-65.
2-56 Operation
Paging a Person and Transferring a Call
PT
Operation
During a conversation
6 2
OR
TRANSFER
6 3 C.Tone
C.Tone
Talk. On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
6 2
(Recall)
OR
6 3 C.Tone
C.Tone
Talk. On-hook.
◆ Through a speaker
PT
During a conversation
speaker no. Specific
TRANSFER
6 2 OR
All
0 C.Tone
C.Tone
Wait for an answer. Talk. On-hook.
Operation 2-57
Making / Answering an Announcement
◆ Through a speaker (contd.)
SLT
During a conversation
speaker no. Specific
(Recall)
6 2 OR
All
0 C.Tone
C.Tone
Wait for an answer. Talk. On-hook.
PT
During a conversation
group no. Specific
TRANSFER
6 3 OR
0 0 All C.Tone
C.Tone
Wait for an answer. Talk. On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
group no. Specific
(Recall)
6 3 OR
0 0 All C.Tone
C.Tone
Wait for an answer. Talk. On-hook.
2-58 Operation
Answering a Paged Announcement
◆ Through a speaker
PT / SLT
Operation
4 2 speaker no.
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 42. Enter speaker Talk.
number (1-4).
T7431
MODE
→ Page-E ANS 1-4 extension
speaker no.
no.
SELECT MODE
C.Tone
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Enter speaker Talk.
“Feature Access” until “Page-E ANS” number (1-4).
is displayed. is displayed.
T7433
→P a g e - E A N S 1-4
SHIFT FEAT Page-GRP ANS
MENU SEL
Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until Press “SEL”.
“FEAT” is displayed. “Page-E ANS” is
at the arrow.
speaker no.
C.Tone
Enter speaker Talk.
number (1-4).
T7436 / T7235
Features OR Answer
Page-ExtExt-Page
Answer (→1-4)
(1-4) speaker no.
PREV C.Tone
Operation 2-59
Making / Answering an Announcement
◆ Through the telephones
PT / SLT
4 3
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 43. Talk.
T7431
MODE
→ Page-GRP ANS
SELECT MODE
C.Tone
Off-hook. Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial until Press SELECT. Talk.
“Feature Access” “Page-GRP ANS” is
is displayed. displayed.
T7433
→P a g e - G R P A N S
SHIFT FEAT Page Extrn 0-4
MENU SEL
C.Tone
Off-hook. Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until Press “SEL”. Talk.
“FEAT” is displayed. “Page-GRP ANS” is
at the arrow.
T7436 / T7235
2-60 Operation
Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs
Setting the Alarm
(Timed Reminder)
You can receive a ringback alarm at your telephone to remind you of a meeting, appointment or as a
wake-up call. The setting can be for either one time or daily (every day until cancelled) at a pre-set
time.
Operation
◆ To set
PT / SLT
0 AM 0 One Time
7 6 1 hour / minute OR OR
1 PM 1 Daily
Off-hook. Dial 761. Enter hour (01-12) Dial 0 for AM Dial 0 for one time
and minute (00-59). or 1 for PM. or 1 for daily.
C.Tone
On-hook.
◆ To cancel
PT / SLT
7 6 0
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 760. On-hook.
D – PT
7 6 2
Operation 2-61
Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs
◆ To stop or answer the ringback
PT / SLT
any key
OR
2-62 Operation
Refusing Incoming Calls
(Do Not Disturb [DND])
Operation
Refusing all calls
You may set this feature during a meeting or when you are busy. Outside calls can be forwarded to a
backup station (pre-assigned extension or the operator).
◆ To set
PT / SLT
extension no. Extension
FWD/DND OR
OR
1 0 Operator
7 1 0 OR
C.Tone
No backup station
Off-hook. Press FWD/DND Dial 1. On-hook.
or dial 710.
Enter extension number, dial 0
or dial as you desire.
T7436 / T7235
extension no. Extension
OR
◆ To cancel
PT / SLT
FWD/DND
OR
0
7 1 0 C.Tone
Off-hook. Press FWD/DND Dial 0. On-hook.
or dial 710.
Operation 2-63
Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs
◆ To cancel (contd.)
T7436 / T7235
FWD/DND Cancel
FWD/DND
C.Tone
Off-hook. Press FWD/DND. Press “FWD/DND Cancel”. On-hook.
◆ To set / cancel
PT / SLT
1 Set
OR
5 4
0 Cancel
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 54. Dial 1 to set or On-hook.
0 to cancel.
• A flashing CO button tells you an outside call is received. You can answer the call by pressing the CO button.
• The following button lights turn red when the DND feature is set.
– Your FWD/DND button.
– The DSS button on other extensions where your extension number has been assigned.
• The following features cannot be set at the same time.
– Forwarding your calls (Call Forwarding)
– Refusing all calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
– Refusing direct outside calls (DND for Direct Dialling In Calls)
The most recent feature set overrides the previous setting.
• You can set or cancel the DND for Direct Dialling In Call feature by simply pressing the DND for DDI button. If
set, the button light turns red.
• These features are not available for an ISDN telephone user.
2-64 Operation
Receiving a Call Waiting
(Call Waiting / Off-Hook Call Announcement [OHCA] / Whisper OHCA)
During a conversation, you can be informed a call waiting with a tone or voice announcement through
your speaker or handset. (Default: No tone)
Call waiting tone: a waiting tone through the handset
Operation
You can change the tone, refer to “Customising Your phone”.
OHCA: a voice announcement through the speaker without pre-information
(KX-T7436 and KX-T7235 telephone users only)
Whisper OHCA: a voice announcement through the handset without pre-information
(KX-T7400 series telephone users only)
◆ To set / cancel
PT / SLT
0 No tone
OR
1 Tone
7 3 1 OR
2 OHCA C.Tone
OR
Off-hook. Dial 731. On-hook.
3 Whisper OHCA
• You can set or cancel the Call Waiting features by simply pressing the Call Waiting button. Pressing this button
changes the features as follows:
If the Call Waiting tone, OHCA or Whisper OHCA is selected, the button light turns red.
• This feature is not available for an ISDN telephone user.
Operation 2-65
Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs
Denying the Paged Announcement
(Paging — DENY)
You can refuse any paged announcement sent through your speaker.
PT
1 Deny
OR
7 2 1
0 Allow
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 721. Dial 1 to deny On-hook.
or 0 to allow.
• You can deny or allow this feature by simply pressing the Paging Deny button. If denied, the button light turns
red.
2-66 Operation
Displaying Your Number on the Called Party and
Calling Party’s Telephone
(Calling / Connected Line Identification Presentation [CLIP / COLP])
CLIP : When making an outside call, you can let the other party see your pre-assigned identification
Operation
number.
COLP : When receiving an outside call, you can let the party calling you see your pre-assigned
identification number.
You can select to show an identification number assigned for an outside line or your extension.
You can also show a desired identification number when making a particular call.
1 Outside line
OR
7 1 1
2 Extension
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 711. Dial 1 for outside line On-hook.
or 2 for extension.
◆ To show a desired identification number when making a particular call (CLIP only)
PT / SLT
desired
7 1 1 3 identification no. #
(CO)
OR
phone no.
C.Tone line access
no.
Press CO or enter Enter phone number. Talk.
line access number
(9 or 81-88).
Operation 2-67
Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs
Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the
Called Party’s Telephone
(Calling Line Identification Restriction [CLIR])
When making a call, you can prevent the other party from seeing your identification number. You can
change the setting at any time for a particular call.
◆ To set / cancel
PT / SLT
2 Set
OR
5 9
0 Cancel C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 59. Dial 2 to set or On-hook.
0 to cancel.
PT / SLT
(CO)
OR
5 9 1 phone no.
line access
no.
Off-hook. Dial 591. Press CO or enter Enter phone number. Talk.
line access number
(9 or 81-88).
☞
service of your telephone company.
Customising Your Phone
• Customising the Buttons
Create or re-arrange a Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR) button.
2-68 Operation
Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the
Calling Party’s Telephone
(Connected Line Identification Restriction [COLR])
When receiving a call, you can prevent the party calling you from seeing your identification number.
Operation
◆ To set / cancel
PT / SLT
1 Set
OR
5 8
0 Cancel C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 58. Dial 1 to set or On-hook.
0 to cancel.
PT / SLT
1 Deny
OR
7 2 0
0 Allow
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 720. Dial 1 to deny On-hook.
or 0 to allow.
• You can deny or allow or cancel this feature by simply pressing the Call Pickup Deny button. If it is denied, the
button light turns red.
Operation 2-69
Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs
You can listen to background music through your telephone speaker while on-hook.
An external music source, such as a radio, must be connected.
◆ To set / cancel
PT
While on-hook
BGM
OR
HOLD
D – PT
While on-hook
OR
(Night)
2-70 Operation
Setting the Parallel Connected Telephone Ringer
(Parallelled Telephone)
A proprietary telephone user can choose whether the single line telephone
connected in parallel will ring or not, when an incoming call is received.
(Default: No ring)
Operation
PT / SLT
1 Ring
OR
6 9
0 No ring
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 69. Dial 1 to ring On-hook.
or 0 to no ring.
T7431
1 Ring
MODE
→ Parallel 1/0 OR
SELECT MODE 0 No ring
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Dial 1 to ring
“Feature Access” until “Parallel” or 0 to no ring.
is displayed. is displayed.
C.Tone
On-hook.
T7433
→P a r a l l e l 1/0
SHIFT FEAT ABST MSG Off
MENU SEL
Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until Press “SEL”.
“FEAT” is displayed. “Parallel” is at the arrow.
1 Ring
OR
0 No ring
C.Tone
Dial 1 to ring On-hook.
or 0 to no ring.
Operation 2-71
Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs
T7436 / T7235
1 Ring
Features Parallel On/Off (1/0) OR
OR
PREV 0 No ring
C.Tone
Press “Features”. Press “Parallel On/Off”. Dial 1 to ring On-hook.
Rotate Jog Dial or or 0 to no ring.
press “PREV” until the
following is displayed.
• You can select “Ring” or “No ring” by simply pressing the Parallelled Telephone Connection button. If “Ring” is
selected, the button light turns red.
• Even if “No ring” is selected, the call can be answered with the single line telephone by lifting the handset.
• If you go off-hook while your parallelled telephone is in use, the call will switch over to your telephone, and vice
versa.
• This feature is not available for an ISDN telephone user.
2-72 Operation
Clearing the Feature Settings at Your Extension
(Station Program Clear)
You can clear the following features which have been set on your phone. If you change desks, and
notice settings which a previous owner left on the line, you can clear these features.
Operation
• Calling to a Pre-set Party by Going Off-Hook (Pickup Dialling): The stored number will be cleared.
• Reserving a Busy Line (Automatic Callback Busy)
• Leaving a Message Waiting Indication (Message Waiting): All messages will be removed.
• Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding)
• Showing an Absent Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent Message Capability)
• Leaving a Call Distribution Group (Log-In/Log-out)
• Calling Using the Call Log (Incoming Call Log)
• Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
• Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
• Receiving a Call Waiting (Call Waiting / Off-Hook Call Announcement [OHCA] / Whisper OHCA)
• Denying the Paged Announcement (Paging — Deny)
• Denying Other People the Possibility of Picking up Your Calls (Call Pickup Deny)
• Turning on the Background Music
• Setting the Parallel Connected Telephone Ringer (Parallelled Telephone): The single line telephone
will not ring.
• Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone (CLIR)
• Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Calling Party’s Telephone (COLR)
PT / SLT
7 9 0
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 790. On-hook.
Operation 2-73
Using User-supplied Equipment
Doorphone call
Press doorphone
button.
PT / SLT
6 1 doorphone no.
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 61. Enter doorphone Talk.
number (1-4).
2-74 Operation
Forwarding doorphone calls to outside parties
(Doorphone Call Forwarding to Outside Line)
You can have incoming doorphone calls forwarded to outside parties using ISDN lines.
You can choose a different destination for Day mode and Night mode.
Some extensions may be restricted.
Operation
PT / SLT
(Max. 24 digits)
#
C.Tone
Dial #. On-hook.
Operation 2-75
Using User-supplied Equipment
• You can set or cancel this feature by simply pressing the Doorphone Call Forwarding to Outside Line button.
If set, the button light turns red.
• Time limit
A call between a party at a doorphone and an outside party is restricted by the system timer (Default: 0 sec.).
The call is disconnected when the time runs out.
PT / SLT
door opener
5 5 no.
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 55. Enter door opener On-hook.
number (1-4).
PT SLT
5 (Recall)
5
C.Tone C.Tone
Dial 5. On-hook. Press RECALL. Dial 5. On-hook.
2-76 Operation
If a Host PBX is Connected
Operation
Waiting) offered by a host PBX or Central D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
Panaso
nic
PT SLT
FLASH / RCL
TRANSFER
6 4 Press Recall. Dial 64.
Enter desired number. Enter desired number.
Press FLASH/RCL or
TRANSFER and dial 64 .
Operation 2-77
Using User-supplied Equipment
PT / SLT
2 All Calls
FWD/DND
3 Busy voice mail
OR
4 No Answer extension no.
7 1 0 5 Busy/No Answer
C.Tone
Off-hook. Press FWD/DND Enter Enter voice mail On-hook.
or dial 710. required number. extension number.
T7436 / T7235
FWD/DND Cancel
DND (0/*/ext)
FWD-All Calls (ext)
FWD-Busy (ext) voice mail
FWD/DND FWD-No Answer (ext) extension no.
MENU PREV NEXT C.Tone
OR
Off-hook. Press NEXT Enter voice mail On-hook.
FWD/DND. extension number.
FWD-BSY/NA (ext)
FWD-CO Line (dial)
FWD-From (ext)
FWD-From Cancel (ext)
2-78 Operation
◆ Transferring calls
PT
extension no.
OR
(VM Transfer)
(DSS)
Operation
Press VM Transfer. Enter extension
number or press DSS.
PT / SLT
MESSAGE
OR
voice mail
extension no.
Off-hook. Press MESSAGE or
voice mail extension number.
*Indication tone
1s
Operation 2-79
Using User-supplied Equipment
Screening calls (Live Call Screening [LCS])
While a caller is leaving a message in your mailbox, you can monitor the call. If
desired, you can answer the call while monitoring. There are two methods
available (Default: Hands-free mode). In both modes, if you are currently having
a conversation, you will hear a call waiting tone.
Hands-free mode: You can monitor the message automatically through the
telephone speaker at the same time.
Private mode: You will hear an alert tone while the caller is leaving a message.
Before operating
• Create a Live Call Screening (LCS) button (Personal Programming).
• Select the mode, either Hands-free or Private (Personal Programming).
• Set the Password.
• Set the Live Call Screening feature.
PT
desired same Set
password password
7 9 9 OR
stored C.Tone
password Cancel
Off-hook. Dial 799. On-hook.
Enter password (3 digits) twice or once.
PT
password
(Live Call
Screening)
PT
(Live Call
Screening)
2-80 Operation
Operation Flowchart
The operations in the shaded areas can be hands-free operations.
PT
Operation
(Call Waiting Tone)
(Alert Tone)
*1
OR OR
MONITOR
Off-hook.
Stop (LCS Cancel)
FLASH / RCL
(Live Call (Live Call
Screening) Screening)
OR On-hook. OR Off-hook. Press
SP-PHONE Live Call
(LCS Cancel) Screening.
Press Press Live Call
FLASH/RCL Screening or
or LCS Cancel. SP-PHONE.
• The Live Call Screening (LCS) button light shows the feature status as follows:
Red on: LCS is on.
Off: LCS is off.
Flashing green rapidly: Alert ringing in the Private mode*2
Flashing green slowly: Live Call Screening is in use.*2
*2 The DSS button light is red while Live Call Screening is in use.
• The operator can clear a password at any extension.
Operation 2-81
Using User-supplied Equipment
Recording a conversation (Two-Way Recording)
You can record a conversation into a mailbox while talking on the phone.
PT
During a conversation
To stop recording,
(Two-Way
press this button again.
Record)
Press Two-Way
Record.
PT
During a conversation
extension no.
OR
(Two-Way
Transfer)
(DSS)
To stop recording,
press this button again.
2-82 Operation
Using the Display Proprietary Telephone
Calling Using the Call Log
(Incoming Call Log) [KX-T7433, KX-T7436, KX-T7230, KX-T7235 only]
If you do not answer an outside call, the caller’s information is recorded automatically in the call log.
When the SHIFT button light turns on, there is a call in the call log. You can also store a call log during
a conversation. (See “Recording a Call Log”.) Up to 15 calls can be logged per extension. You can
Operation
select how the 16th call is treated; either a new call can be disregarded or a new call overwrites the
oldest call. (Default: Overwrite)
You can modify and call back the logged numbers.
u To confirm
D – PT
While on-hook <Information sample>
CO02:Panasonic Outside line no. & name
OLD 012345678 Phone no.
Nina Thomas Caller’s name
OR
22 09:00 AM Receipt date & time
Seq01 2 Calls Sequence no. & calling time (max. 15)
NEW MENU CLR NEXT
D – PT
CLR
Press “CLR”.
Operation 2-83
◆ To call back
D – PT
When the desired number is displayed
CALL
Operation
Off-hook. Press “CALL”.
1 Overwrite
OR
5 6
0 Disregard C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 56. Dial 1 to overwrite On-hook.
or 0 to disregard.
Operation 2-83
Using the Display Proprietary Telephone
Recording a Call Log
[KX-T7433, KX-T7436, KX-T7230, KX-T7235 only]
You can record the caller’s information in the call log to call them back. If you do not answer the call,
the log is recorded automatically. You can see the call duration during the conversation.
D – PT
During a conversation
LOG
Press “LOG”.
D – PT
<Display example>
CO02 12:00'30
(CO)
Extension STA Speed
Features SYS Speed
Press CO. Call Log
LOG
* A KX-T7433 and a KX-T7230 users may change the displayed message as follows by pressing the CO button.
2-84 Operation
Denying Other People the Possibility of Seeing Your
Call Log (Incoming Call Log Lock) [KX-T7433, KX-T7436, KX-T7230, KX-T7235 only]
◆ To lock / unlock
D – PT
Operation
desired code same code Lock
5 7 OR
• If you forget the code, consult your operator. They can unlock the call log display of any extension (Incoming
Call Log Lock Control).
Operation 2-85
Using the Display Proprietary Telephone
Using the KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436 or
KX-T7235
– Using the KX-T7431 – Using the KX-T7235
– Using the KX-T7433 – Storing the names and numbers for station speed dialling
– Using the KX-T7436 – Display feature list
Operation
1 Press the MODE button repeatedly to show the desired display.
2 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired message is shown.
(See page 2-92 for the feature messages.)
3 Press the SELECT button or go off-hook to call the displayed party or to select the desired feature.
4 Enter parameters if required.
MODE MODE
< Initial Display > < Seventh Display > < Sixth Display >
1 Jan 10:10 Contrast: 3 Ringer: 3
MODE MODE
MODE MODE MODE
< Second Display > < Third Display > < Fourth Display > < Fifth Display >
System Speed Station Speed Extension Feature Access
If a parameter is required,
OR
the feature name and
parameter will flash.
* The names and phone numbers
should be stored beforehand. parameter
See page 2-91.
2-86 Operation
Using the KX-T7433
A KX-T7433 Panasonic proprietary telephone with a 3-line display allows you to make calls and operate
the features using the display message. You do not have to memorise the phone numbers or feature
numbers.
Operation
1 Press the SHIFT button repeatedly to show the third display.
Operation
2 Press the desired button, if required.
3 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired message is at the arrow.
(See page 2-92 for the feature messages.)
4 Press the CALL button or go off-hook to call the party or the SEL button to select the desired feature.
5 Enter parameters if required.
OLD1 NEW1
SHIFT
→A n n P a r k e r →B o b J o n e s →A B S T M S G O n 1 - 9
Alice Carol C.Pickup GRP
MENU CALL MENU CALL MENU SEL
OR OR If a parameter is required,
the feature name and
parameter will flash.
parameter
* The names and phone numbers should be stored beforehand. See page 2-91.
Operation 2-87
Using the Display Proprietary Telephone
Using the KX-T7436
A KX-T7436 Panasonic proprietary telephone with a 6-line display allows you to make calls and operate
the features using the display message. You do not have to memorise the phone numbers or feature
numbers.
AB KL
C MN Redialling using Calling using names
DE OPQR and numbers stored
FG S
one of the last five
HIJ T-Z outside call at your extension
MENU numbers (Station Speed
(Outgoing Call Log) Dialling)*
<Example> <Example>
To select 111 To select Panasonic
Adam Bob
Alice Carol
1234567890 Ann Parker KME
Ann Parker Casey
111 Beth Panasonic
Ben Johns Ched Ely
0987654321 Bob Jones Police
Beth Chris
000111222333 Carol Ronald
MENU PREV NEXT
100200300400500 Chris Home
MENU CLR MENU NEXT
If a parameter is required,
the parameter will flash. * The names and phone numbers should be stored beforehand. See
parameter page 2-91.
2-88 Operation
Operation using the soft buttons
1 Press the SHIFT button repeatedly to show the third display.
2 Press the desired button, if required.
3 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired message is at the arrow.
(See page 2-92 for the feature messages.)
4 Press the CALL button or go off-hook to call the party or the SEL button to select the desired feature.
5 Enter parameters if required.
Operation
< Initial Display >
1 Jan 15:00
OR OR If a parameter is required,
the parameter will flash.
parameter
* The names and phone numbers should be stored beforehand. See page 2-91.
Operation 2-89
Using the Display Proprietary Telephone
Using the KX-T7235
A KX-T7235 Panasonic proprietary telephone with a 6-line display allows you to make calls and operate
the features using the display message. You do not have to memorise the phone numbers or feature
numbers.
Operation
1 Press the desired function button on the initial display.
2 Press the desired function button or NEXT button until the desired message is displayed.
(See page 2-92 for the feature messages.)
3 Press the function button next to the desired party or the feature.
4 Enter parameters if required.
OR
If a parameter is required,
the parameter will flash.
* The names and phone numbers should be stored
parameter beforehand. See page 2-91.
2-90 Operation
Using the KX-T7235
A KX-T7235 Panasonic proprietary telephone with a 6-line display allows you to make calls and operate
the features using the display message. You do not have to memorise the phone numbers or feature
numbers.
Operation
1 Press the desired function button on the initial display.
Operation
2 Press the desired function button or NEXT button until the desired message is displayed.
(See page 2-92 for the feature messages.)
3 Press the function button next to the desired party or the feature.
4 Enter parameters if required.
< Initial Display >
1 Jan 10:00AM
Calling an intercom
call using the
Extension STA Speed
directory
Features SYS Speed
(Extension Dialling)
Call Log
<Example> CONT RING BGM
To select Beth
AB KL
C MN Redialling using Calling using names
DE OPQR and numbers stored
FG S
one of the last five
HIJ T-Z outside call at your extension
MENU numbers (Station Speed
(Outgoing Call Log) Dialling)*
<Example> <Example>
To select 111 To select Panasonic
Adam Bob
Alice Carol
1234567890 Ann Parker KME
Ann Parker Casey
111 Beth Panasonic
Ben Johns Ched Ely
0987654321 Bob Jones Police
Beth Chris
000111222333 Carol Ronald
MENU PREV NEXT
100200300400500 Chris Home
MENU CLR MENU NEXT
If a parameter is required,
the parameter will flash.
* The names and phone numbers should be stored
parameter beforehand. See page 2-91.
Operation 2-91
Using the Display Proprietary Telephone
Display feature list
You can access the following features. These displays can be shown by rotating the Jog Dial or
pressing the NEXT or PREV button after selecting “Features”. For their operation, see the respective
operating instructions in the list below.
DISPLAY DISPLAY
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
(KX-T7436/KX-T7235) (KX-T7431/KX-T7433)
Absent MSG Off ABST MSG Off Cancel the absent message. Refer to 2-50.
Absent MSG On (1-9) ABST MSG On 1-9 Set an absent message. Refer to 2-48 and
2-49.
C.Pickup Group C.Pickup GRP Pick up a call within your extension group.
Refer to 2-26 and 2-27.
Call Park (0-9) Call Park 0-9 Place a call on hold in a system parking
area. Refer to 2-31 and 2-32.
COS Primary (ext) COS Primary ext Select the primary Class of Service (COS)
mode for an extension*. Refer to 3-2.
COS Secondary (ext) COS Second ext Select the secondary Class of Service (COS)
mode for an extension*. Refer to 3-2.
Extrn BGM On/Off Ext-BGM On/Off Turn on/off the background music*.
Refer to 3-7.
Message Off (ext) MSG Off ext Cancel a notification. Refer to 2-18 and
2-19.
Message On (ext) MSG On ext Leave a notification so that the called party
may call you back. Refer to 2-18 and 2-19.
Night On/Off (1/0) Night Mode 1/0 Change the night service mode, night (On)
or day (Off)*.
(Pre-assigned extension can also change the
mode.) Refer to 3-5 and 3-6.
Page-Ext Answer (1-4) Page-E ANS 1-4 Answer the paged announcement through a
speaker. Refer to 2-28 and 2-58.
Paging External (0-4) Page Extrn 0-4 Page through the speaker. Refer to 2-53
and 2-54.
Paging Group (00-16) Page GRP 00-16 Page to all or a particular extension group.
Refer to 2-54 and 2-55.
Parallel On/Off (1/0) Parallel 1/0 Set whether a single line telephone
connected in parallel will ring (On) or not
(Off) when receiving a call. Refer to 2-70.
2-92 Operation
* The message is useful for the operators only.
Operation
FWD/DND Cancel FWD-BSY/NA (ext)
DND (0/ /ext) FWD-CO Line (dial)
FWD-All Calls
*
(ext) FWD-From (ext)
FWD-Busy (ext) FWD-From Cancel (ext)
FWD-No Answer (ext)
MENU PREV NEXT MENU PREV NEXT
Operation 2-93
Using the Display Proprietary Telephone
* The message is useful for the operators only.
2-94 Operation
This chapter shows the operators how to control the
extensions or the system.
Your system supports up to two operators.
Operator
Operation
Operator
Extension Control
You can assign either primary or secondary level of service for each extension.
PTand
PT / SLT
SLT
1 Primary
OR
7 9 extension no.
3 Secondary
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 79. Dial 1 for primary Enter extension On-hook.
or 3 for secondary. number.
T7431
MODE
→ COS Primary ext extension no.
SELECT MODE
C.Tone
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Enter On-hook.
“Feature Access” until “COS Primary” extension number.
is displayed. or “COS Second”
is displayed.
T7433
→C O S P r i m a r y ext
SHIFT FEAT COS Second ext
MENU SEL
extension no.
C.Tone
Press SHIFT Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until Press “SEL”. Enter On-hook.
until “FEAT” “COS Primary” or extension number.
is displayed. “COS Second” is
at the arrow.
T7436 / T7235
C.Tone
On-hook.
To continue
Press PROGRAM Dial 99. Enter programming Press STORE. Press PROGRAM
Operator
or PAUSE. input. or PAUSE.
When you (operator 1) are busy and an outside call comes to you directly, that call
is put in a waiting queue. When the number of calls in the queue exceeds the
assigned limit, calls will automatically be forwarded to operator 2.
You can check the condition of the queue with the Hurry-Up button light, and forward
the first call in the queue to a pre-assigned extension.
◆ To forward
PT
(Hurry-up)
Press Hurry-up.
PT / SLT
1 Day to Night
OR
7 8
0 Night to Day
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 78. Dial 1 for day to night On-hook.
or 0 for night to day.
Operator
T7431
1 Day to Night
MODE OR
→ Night Mode 1/0
SELECT MODE 0 Night to Day
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Dial 1 for day to night
“Feature Access” until “Night Mode” or 0 for night to day.
is displayed. is displayed.
C.Tone
On-hook.
T7433
→N i g h t M o d e 1/0
SHIFT FEAT Page-E ANS 1-4
MENU SEL
Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until Press “SEL”.
“FEAT” is displayed. “Night Mode” is at the arrow.
1 Day to Night
OR
0 Night to Day
C.Tone
Dial 1 for day to night On-hook.
or 0 for night to day.
1 Day to Night
OR
Features OR Night On/Off (1/0)
NEXT 0 Night to Day
C.Tone
Press “Features”. Press “Night On/Off”. Dial 1 for day to night On-hook.
Rotate Jog Dial or or 0 for night to day.
press “NEXT” until the
following is displayed.
• The Night button alternates the setting between Day and Night modes.
• To confirm the current mode, press the “#” key while on-hook.
• The Night button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Day mode
Red: Night mode
• Pre-assigned extension user can also change the mode.
You can broadcast background music in the office through external speakers.
PT / SLT
6 5
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 65. On-hook.
Operator
T7431
MODE
→ Ext-BGM On/Off
SELECT MODE
C.Tone
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial until Press SELECT. On-hook.
“Feature Access” “Ext-BGM On/Off” is
is displayed. displayed.
T7433
→E x t - B G M O n / O f f
SHIFT FEAT MSG Off ext
MENU SEL
C.Tone
Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until Press “SEL”. On-hook.
“FEAT” is displayed. “Ext-BGM On/Off”
is at the arrow.
T7436 / T7235
◆ To record
PT / SLT
7 1 2 1 OGM no.
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 7121. Enter OGM Record
nubmer (1-4). message.
AUTO DIAL
The message
is played back.
STORE
C.Tone C.Tone
Press STORE. On-hook.
◆ To play back
PT / SLT
The message
7 1 2 2 OGM no. is played back.
C.Tone C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 7122. Enter OGM On-hook.
number (1-4).
• To stop recording or playing back, press the AUTO DIAL / STORE button.
• Message recording limit
The total length must be under sixty four seconds or less. (Default: 32 seconds for OGM 1 and 3 and 0 second for
OGM 2 and 4)
• The optional unit or card is necessary to utilise this feature.
The ANSWER and RELEASE buttons on the Console are convenient for operators using headsets.
With the ANSWER button, you can answer all incoming calls to the paired telephone.
With the RELEASE button, you can disconnect the line during or after a conversation, or complete
transferring a call.
◆ To answer
PT & T7441
ANSWER
Operator
Press ANSWER. Talk.
◆ To transfer a call
PT & T7441
During a conversation with the headset or hands-free mode
desired no. RELEASE
The party
TRANSFER OR answers.
(DSS)
PT & T7441
During a conversation with the headset or hands-free mode
RELEASE
The party
(DSS) answers.
◆ To check-in
T7436 / T7235
YES
extension no.
Hotel Check in OR
NEXT OR
(DSS)
NO
Press “Hotel”. Press “Check in”. Enter extension Press “NEXT”.
number or press DSS. Press “YES” or “NO”.
◆ To check-out
T7436 / T7235
extension no.
Hotel Check out OR
NEXT
(DSS)
YES
other
Others charges
• It is possible to change the telephone and minibar charges. In this case, enter the charge after pressing the
“Telephone” or “Minibar” button.
Operator
Setting the alarm for other extensions (Wake-up Call)
The operator can remotely set/cancel the alarm for a desired extension. If the Alert button on Operator’s
extension turns red, it indicates that a guest has not responded to the wake-up call.
◆ To set
PT / SLT
extension no.
7 1 OR hour / minute
(DSS)
0 AM 0 One Time
OR OR
1 PM 1 Daily C.Tone
Dial 0 for AM Dial 0 for one time On-hook.
or 1 for PM. or 1 for daily.
T7436 / T7235
extension no.
NEXT
Hotel Wake up OR hour / minute
(DSS)
Press “Hotel”. Press “Wake up”. Enter extension Press “NEXT”. Enter hour (00-12)
number or press DSS. and minute (00-59).
1 PM 1 Daily C.Tone
Dial 0 for AM Dial 0 for one time Press “PROG”. Press “END”. Press “END”. Press “END”.
or 1 for PM. or 1 for daily.
◆ To cancel
PT / SLT
extension no.
7 0 OR
(DSS)
C.Tone
T7436 / T7235
extension no.
NEXT
Hotel Wake up OR
(DSS)
C.Tone
Press “CLR”. Press “END”. Press “END”. Press “END”.
D – PT
extension no.
7 2 OR
(DSS)
T7436 / T7235
extension no.
NEXT
Hotel Wake up OR
(DSS)
T7436 / T7235
Operator
Unanswered CLR
extension number
(Alert)
is displayed.
Press “CLR” to
Press “Alert”. clear.
NEXT
Press “NEXT” to
go to the next
unanswered extension.
MENU
Press “MENU”
to exit.
PT / SLT
Date Time Ext Depatment code CO Dial Number Duration Charge Code CD
PT / SLT
Operator
1 Print
OR
7 9 4
0 Clear
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 794. Dial 1 to print On-hook.
or 0 to clear.
*****************************************************
* System working report *
*****************************************************
[ 1] Date of record
Start : 1. Jan. 1999 11:00’ AM
End : 1. Jan. 1999 7:23’ AM
[ 2] Incoming calls
CO 01 02 03
Incoming calls 44 38 47
Answered calls 39 37 44
Customising
Customising Your Phone (Station Programming)
If you use a Panasonic proprietary telephone
(e.g. KX-T7436), you can customise your
telephone functions. For example, you can
!!
• If you change your desks and the extension line,
change the initial settings or button functions clear all settings first. The old settings will remain in
according to your needs. the previous extension user’s memory.
Initial Settings
The original settings are shown in bold letters in the shaded boxes. Find and mark your desired
selections for programming.
• If nothing is entered within one minute in the programming mode, the mode returns to the normal status.
• To exit the mode at any time, lift the handset.
To continue
Press PROGRAM Dial 99. Follow programming Press STORE. Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE. input. or PAUSE.
No line 1 1
Which line do you prefer to
seize when you go off-hook An idle outside line 1 2
to make calls?
Outside line no.
(Preferred Line Assignment A pre-assigned outside line 1 3
(01–54)
– Outgoing)
The Intercom line 1 INTERCOM
Customising
you prefer when a caller is through the telephone speaker. 1 1
recording a message in your (Hands-free mode)
mailbox? Only an alert tone is heard.
(Live Call Screening Mode Set) 1 2
(Private mode)
To continue
PAUSE PAUSE
Press PROGRAM Dial 99. Enter programming input, Press HOLD. Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE. except for suffix number. or PAUSE.
To continue
Press PROGRAM Dial 99. Press CO, Follow Press STORE. Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE. DSS or PF. programming or PAUSE.
input.
Programmable Button
Button Programming Input
CO DSS PF
Loop-CO ✔
Group-CO ✔ Outside line group no. (1–8)
MESSAGE ✔ ✔ 3
FWD/DND (Forward/Do Not Disturb) ✔ ✔ ✔ 4
SAVE ✔ ✔ ✔ 5
Account ✔ ✔ ✔ 6
CONF (Conference) ✔ ✔ ✔ 7
Log-In/Log-Out*2 ✔ 8 0 Receiving group no.
Night*2 ✔ ✔ 8 0 0
Call Pickup Deny*2 ✔ ✔ 8 0 1
Call Waiting*4 ✔ ✔ 8 0 2
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)*2 ✔ ✔ 8 0 3
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)* 2
✔ ✔ 8 0 4
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call (DND for DDI)*2
✔ ✔ 8 0 5
Paging Deny* 2
✔ ✔ 8 0 7
Paralleled Telephone Connection*2 ✔ ✔ 8 0 8
Pickup Dialling*2 ✔ ✔ 8 0 9
Customising
One-Touch Dialling with Auto Hold ✔ ✔ ✔ 8 Desired no.*1 (max. 24 digits)
Terminate ✔ ✔ ✔ 9
• *1 “ ”, “#”, FLASH/RCL, PAUSE, SECRET (INTERCOM) and — (CONF) can also be stored.
– If you do not want to display the stored number, press the SECRET (INTERCOM) button before and after the
numbers you wish to conceal.
– If you store an external party’s number, you should first store a line access number (9, 81 to 88).
– If you need to enter an account code, you can enter the specified account code before the line access
number.
<Example>
SECRET
49 1234 # 9 [ 123 4567 ]
Account code feature no. Account code Account code delimiter Automatic line Phone number
access number
• *2 Pressing this button while on-hook or hearing a dial tone changes the setting (on or off) of the corresponding
feature.
• *3 This button is used for the voice mail integration feature.
• *4 Pressing this button changes the settings as follows.
To continue
AUTO DIAL
AUTO DIAL
To continue
Press PROGRAM Dial 99. Press CO, Dial 2. Press STORE. Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE. DSS or PF. or PAUSE.
To continue
PAUSE PAUSE
Dial 99. Dial 8. Enter ID code Follow Press Press
Press (4 digits). programming HOLD. HOLD. Press
PROGRAM input. PROGRAM
or PAUSE. or PAUSE.
Customising
OR
printing each extension SEL CLR HOLD
2 Extension
Outside line
no.no. (01-54) Clearing
charge, outside charge
OR
or account code SEL AUTO DIAL HOLD
charge. 2
3 Extensiontable
Account no. no. (001-128) Print out
STORE
SEL
Viewing, clearing or 4 Extension no. Viewing
AUTO DIAL
Assigning an account CLR
72 Extensiontable
Account no. no. (001-128) Extension
New account
no.no. (10 digits)
code. STORE
• You cannot print out the account code charge of the account table number (01) by SMDR.
Programming Information
You can customise your system according to your application. You can control telephone
conditions for each extension, extension group, Class of Service, etc.. For example, you can restrict
some extensions from calling external parties. Furthermore, the programmed data, such as system
speed dialling, can be used by all extensions.
Your system already has default settings (factory installed). Most of the programming is done by
your dealer. Consult your dealer about system applications and re-programming according to your
needs.
Only frequently changed programming items (User Programming) are shown in this manual. If you
would like to change the following features, extensions which meet certain conditions can
re-program them at any time.
Required Telephone
A Panasonic Proprietary Telephone with display (e.g. KX-T7433, KX-T7436)
User Password
To enter the programming mode, a user password (4-7digits) is required. It should be programmed
through system programming beforehand. Check your password (Default:1234).
Conditions
Only one extension, which is on-hook and holding no calls, is available at one time. If another
extension is programming, “Another Use” is displayed.
List
Before programming, decide your selections and write them down in the list for each programming
item. These are useful for easy programming and future reference. Your dealer also has
programming tables which contain all of the assignments. You may ask for photo copies of these
tables to be aware of the features /conditions available.
Soft buttons
The message line guides you through programming and lets you confirm your selection. For example,
when “Jack No? →” is displayed, enter the jack number. The display shows up to 16 characters at a
time. To scroll the display, press → or ←. The function line shows you the function of the Soft button
located below it. When the SHIFT button light beside the display is on, subtitles are available.
Press the SHIFT button to confirm the available functions.
Customising
Device Port [XDP]), the jack number is determined as Jack XX-1 for a proprietary telephone and Jack
XX-2 for a single line telephone. The display may show XX-2, even if an extension has not set XDP.
If you do not know the jack number or extension number, check it as shown below.
PAUSE PAUSE
Confirmation
To confirm your entry after storing data;
• The STORE button light: Lights red.
• Confirmation Tone:
– One beep: Your entry is accepted.
– Three beeps: Your entry is rejected.
PROGRAM
OR user password
PAUSE
2. Programming
SKP+ SKP–
OR
Press SKP+. Press SKP-.
To continue programming
To end
Customising
number (3 digits).
To continue entering selections
NEXT OR PREV
Press NEXT. Press PREV.
SELECT
Press SELECT.
PROGRAM
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
Entering characters 2
• Press the desired character key.
• Press the matching Soft button, press the SELECT* (AUTO ANSWER) button or rotate
the Jog Dial as needed.
• Repeat the appropriate steps for the remaining characters.
Combination Table 1
Jog Dial
Display sequence by rotating the Jog Dial
keys
1 1 Q q R r S s T t ···
2 2 A a B b C c D d ···
3 3 D d E e F f G g ···
4 4 G g H h I i J j ···
5 5 J j K k L l M m ···
6 6 M m N n O o P p ···
7 7 P p Q q R r S s ···
8 8 T t U u V v W w ···
9 9 W w X x Y y Z z ···
0 0 (space) ! ? . , ’ : ; ···
* / + – = < > # $ ···
# # $ % & @ ( ) A a ···
Customising
<Example> To enter “Ann”,
A n n
After setting the current date and time, the proprietary telephone displays the current date and time
while on-hook.
• After changing the desired entries, you can press the STORE button. You do not have to perform the rest of
the steps.
• The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed.
• You cannot leave an entry empty.
• The clock is automatically adjusted in case of ISDN.
You can store the phone numbers of up to 500 frequently dialled numbers.
Default : No entry
To end
To continue
NEXT OR PREV
Press NEXT. Press PREV.
SELECT
Press SELECT.
Customising
• The programming list is on page 4-17. The directory is on page 6-10.
• If the desired number is more than 24 digits, divide the number and store it into two or more speed dial numbers.
• “ ”, “#”, FLASH/RCL, PAUSE, SECRET (INTERCOM) and — (CONF) can also be stored.
– If you do not want to display the stored number, press the SECRET (INTERCOM) button before and after the
numbers you wish to conceal.
– If you store an external party’s number, you should first store a line access number (9, 81 to 88).
– If you need to enter an account code, you can enter the specified account code before the line access number.
<Example>
SECRET
49 1234 # 9 [ 1 201 123 4567 ]
Account code feature no. Account code Account code delimiter Automatic Line access number Phone number
• The System Speed Dialling numbers are used for the call identification. For a proper operation, a hyphen must be
inserted after the line access number. Additionally, the area code must be stored always (even for local numbers
in the same area).
You can store the corresponding name of the speed dialling number. These names are displayed when
making call with the display operation. (See “How to Use the Display”(Operation))
To enter characters, see page 4-12.
Default : No entry
To end
To continue
NEXT OR PREV
Press NEXT. Press PREV.
SELECT
Press SELECT.
Customising
017 060
018 061
019 062
020 063
021 064
022 065
023 066
024 067
025 068
026 069
027 070
028 071
029 072
030 073
031 074
032 075
033 076
034 077
035 078
036 079
037 080
038 081
039 082
040 083
041 084
042 085
Speed Speed
Name Phone no. Name Phone no.
dial no. dial no.
086 129
087 130
088 131
089 132
090 133
091 134
092 135
093 136
094 137
095 138
096 139
097 140
098 141
099 142
100 143
101 144
102 145
103 146
104 147
105 148
106 149
107 150
108 151
109 152
110 153
111 154
112 155
113 156
114 157
115 158
116 159
117 160
118 161
119 162
120 163
121 164
122 165
123 166
124 167
125 168
126 169
127 170
128 171
Customising
189 232
190 233
191 234
192 235
193 236
194 237
195 238
196 239
197 240
198 241
199 242
200 243
201 244
202 245
203 246
204 247
205 248
206 249
207 250
208 251
209 252
210 253
211 254
212 255
213 256
214 257
Speed Speed
Name Phone no. Name Phone no.
dial no. dial no.
258 301
259 302
260 303
261 304
262 305
263 306
264 307
265 308
266 309
267 310
268 311
269 312
270 313
271 314
272 315
273 316
274 317
275 318
276 319
277 320
278 321
279 322
280 323
281 324
282 325
283 326
284 327
285 328
286 329
287 330
288 331
289 332
290 333
291 334
292 335
293 336
294 337
295 338
296 339
297 340
298 341
299 342
300 343
Customising
361 404
362 405
363 406
364 407
365 408
366 409
367 410
368 411
369 412
370 413
371 414
372 415
373 416
374 417
375 418
376 419
377 420
378 421
379 422
380 423
381 424
382 425
383 426
384 427
385 428
386 429
Speed Speed
Name Phone no. Name Phone no.
dial no. dial no.
430 465
431 466
432 467
433 468
434 469
435 470
436 471
437 472
438 473
439 474
440 475
441 476
442 477
443 478
444 479
445 480
446 481
447 482
448 483
449 484
450 485
451 486
452 487
453 488
454 489
455 490
456 491
457 492
458 493
459 494
460 495
461 496
462 497
463 498
464 499
To end
NEXT OR PREV
Customising
Press NEXT. Press PREV.
SELECT
Press SELECT.
• The leading number(s) should be the same as the assigned number(s) for Flexible Numbering. Consult your
dealer.
• A double entry is invalid.
You can store the name of an extension user. This is useful if you want to know who is calling, or who
you are calling when making an intercom call using the directory.
To enter characters, see page 4-12.
Default : No entry
To end
NEXT OR PREV
Press NEXT. Press PREV.
SELECT
Press SELECT.
01-1 01-2
02-1 02-2
03-1 03-2
04-1 04-2
05-1 05-2
06-1 06-2
07-1 07-2
08-1 08-2
09-1 09-2
10-1 10-2
11-1 11-2
12-1 12-2
13-1 13-2
Customising
14-1 14-2
15-1 15-2
16-1 16-2
17-1 17-2
18-1 18-2
19-1 19-2
20-1 20-2
21-1 21-2
22-1 22-2
23-1 23-2
24-1 24-2
25-1 25-2
26-1 26-2
27-1 27-2
28-1 28-2
29-1 29-2
30-1 30-2
31-1 31-2
32-1 32-2
Jack Jack
Extension no. Name Extension no. Name
no. no.
33-1 33-2
34-1 34-2
35-1 35-2
36-1 36-2
37-1 37-2
38-1 38-2
39-1 39-2
40-1 40-2
41-1 41-2
42-1 42-2
43-1 43-2
44-1 44-2
45-1 45-2
46-1 46-2
47-1 47-2
48-1 48-2
49-1 49-2
50-1 50-2
51-1 51-2
52-1 52-2
53-1 53-2
54-1 54-2
55-1 55-2
56-1 56-2
57-1 57-2
58-1 58-2
59-1 59-2
60-1 60-2
61-1 61-2
62-1 62-2
63-1 63-2
64-1 64-2
Portable Station
DECT
Safety Instructions
Take special care to follow the safety suggestions listed below to use the Panasonic DECT Portable
Station (PS).
Safety
1) The charger should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating
instructions or as marked on the charger.
2) When the PS is not being used, turn the power off. When left unused for a long period of time,
the charger should be unplugged from the household AC outlet.
Installation
Environment
1) Do not use this PS and the charger near water – for example, near a bath tub, washbowl, sink,
etc. Damp basements should also be avoided.
2) The PS and the charger should be kept away from heat sources such as radiators, kitchen
ranges, etc. They also should not be placed in rooms where the temperature is less than 5°C or
greater than 40°C.
Placement
1) Do not place heavy objects on top of the PS and charger.
2) Care should be taken so that objects do not fall onto and liquids are not spilled into the PS and
charger. Do not subject the PS and charger to excessive smoke, dust, mechanical vibration, or
shock.
3) Place the charger on a flat surface.
Battery
To reduce the risk of fire or injury to persons, read and follow these instructions.
Noise
Occasional noise or interference may occur due to other sources of electromagnetic radiation, such
as refrigerators, microwave ovens, faxes, TVs, radios, or personal computers.
If noise affects your telephone calls, keep the PS away from other electrical appliances.
WARNING:
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR ANY
TYPE OF MOISTURE.
Portable Station
DECT
Capacity
You can use the following number of PS in each system.
KX-TD816 16
KX-TD1232 64
Up to four calls can be made at the same time in the range.
Registration
You must register your PS in the system and determine its extension number before initial use.
For PS registration, consult your dealer.
Display
The display has two lines with 16 characters per line, and related symbols to show information for your
phone activities.
Furthermore, your PS can show the guidance messages which show the selectable buttons and help
you operate your PS without the operating instructions. Refer to “Customising Your PS – PS
Programming”.
Shows the strength of the receiving Shows the strength of the battery.
radio signal from the Cell Station (CS).
Fully charged.
Strong Medium
Low
The battery needs to
Weak (Flashing) be charged. The call
will be disconnected
[Display: NO SERVICE] within 3 minute after
(Flashing) Out of range. a beep tone sounds.
Move closer to the CS.
Portable Station
Cord holder
DECT
Charger
To power outlet
(230 VAC, 50 Hz)
Fixed feature numbers cannot be changed. However, you can change the flexible numbers to other
numbers for easier use. If you want to change the numbers, consult your dealer. In this manual, the
default numbers (factory installed) are used for operations.
A flexible number is shown as (half-shaded key). Use the new programmed number if you have
changed the feature number. Write the new number in the “Feature Number List” (Appendix).
Tones
You will hear various tones, during or after an operation, for confirmation. Refer to “What is This
Tone?” (Appendix).
Examples
The displays and the illustrations shown as examples are from a PS connected to the KX-TD1232.
Restrictions
Some features may be restricted at your PS under system programming. Consult your manager or
dealer.
Icon Descriptions
There are some icons which show you the feature availability, notes and action to operate the features.
For details, refer to “Before Operating the Telephones – Icon Descriptions” (Operation).
While operating the PS, you can easily refer to the Icons noted on the inside back cover of this manual.
INT'
INTERCOM Button: Used to make F1-F3 Flexible CO Buttons (F1 through F3):
or receive intercom calls. Used to make or receive an outside
call. A F1 button is already assigned
TALK Button: Used to make, receive as a Loop-CO button. Pressing this
or end calls. button seizes an idle line
automatically.
F1 through F3 buttons can be used as
C CANCEL Button: Used to end calls, the desired function buttons. (Button
or exit the directory or Function assignment is required.)
mode. If the term is in parentheses like
(Save), it means this button has
CLEAR / TRANSFER Button: Used become the “Save” button.
CLR
to clear incorrect digits while
entering numbers or transfer a call BOOK Button: Used to enter into the
to another extension. directory mode or select a menu in
the Function mode.
HOLD Button: Used to place a call
on hold.
FLASH Button: Used to disconnect
a current call and make another call.
FUNCTION Button: Used to enter
into the Function mode or access
features by pressing additional keys. Power Switch: Used to switch the
power ON ( ) or OFF ( ).
OK AUTO / OK Button: Used for System
Speed Dialling and storing program Volume Control Button: Used to
changes. select the ringer volume (seven
levels, off and vibration mode) during
Portable Station
on-hook or ringing status, or receiver
REDIAL Button: Used to redial the
volume (three levels) during a
last number dialled.
DECT
conversation. The volume levels are
indicated by the number of asterisks
on the display.
Combination Buttons*
Some special features can be used by combining two buttons.
ABC
FWD/DND Button ( ): JKL TONE Button: Used to change the
Used to set the Call Forwarding dialling mode temporarily to tone.
or Do Not Disturb (DND)
features.
Feature title
PS Description
OK OK name OK
<Example>
Operation steps
MODIFY BOOK PS-NEW-ENTRY ENTER NAME
=1/99 REMAINS
Panasonic Panasonic
ENTER PHONE-NO.
The display examples
may be shown on the
Press FUNCTION
and BOOK.
Press OK. Press OK. Enter name*1
(max. 16 characters).
Press OK. shaded part to help
you operate.
phone no. OK C The description of the
icons are explained
Panasonic STORED
on page 5-7 and the
0123456789
inside back cover of
Enter phone number*2 Press OK. Press CANCEL. this manual.
(max. 32 digits).
Conditions Hints
☞ Customising Your PS
• PS Programming – Directory Lock Control
Lock or unlock the Call Directories.
Making Calls
PT and
PS SLT
OR extension no. C
INT'
<Example>
When you call Mr. Thomas....
Mr. Thomas’s extension number is 223.
PT and
PS SLT
!!
Portable Station
• You can also finish the conversation by placing the PS
on the charger or pressing TALK button. • Do you have an extension directory?
DECT
• If “ ” flashes, move towards the Cell Station until the Complete the directory on page 6-10 and make
sign stops flashing and try again. a copy for your reference.
• Confirming the dialled number before
connecting
You can go off-hook after confirming the
number you dialled. If you misdial, press the
CLEAR button to clear each number from the
right.
• If you go off-hook first and then misdial,
press the FLASH button and enter the number
again.
• Handover
Even if you move during a conversation, the
linking Cell Station (CS) will automatically
switch without disconnecting the call.
Handover is available only during a
conversation (except a conference call). It is
not available when a switched CS is busy or
there is no CS in the new range.
PT and
PS SLT
F1-F3
phone no. C
(CO)
PS
WXYZ
OR
TUV phone no. C
to
TUV TUV
☞
You can go off-hook after confirming the
Customising Your PS number you dialled. If you misdial, press the
• PBX Programming – Customising the Buttons CLEAR button to clear each number from the
Create or re-arrange the Loop-CO button, Group-CO right.
button and Single-CO button. • If you go off-hook first and then misdial,
press the FLASH button and enter the number
again.
• Call information
The following information can be referred to by
repeatedly pressing the CO button in use.
– Phone number (outgoing call) or
call duration (incoming call)
– Meter – Call charge
When you receive a call, the DECT portable station (PS) rings or vibrates, and the outside line number
or extension number of the receiving call will appear on the display.
T7431
PS
OR
C
F1-F3
(CO)
☞
Press the Volume Control button until
Customising Your PS “VIBRATION CALL” is displayed. This button
• PS Programming — To change the initial settings also changes the ringer volume which is
– Quick Answering Mode Set indicated by the number of asterisks on the
Select to answer calls by just lifting the ringing PS display.
off the charger. • If the PS is on the charger, just lift up the PS
– Automatic Answer Mode Set (Quick Answering).
Select the answering mode when using the • If a headset is connected to the PS,
headset. you can select to answer a call without lifting
your PS (Automatic Answer Mode).
Portable Station
DECT
Redial
PS
Redialling one of the last five outside phone numbers you dialled
(Outgoing Call Log)
PS
OR
F1-F3
(CO)
• You can also search the desired log number by pressing the Next or Previous button after pressing the REDIAL button.
PS
CLR
– Holding
– Denying other people the possibility of retrieving your held calls
• If a call is not retrieved within a specified time, you will hear an alarm as a reminder.
• If a call is not retrieved within fifteen minutes, it is automatically disconnected.
Holding (regular)
PS
During a conversation
Press HOLD.
◆ To retrieve a call
PS
● At the holding extension
F1-F3
(CO)
OR
INT'
Portable Station
Press flashing Talk.
DECT
CO or INTERCOM.
(CO)
JKL
holding
extension no.
C.Tone
Dial 51. Enter holding Talk.
extension number.
PS
During a conversation
◆ To retrieve a call
PS
F1-F3
(CO)
OR
INT'
Transferring to an extension
PS
During a conversation
CLR
extension no. C
C.Tone
Enter extension Announce. Press CANCEL.
Press number.
TRANSFER.
The destination is confirmed before
sending. This can be disregarded.
PS
Portable Station
During a conversation
F1-F3
DECT
(CO)
OR
CLR
phone no. C
• To return to the held call before the destination answers, press the TRANSFER button, corresponding CO or
the INTERCOM button.
• To return to the conversation after completing the transfer to an external party, press the corresponding CO
button.
• If you hear an alert tone, the destination extension did not answer the call. Answer the call.
– Storing the names and numbers – Making calls using the Call Directories
– Entering characters
PS Dialling Directory: You can store up to 100 private names and phone numbers of outside parties.
All directory items are stored in alphabetical order.
PBX System Speed Dialling Directory:
You can make a call via the system by selecting system-assigned names and
phone numbers (500 max.).
PBX Extension Dialling Directory:
You can make a call via the system by selecting system-assigned extension
names.
PBX Station Speed Dialling Directory:
You can make a call via the system by selecting privately assigned names and
phone numbers (10 max.).
MODIFY BOOK
OK
PBX-STA-DELETE PS-DELETE
• It is not possible to edit items in the PBX System Speed Dialling or PBX Extension Dialling Directories.
• * Only displayed when registered to a Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System. It is not displayed when out of
range.
PS
OK OK name OK
<Example>
MODIFY BOOK PS-NEW-ENTRY ENTER NAME Panasonic Panasonic
=1/99 REMAINS ENTER PHONE-NO.
Press FUNCTION Press OK. Press OK. Enter name*1 Press OK.
and BOOK. (max. 16 characters).
phone no. OK C
Panasonic STORED
0123456789
• To store a phone number only, skip the step for entering name.
• *1 To enter characters, see page 5-22.
• *2 The line access number is not required.
Portable Station
DECT
PS
OK OK
<Example>
Press FUNCTION Press OK. Press BOOK. Press OK. Press BOOK until
and BOOK. the desired item is
displayed.
Press OK. Edit name*1 Press OK. Edit phone number*2 Press OK.
(max. 16 characters). (max. 32 digits).
Press CANCEL.
PS
OK OK
<Example>
Press FUNCTION Press OK. Press BOOK until the Press OK. Press BOOK until blank
and BOOK. message above appears. (for new entry) or the
desired item (for edition)
is displayed.
Press OK. Enter or edit name* 1 Press OK. Enter or edit Press OK.
(max. 10 characters). phone number* 2
(max. 16 digits).
C
Enter a line access number (9 or 81-88)
before an external phone number.
Press CANCEL.
Portable Station
To move the cursor on the number, press the # (to the left) or (to the right) button.
DECT
PS
OK OK
<Example>
Press FUNCTION Press OK. Press BOOK until the Press OK.
and BOOK. message above apears.
OK C
Panasonic DELETED
0123456789
PS Dialling Directory PBX System Speed PBX Extension PBX Station Speed
Dialling Directory Dialling Directory Dialling Directory
• These displays will not appear when registered to a non-Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System or when out of
range. In this case, the directory item appears after pressing the BOOK button.
• You can transfer a call to a number stored in the directory. In this case, press the TRANSFER button during
a conversation and then dial by selecting the directory item.
PS <If required>
Next
OK
first letter of OK OR
desired name
Previous
<Example>
Portable Station
Press BOOK until Press OK. Enter first letter of Press OK. Press # or
the desired directory desired name* until desired item
DECT
display appears. appears.
Press TALK.
☞ Customising Your PS
• PS Programming — To change the initial settings
– Directory Lock Control
Lock or unlock the Call Directories.
• To erase the each letter from the right, press the CLEAR button.
• To move the cursor, press the # (to the left) or (to the right) button.
Combination Table
1 Ä ä Ö ö Ü ü 1
2 A a B b C c 2
3 D d E e F f 3
4 G g H h I i 4
5 J j K k L l 5
6 M m N n O o 6
7 P p Q q R r S s 7
8 T t U u V v 8
9 W w X x Y y Z z 9
0 (space) . : / – ( ) 0
Moves the cursor to the left
# Moves the cursor to the right
A n n
Your PS can be used in parallel with a proprietary wired (PT) or single line telephone (SLT).
When in the SXDP mode, incoming calls to a wired telephone also reach the paired PS, while incoming
calls to a PS only reach the PS. If one telephone is busy, you cannot make a call from the other
telephone.
The “Call Forwarding – All Calls” feature for the wired telephone can also be set from the paired PS so
that all incoming calls to the wired telephone will be forwarded to the desired destination.
◆ To set
PS
C.Tone
Press TALK. Press 481. Enter extension number Press CANCEL.
of the paired telephone.
◆ To cancel
PS
T7431
GHI TUV C
Portable Station
C.Tone
Press TALK. Press 480. Press CANCEL.
DECT
◆ To confirm the extension number of the paired telephone
PS
T7431
C.Tone
Press TALK. Press 485. Press CANCEL.
PS
◆ To cancel the “Call Forwarding – All Calls” for the paired telephone
T7431
PS
C.Tone
Press TALK. Press 4840. Press CANCEL.
• The Outgoing Call Log memory can be used by both the PS and paired telephone.
• Some wired telephones are restricted to perform this feature.
◆ To lock / unlock
PS
While on-hook
<When locked>
KEYPAD LOCKED
PRESS F FOR 2SEC
Press FUNCTION
for 2 seconds.
Portable Station
DECT
KEY
OK
<Example>
To cancel the Do Not Disturb feature
PS
OK OK C
Press TALK. Press Press OK. Press BOOK until Press OK. Press 0. Press CANCEL.
FUNCTION. “FWD/DND” is
displayed.
• These buttons can also be activated using a combination of buttons. For descriptions and button combinations,
refer to “Before Operating the DECT Portable Station – Button Descriptions”.
Most of the wired telephone features are also supported by a system with a DECT portable station (PS).
For feature descriptions and details, refer to the respective features in Operation (Section 2).
Easy Dialling
With one touch button F1-F3
Portable Station
To set / cancel
PQRS GHI set C
cancel
DECT
To dial
Redial To store
Saving the number and redialling During a conversation or while hearing a busy tone
F1-F3
(Saved Number Redial) OK
(Save)
To dial
F1-F3
(Save)
When the Dialled Line is Busy or To set To answer a call-back ringing and call (outside call)
There is No Answer While hearing a busy tone
phone no.
Reserving a busy line MNO C
Leaving a message waiting To leave a message waiting indication when the called extension is busy
indication or does not answer
(Message Waiting) GHI C
OR
DEF
Cancel
To call back
PQRS ABC
OR
DEF
Alternating the Calling Method Voice to ring calling or ring to voice calling
(Alternate Calling – Ring / Voice)
Receiving Calls
Answering a Call Ringing at
Another Telephone Outside call
GHI
(Call Pickup)
Directed
GHI extension no.
Group
GHI
Talking to Two Parties Alternately When talking to one party while the other party is on hold
(Call Splitting) When either party is an outside party When both parties are an extension party
F1-F3
(CO)
OR
INT'
Answering a Call Waiting To talk to the new caller by terminating the current call
While hearing a Call Waiting tone
F1-F3
(CO)
OR
INT'
(CO)
Portable Station
OR
INT'
DECT
Three-party Conversation
Adding a third party during a GHI desired party’s no. GHI
conversation
(Conference)
Leaving a conference When you are talking with two extension or one extension party and one external party
C
When you are talking with two external parties (Unattendant Conference)
GHI
To dial
F1-F3
(Save)
OR
ABC
All Calls C
ABC
extension no.
Busy
DEF
extension no.
No answer
GHI
extension no.
Busy / No answer
JKL
extension no.
To Outside Line
MNO
line access no. phone no.
Follow Me
PQRS your extension no.
By ISDN Line
WXYZ ABC
CFU your MSN phone no.
WXYZ DEF
CFB
WXYZ GHI CFNR
To cancel
PQRS
OR
ABC
Leaving a Call Distribution Group GHI JKL group no. For Log-In to specific group C
(Log-In / Log-Out)
For Log-In to all groups
group no. For Log-Out from specific group
For Log-Out from all groups
OR
Announce.
MNO DEF
External
MNO ABC
speaker no. Specific
All Announce.
Group
DEF
MNO
group no. Specific
Announce.
All
OR
Announce.
MNO DEF
Through a speaker
CLR
MNO ABC speaker no. Specific
All Announce.
CLR
MNO DEF
group no. Specific
All Announce.
Portable Station
Answering a Paged GHI ABC speaker no. Page through a speaker
Announcement
DECT
GHI DEF Page through a wired telephone
PM Daily
To cancel
PQRS MNO C
Operator
No backup station
To cancel
OR
INT'
OR
INT'
Telephone Cancel
(Connected Line Identification
Restriction [COLR])
Day / Night Service Status Switching modes using the feature number
[Pre-assigned extension user only]
PQRS TUV Day mode C
Night mode
Night All
Portable
Portable Station
Connected To forwarding your calls to a mailbox
Voice mail integration
PQRS
Call Forwarding no. VM extension no.
DECT
C
DECT
OR
ABC
Station
Transferring calls
F1-F3
extension no.
(VM
Transfer)
VM extension no.
OR
DEF
(Two-Way
Transfer)
Programming Information
You can customise your telephone functions with your DECT portable station (PS).
PS Programming: You can change the initial settings according to your needs.
PBX Programming: You can enter into the proprietary wired telephone (PT) programming mode
(Station Programming) and program several items for your PS.
PROGRAMMING
OK
* This display is used for PS registration and not displayed if the DECT System Lock is set.
For details, consult your dealer.
You may be required to enter a PS Programming password or a DECT System Lock password
when entering the PS Programming mode.
Depending on the password, the number of possible programming items changes for PS security
reasons. There are three password levels.
Level 0: A password is not required.
Level 1: A PS Programming password is required.
Level 2: A System Lock password is required.
PS Programming password
Level 0 – 2 Level 0 – 1
Not required. Not required.
are possible. are possible.
No password
Level 0 – 2 Level 0 is Level 0 – 1 Level 0 is
or
are possible. possible. are possible. possible.
If incorrect password
Portable Station
DECT
Next
OK OK OR
Previous
OK password OK password
Press BOOK to Press OK. Enter password Press OK. Enter same
select “ENABLE”. (4 digits). password again.
OK C
OK OK password OK
Press FUNCTION Press OK. Press OK. Enter password Press OK.
and then BOOK twice. (4 digits).
Next
OR OK C
Previous
PS PASSWORD OR
DECT-SYS LOCK DECT-SYS LOCK
= ENABLE = ENABLE = DISABLE
OK OK password OK
Press FUNCTION Press OK. Press OK. Enter password Press OK.
and then BOOK twice. (4 digits).
To continue
Next
OR OK C
Previous
<Example>
Portable Station
Do you prefer the keypad No (OFF)
BACKLIGHT
backlight? 0
DECT
= ON
(Keypad Backlight Mode Set) Yes (ON)
English
German
Dutch
Auto (English)*2
Portable Station
Do you prefer to use the DECT Yes (ENABLE)
DECT-SYS LOCK System Lock password?
2
= DISABLE (DECT System Lock Password
DECT
Set) No (DISABLE)
*1 If you set the ringer volume off or vibration mode using the Volume Control button, the PS doesn’t ring
regardless of this setting.
*2 If you are connected to a Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System while the default setting is still “AUTO”, the
display language will depend on the setting of the system.
*3 The display of this item is only displayed when “Automatic Answer Mode Set” is set to “INT/CO” or “INT ONLY”.
*4 The display of this item is only displayed when more than two fixed terminals are connected.
*5 The display of this item is only displayed when your PS is registered to a Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System
and “ ” is displayed.
*6 Call log numbers are cleared only when your PS is registered to a system other than a Panasonic Digital Super
Hybrid System.
*7 For the Guidance menu, some keys work differently from the normal use.
PBX Programming
You can enter into the proprietary wired telephone (PT) programming mode and program several items
for your PS.
The available programs are listed below.
Initial Settings
Customising the Buttons
Charge Fee Management
Initial Settings
PS
OK OK
programming C
input
No line
to make calls?
Outside line no.
(Preferred Line Assignment A pre-assigned outside line DEF
(01–54)
– Outgoing)
INT'
The Intercom line
PS
OK OK
To continue
F1-F3
programming C
input
Portable Station
Single-CO Outside line no. (01–54)
DECT
One-Touch Dialling ABC Desired no.*1 (max. 24 digits)
Message DEF
Save JKL
Account MNO
Conference PQRS
One-Touch Dialling with Auto Hold TUV Desired no.*1 (max. 24 digits)
Terminate WXYZ
• *2 These buttons are used for the voice mail integration feature.
• To exit the mode at any time, press the CANCEL button.
PS
OK OK
To continue
Dial 8. Enter ID code Follow programming Press HOLD. Press HOLD Press CANCEL.
(4 digits). input. again.
Portable Station
charge, outside charge CLR
OR
or account code
charge. 2
3 Extensiontable
Account no. no. (001-128) Print out OK
DECT
4 Extension no. Viewing
Viewing, clearing or
OR
printing total extension
charge, total outside 5
2 Outside line no. Clearing CLR
code charge. 6
2 Account table no. Print out OK
• You cannot print out the account code charge of the account table number (01) by SMDR.
Appendix
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting for wired telephones
Problem Remedy
The telephone does not work • The wiring is wrong.
properly. á Check the wiring.
• The system does not work properly.
á Restart the system is required. Consult your dealer.
Some features do not work. • System management may restrict certain features.
á Consult your manager.
• The feature numbers have changed.
á Confirm the revised number and try again.
Even though following the manual • The Intercom line was not seized. The seized line, when
instructions, none of the operations going off-hook, was changed by personal setting. (+ P. 4-2)
work when using a proprietary á In the manual, going off-hook means an Intercom line is
telephone. seized.
If the setting has been changed, press the INTERCOM
button after going off-hook and follow the instructions.
The telephone does not work using • The extension line has been changed. The previous
the personal settings or with other telephone’s settings have not be cleared.
settings. (One-touch dialling, á Clear the settings and then programme your desired
forwarding destination, etc.) settings again. (+ P. 2-73, 4-3, 4-6)
My proprietary telephone does not • Some models do not have the function button.
have a function button. á Change a flexible button to the desired button.
(+ P. 4-4)
á Enter the specified feature number instead of the function
button. (+ P. 2-2)
6-2 Appendix
Problem Remedy
I cannot make an outside call using • A line access number was not stored.
the One-Touch Dialling button or á A line access number is required for outside calls.
speed dialling. (+ P. 2-9, 2-92, 4-4)
I cannot remember the feature á Ask your dealer to change the feature numbers for easier use.
numbers. á Store the feature numbers into the One-Touch Dialling
buttons. (+ P. 4-4)
Redialling does not function. • The stored number was more than 24 digits or an extension
number. (+ P. 2-15)
I cannot send a call waiting tone to • The other party has not set the Call Waiting feature.
the dialled extension. (+ P. 2-17, 2-18, 2-38, 2-65)
• The other party has set Data Line Security.
á Consult your dealer.
I forgot the lock code / Live Call á Ask the Operator or manager to assist you. (+ P. 3-3)
Screening Password.
The background music started á Turn off the music. (+ P. 2-70, 3-7)
suddenly.
The display does not show the • The telephone is not a Panasonic proprietary telephone.
message described in the manual. á This manual shows messages which appear only on
Panasonic proprietary telephones (e.g. KX-T7436).
(+ P. 2-3)
Appendix
I want to confirm my extension (+ P. 4-9)
number and jack number.
The date and time are not correct. • Set the date and time by system programming. (+ P. 4-14)
The display is abnormal. • The lithium battery for memory back-up needs to be replaced.
á Consult your dealer.
I hear a warning tone from the • The handset was off-hook in an idle status for an extended
telephone. period of time.
á Replace the handset.
Appendix 6-3
Troubleshooting
Problem Remedy
The MESSAGE button light lit. • Another extension left you a message waiting indication
during you were on the phone or left your desk.
“System Data Err 1” is displayed at • There is a wrong system data with back up RAM for master
the operator 1’s telephone. system.
á Consult your dealer.
“System Data Err 2” is displayed at • There is a wrong system data with back up RAM for slave
the operator 1’s telephone. system.
á Consult your dealer.
“Check Printer” is displayed at the • The paper of the printer runs out or the printer is out-of-
operator 1’s telephone. service.
á Consult your manager or dealer.
KX-TD816 KX-TD1232
CO01 CO01
CO02 CO02
CO05 CO09
CO13
CO14
CO21
6-4 Appendix
Troubleshooting for DECT Portable Station
Problem Remedy
The PS does not work. • The battery is empty.
á Charge the batteries fully. (+ P. 5-5)
• The PS has been cancelled or the PS has not been
registered.
á Consult your dealer.
You cannot dial. • The number which you dialled is restricted by the system.
á Consult your dealer.
• The key lock mode is set.
á To cancel the mode, press the Function for about 2
seconds. (+ P. 5-25)
• The radio channel is busy or a radio communication error
occurred.
á Try again later.
Static, sound cuts in/out, fades. á Set the PS and CS away from other electrical appliances.
Interference from other electrical á Move closer to the CS.
units.
Appendix
“PS NO CONNECTED” is displayed. • The power switch is set to OFF.
á Turn it ON. (+ P. 5-7)
• The PS is out of range.
á Move closer to the CS.
• The radio channel is busy or a radio communication error
occurred.
á Try again later.
Appendix 6-5
Troubleshooting
Problem Remedy
You cannot store a phone number • Your entry exceeds the maximum digits or characters.
and name in the directory. • Do not pause for over 30 seconds while programming.
The alarm sounds after pressing the • A number is not saved in the Call Log.
Redial button.
You charged the batteries fully, á Clean the charge contacts and charge again.
but “ ” flashes. á It is time to change the batteries. Please purchase new
batteries.
The PS stops working during á Turn the power switch OFF and ON. Then try again.
operation. (+ P. 5-7)
á Re-insert the battery and try again. (+ P. 5-5)
Handover does not work. • You moved to a busy CS or are out of range.
• You moved while not having a conversation (e.g., while
hearing a busy tone).
• The radio channel is busy or a radio communication error
occurred.
The display does not show a strong • Normally, the PS user can make a call even with a “ ”
radio signal “ ” even though you status. In this case, the current linked CS is still connected
are near the CS. even though another CS is closer.
6-6 Appendix
Feature Number List
Numbers listed below are the default settings. There are flexible feature numbers and fixed feature
numbers. If you change the flexible feature numbers, fill in your assigned numbers in the list for
future reference.
Appendix
Answering the paged announcement through telephones 43
Accessing external services 64
Forwarding your call – All calls / Busy / No 710 [2 / 3 / 4 / 5]+ ext. no.
answer / Busy, No answer
– to an external party 6+line access no.
+phone no.+#
– cancel 0
– Follow Me/cancel [7 / 8]+your ext. no.
Appendix 6-7
Feature Number List
Feature Default Assigned no. Additional digits
Refusing all calls (DND)
– forwarding to extension / operator / 710 1+[ext. no. / 0 / ]
no backup station
– cancelling 0
Forwarding calls from a receiving group 714 1+forwarding group
no.+destination group
or ext. no. /
0+forwarding group no.
Refusing direct outside calls (DND or DDI) / 54 1/0
cancelling
Showing a message to the caller / cancelling 750 [1-9]+(parameter) / 0
Joining the call receiving group / leaving 45 [1 / 0]+
[group no. or (all)]
Conference 3 Fixed
Calling with account codes 49 code+[# or 99]
Temporary tone dialling # Fixed
Dialling a DND extension 2 Fixed
Setting the alarm / 76 1+time+[0:AM / 1:PM]+
[0 (once) / 1 (daily)]
cancelling / viewing 0/2
Receiving or refusing a call waiting tone or voice 731 0/1/2/3
no tone / tone / OHCA / whisper OHCA
Displaying your number on the called / calling
party’s telephone
– showing a number assigned for an outside 711 1/2
line / your extension
– showing a desired number when making a 3+desired no.+#
particular call
Preventing your number being displayed on the 59 2/0/1
called party’s telephone / showing / changing
the setting when making a particular call
Preventing your number being displayed on the 58 1/0
calling party’s telephone / showing
Denying other people the possibility of 57 3 digit code twice /
– seeing your call logs / allowing stored code
– using your telephone / allowing 77 3 digit code twice /
stored code
– picking up your calls / allowing 720 1/0
– paging through the speaker / allowing 721 1/0
Day / Night service confirmation # Fixed
Switching the display – day, month, time / Fixed
day, month, year, day of the week
Parallelled telephones ring / do not ring 69 1/0
6-8 Appendix
Feature Default Assigned no. Additional digits
Switching the calling method (Ring / Voice) Fixed
Cancelling the feature settings 790
Calling the doorphone 61 1-4
Opening the door from a specified phone 55 1-4
from any extension while talking 5 Fixed
Forwarding doorphone calls to outside parties 716 [1-2 or (all)]+[1 / 0]
– setting / cancelling
– storing the phone number 715 [0 (day) / 1 (night)]+
[1-4 or (all)]+line
access no.+phone no.+#
– clear the phone number [0 (day) / 1 (night)]+
[1-4 or (all)]+#
*Assigning level of service – primary / secondary 79 [1 / 3]+ext. no.
*Setting the Live Call Screening password / 799 3 digit code twice /
cancelling stored code
*Hotel use features 1+ext. no.+time+
– Setting the alarm for other extensions / 7 [0:AM / 1:PM]+
cancelling / viewing [0 (once) / 1 (daily)] /
0+ext. no. / 2+ext. no.
– Printing out guest room information 750 [6-9]+(parameter)
*Turning on / off the background music 65
Switching the Day / Night service 78 0/1
– to day / to night
*Recording an outgoing message / playing back 712 [1 / 2]+OGM no.
*Printing out the system working report / clearing 794 1/0
* : Operator only
Appendix
Appendix 6-9
Directory
Extension
Jack Jack
Extension no. Name Extension no. Name
no. no.
01-1 01-2
02-1 02-2
03-1 03-2
04-1 04-2
05-1 05-2
06-1 06-2
07-1 07-2
08-1 08-2
09-1 09-2
10-1 10-2
11-1 11-2
12-1 12-2
13-1 13-2
14-1 14-2
15-1 15-2
16-1 16-2
17-1 17-2
18-1 18-2
19-1 19-2
20-1 20-2
21-1 21-2
22-1 22-2
23-1 23-2
24-1 24-2
25-1 25-2
26-1 26-2
27-1 27-2
28-1 28-2
29-1 29-2
30-1 30-2
31-1 31-2
32-1 32-2
6-10 Appendix
Jack Jack
Extension no. Name Extension no. Name
no. no.
33-1 33-2
34-1 34-2
35-1 35-2
36-1 36-2
37-1 37-2
38-1 38-2
39-1 39-2
40-1 40-2
41-1 41-2
42-1 42-2
43-1 43-2
44-1 44-2
45-1 45-2
46-1 46-2
47-1 47-2
48-1 48-2
49-1 49-2
50-1 50-2
51-1 51-2
52-1 52-2
53-1 53-2
54-1 54-2
55-1 55-2
56-1 56-2
Appendix
57-1 57-2
58-1 58-2
59-1 59-2
60-1 60-2
61-1 61-2
62-1 62-2
63-1 63-2
64-1 64-2
Appendix 6-11
Directory
System Speed Dialling
No. Name No. Name No. Name
000 043 086
001 044 087
002 045 088
003 046 089
004 047 090
005 048 091
006 049 092
007 050 093
008 051 094
009 052 095
010 053 096
011 054 097
012 055 098
013 056 099
014 057 100
015 058 101
016 059 102
017 060 103
018 061 104
019 062 105
020 063 106
021 064 107
022 065 108
023 066 109
024 067 110
025 068 111
026 069 112
027 070 113
028 071 114
029 072 115
030 073 116
031 074 117
032 075 118
033 076 119
034 077 120
035 078 121
036 079 122
037 080 123
038 081 124
039 082 125
040 083 126
041 084 127
042 085 128
6-12 Appendix
No. Name No. Name No. Name
129 174 219
130 175 220
131 176 221
132 177 222
133 178 223
134 179 224
135 180 225
136 181 226
137 182 227
138 183 228
139 184 229
140 185 230
141 186 231
142 187 232
143 188 233
144 189 234
145 190 235
146 191 236
147 192 237
148 193 238
149 194 239
150 195 240
151 196 241
152 197 242
153 198 243
154 199 244
155 200 245
156 201 246
157 202 247
158 203 248
159 204 249
160 205 250
161 206 251
Appendix
162 207 252
163 208 253
164 209 254
165 210 255
166 211 256
167 212 257
168 213 258
169 214 259
170 215 260
171 216 261
172 217 262
173 218 263
Appendix 6-13
Directory
No. Name No. Name No. Name
264 309 354
265 310 355
266 311 356
267 312 357
268 313 358
269 314 359
270 315 360
271 316 361
272 317 362
273 318 363
274 319 364
275 320 365
276 321 366
277 322 367
278 323 368
279 324 369
280 325 370
281 326 371
282 327 372
283 328 373
284 329 374
285 330 375
286 331 376
287 332 377
288 333 378
289 334 379
290 335 380
291 336 381
292 337 382
293 338 383
294 339 384
295 340 385
296 341 386
297 342 387
298 343 388
299 344 389
300 345 390
301 346 391
302 347 392
303 348 393
304 349 394
305 350 395
306 351 396
307 352 397
308 353 398
6-14 Appendix
No. Name No. Name No. Name
399 433 467
400 434 468
401 435 469
402 436 470
403 437 471
404 438 472
405 439 473
406 440 474
407 441 475
408 442 476
409 443 477
410 444 478
411 445 479
412 446 480
413 447 481
414 448 482
415 449 483
416 450 484
417 451 485
418 452 486
419 453 487
420 454 488
421 455 489
422 456 490
423 457 491
424 458 492
425 459 493
426 460 494
427 461 495
428 462 496
429 463 497
430 464 498
431 465 499
Appendix
432 466
Appendix 6-15
Directory
Quick Dialling
Name Quick dial no. Name Quick dial no.
Phone no.
6-16 Appendix
What is This Tone?
While on-hook
Ring Tones
Tone 1 1s
• Incoming call from an external party
• An outside call is held for more than a
specified time (default: 60 seconds).
Tone 2
• Incoming call from an extension
• An intercom call is held for more
than a specified time (default: 60
seconds).
Tone 3
• Incoming call from a doorphone
• The pre-set alarm time has arrived.
Tone 4
• A reserved outside line or
extension became idle.
• A caller is leaving a message in
your mailbox (Live Call Screening-
Private mode).
Tone 2
At least one feature has been
changed from the default setting
at your extention.
Tone 3
• The alarm is being answered.
• Enter an account code to turn off
the tone.
Appendix
Tone 4
Message waiting indication was
received.
Appendix 6-17
What is This Tone?
When you make calls
1s
Busy Tone
CCBS Tone
The called party on an ISDN line is
busy.
Reorder Tone
• The outside line you tried to seize is
not assigned or denied.
• The wrong account code was entered.
Ringback Tone
While off-hooking
Indication Tones
Tone 1 15 s
Call Waiting tone (default)
Tone 2
Call Waiting tone from outside
Tone 3 5s
Call Waiting tone from another
extension
Tone 4 15 s
A call is held for more than a
specified time (default: 60 seconds).
6-18 Appendix
When setting the features or programming
Confirmation Tones
Tone 1 1s
• Set/cancel to deny other people
the possibility of using your phone.
• The new setting differs from the
previous setting by personal
programming.
• Completing the system
programming.
Tone 2
• The feature setting was
completed successfully.
• Before paging through an
external speaker
• The new setting is same as the
previous setting by personal
programming.
Tone 3
Before performing the following
features:
• Retrieving a held call
• Picking up another call
• Paging/Answering a paged
annoucement
• Answering the call through a
speaker
Tone 4
Establishing or leaving a three-party
conversation
Appendix
Appendix 6-19
Specifications
General Description
Item Description
System Capacity Basic Expansion System
Connection
KX-TD816
Outside lines 0 8 —
Wired extension 8 16 —
Wireless extension* 0 16 —
(Extension lines with XDP/SXDP 16 32 —)
KX-TD1232
Outside lines 0 38 38
Wired extension 16 32 64
Wireless extension* 0 64 64
(Extension lines with XDP/SXDP 32 64 128 )
*This is the maximum number of DECT portable stations that you can
register.
Characteristics
Item Description
Maximum Number of Station 1 or 2 by Parallel or eXtra Device Port Connection
Instruments per Line
6-20 Appendix
Please cut out these cards and distribute to the single line telephone users.
$
$
$
$
$
Quick Reference Card Quick Reference Card
To Make Calls To Make Calls
• Intercom: Ext. no. • Intercom: Ext. no.
• Operator: 0 • Operator: 0
• External Party: 9 or 81-88 ) + Phone no. • External Party: 9 or 81-88 ) + Phone no.
• Station Speed Dialling: 6 + No. 0-9 • Station Speed Dialling: 6 + No. 0-9
• System Speed Dialling: + No. 000-499 • System Speed Dialling: + No. 000-499
• Doorphone: 6 1 + Doorphone no. • Doorphone: 6 1 + Doorphone no.
• Retrieving: + 5 0 • Retrieving: + 5 0
(Recall) (Recall)
• Transferring: (Recall)
+ Dial no. • Transferring: + Dial no.
(Recall)
• Retrieving: + 5 0 • Retrieving: + 5 0
(Recall) (Recall)
$
$
Please cut out these cards and distribute to the single line telephone users.
$
$
$
$
$
Locking / Unlocking Your Phone Locking / Unlocking Your Phone
• Lock: 7 7 + 3 digit desired code + same code • Lock: 7 7 + 3 digit desired code + same code
• Unlock: 7 7 + Stored code • Unlock: 7 7 + Stored code
Settings Settings
• Storing the number for Station Speed Dialling: • Storing the number for Station Speed Dialling:
6 0 + No. 0-9 + Line no. 9 or 81-88 + Phone no. + 6 0 + No. 0-9 + Line no. 9 or 81-88 + Phone no. +
• Call Waiting: • Call Waiting:
— Set: 7 3 1 1 — Set: 7 3 1 1
— Cancel: 7 3 1 0 — Cancel: 7 3 1 0
Frequently Used Features at Your Extension Frequently Used Features at Your Extension
$
$
Settings Settings
• Storing the number for Station Speed Dialling: • Storing the number for Station Speed Dialling:
6 0 + No. 0-9 + Line no. 9 or 81-88 + Phone no. + 6 0 + No. 0-9 + Line no. 9 or 81-88 + Phone no. +
• Call Waiting: • Call Waiting:
— Set: 7 3 1 1 — Set: 7 3 1 1
— Cancel: 7 3 1 0 — Cancel: 7 3 1 0
Frequently Used Features at Your Extension Frequently Used Features at Your Extension
$
$
$
$
$
Index
Index
Index
A bsent Message ...............................2-49, 5-31 C amp-On → Automatic Callback Busy
ABST MSG Off / Absent MSG Off .......2-50, 2-51 CALL...............................................................2-84
ABST MSG On 1-9 / Absent MSG On (1–9) Call
........................................................2-50, 2-51 Directories........................................................5-16
ACCESS DECT-SYS ..........................................5-39 Duration ..................................................2-22, 2-85
ACCNT.............................................................2-22 Information ..........2-9, 2-22, 2-25, 2-83, 2-85, 5-10
Record..........................................................ii, 2-85
Account ....2-22, 4-4, 4-7, 5-28, 5-41, 5-43, 6-17
Caller ID .....................................2-25, 2-83, 2-85
Adding Telephone..............................ii, 1-5, 2-71
Call Forwarding.........2-5, 2-44, 2-48, 2-78, 2-94,
Alarm........................2-61, 3-11, 3-13, 5-31, 6-17
5-23, 5-30, 5-33
Alert .......................................................3-13, 4-4
Call Hold → Hold
Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice .........2-24, 5-28
Calling → Making Calls
Announce → Paging
Calling back .................................................2-84
ANSWER .................................................2-5, 3-9
Calling method ..............................................2-24
Answering → Receiving Calls
Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP)
At Ext %%% (extension no.) ..........................2-49 ........................................................2-67, 5-32
AUTO ..............................................................5-7 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
AUTO ANS DELAY ............................................5-38 .................................................2-68, 4-5, 5-32
AUTO ANSWER..................................................5-38 Call Log → Incoming Call Log/Outgoing Call Log
AUTO ANSWER ..............2-5, inside back cover Call Log.....................................2-89, 2-90, 2-91
AUTO DIAL ......................2-5, inside back cover Call Log Lock, Incoming → Incoming Call Log
Automatic Call Park ..............................................2-32, 5-29
Answer Mode Set ...................................5-11, 5-38 Call Park 0–9 / Call Park (0–9)
Answer Delay Selection...................................5-38
...............................................2-32, 2-33, 2-34
Callback Busy.........................................2-17, 5-27
Call Pickup .................................2-27, 5-28, 6-19
Log...................................................................2-83
Night Service .....................................................3-5 Call Pickup Deny ..........................2-69, 4-5, 5-32
Overflow.............................................................3-4 Call Splitting.........................................2-35, 5-29
Redial...............................................................2-15 Call Transfer → Transferring
Call Waiting ......2-18, 2-38, 2-65, 4-5, 5-29, 5-32
B ack at %%:%% (Hour:Minute) ..................2-49 Tone .........................................................2-38, 4-3
Background Music (BGM) .....................2-70, 3-7 CANCEL .........................................................5-7
BACKLIGHT ..................................................5-37 CANCEL DECT-SYS .....................................5-39
Battery .....................................................5-4, 5-5 Cancelling → Clearing
BGM ..............................................................2-70 Capacity.................................................1-2, 6-20
BOOK..............................................................5-7 C.BCK.............................................................2-17
BOOK=NEXT ..................................................5-39 Cell Station .....................................5-4, 5-9, 5-10
Boss-Secretary function ......................2-47, 2-48 C=EXIT ...........................................................5-39
BSS (Busy Station Signalling) / BSS.....2-18, 5-28 Character ..................................................4-12, 5-22
Busy ........................2-15, 2-17, 2-18, 2-19, 2-44, Charge Fee Management......................4-7, 5-43
5-27, 5-28, 5-30 Charger ...........................................................5-5
Busy Station Signalling (BSS) .............2-18, 5-28 Check in / Check out.................................3-10
Busy tone ......................................................6-18 Check-in / check-out .....................................3-10
Button ......................2-5, 4-4, 4-5, 4-6, 5-7, 5-26,
5-41, inside back cover
7-2 Index
Clearing Paged announcement ..............................2-66, 4-5
Initial setting.......................................................4-3 Ringing (DND)...............................2-63, 2-64, 5-31
(Flexible) button data .........................................4-6 Picking up your calls...............................2-69, 5-32
Live Call Screening Password.........................2-80 Retrieving your held calls ......................2-31, 5-14
Programs ................................................2-73, 5-32 Seeing your call log .........................................2-86
System working report .....................................3-15 Using your telephone ......................2-52, 3-3, 5-30
CLIP → Calling Line Identification Presentation Dial Tone.......................................................6-17
CLIR → Calling Line Identification Restriction Direct Outside Calls.............................2-64, 5-32
COLP → Connected Line Identification Presentation DIRECTORY LOCK ..............................5-21, 5-38
COLR → Connected Line Identification Restriction Directory Lock Control .........................5-21, 5-38
CLR ...............................2-83, 3-12, 3-13, 4-7, 4-9 Direct Station Selection → DSS
CLR (CLEAR) .................................................5-7 Display
CO......2-4, 2-5, 2-9, 4-4, 5-41, inside back cover 2-2, 2-3, 2-83, 2-87, 4-9, 5-4, inside back cover
CONF (KEY4) ..............................................5-26 Display feature list ........................................2-93
CONF ........2-5, 4-4, 5-7, 5-26, inside back cover Display Language Selection .........................5-38
Conference........................2-39, 5-29, 5-41, 6-19 DND → Do Not Disturb, FWD/DND
Confirmation...................2-2, 4-3, 4-9, 5-43, 6-19 DND (0/*/ext) .....................................2-63, 2-94
Connected Line Identification Presentation DND for DDI .................................2-64, 4-5, 5-32
(COLP)............................................2-67, 5-32 Do Not Disturb (DND)
..............2-5, 2-23, 2-63, 2-94, 5-31, 5-32, 6-18
Connected Line Identification Restriction
Do Not Disturb Override ......................2-23, 5-28
(COLR) ....................................2-69, 4-5, 5-32
Door Open ..........................................2-76, 5-33
Connection ...........................................1-4, 2-72
Door Opener ........................................2-74, 5-33
Control extension ..........................................3-11
Doorphone .........................1-4, 2-74, 5-33, 6-17
COS (Class of Service)...................................3-2
Doorphone Call Forwarding to Outside Line
COS Primary ext / COS Primary (ext) .......3-2
................................................2-75, 4-5, 5-33
COS Second ext / COS Second (ext)...........3-2
DSS ........................................2-5, 2-8, 4-4, 5-41
C.Pickup GRP / C.Pickup Group .......2-27, 2-28
Customise..............................................4-1, 5-34
E asy Dialling...............................................2-10
EFA → External Feature Access
D ate .................................................2-83, 4-14 Electronic Station Lockout ...........2-52, 3-3, 5-30
Data / Time Display ...........................5-39
Emergency call ......................................2-9, 5-10
Data / Time Display Selection.......................5-39
END ..............................................3-10, 3-11, 3-12
Day / Night ..................................2-70, 3-5, 5-32
Exclusive Call Hold..............................2-31, 5-14
DECT Portable Station ...................................5-1
EXT .......................................................2-88, 2-90
DECT-SYS LOCK .........................................5-39
Extension..........................2-87, 2-89, 2-90, 2-91
DECT System
Extension
Lock Password Set .......................5-35, 5-36, 5-39
Customise..........................................................4-2
Number.....................................................5-6, 5-38
Dialling .........2-9, 2-87, 2-88, 2-89, 2-90, 2-91, 5-9
Selection ..........................................................5-38
Directory ..........................................................6-10
Default Set → Clearing
Group ............................................2-27, 2-55, 5-28
Denying Lock.................................................2-52, 3-3, 5-30
Index
Index 7-3
Index
External Party......................2-9, 2-37, 2-44, 5-10 HOLD=BACK......................................................5-39
eXtra Device Port (XDP).................................1-5 Host PBX .................................................2-77, 5-33
Ext-BGM On/Off / Extrn BGM On/Off...........3-7 Hot Line → Pickup Dialling
Hotel ..........................................3-10, 3-11, 3-12
F acsimile (FAX) ............................................1-4 Hotel Use Features .......................................3-10
FEAT .....................................................2-88, 2-90 Hurry-Up / Hurry-Up Transfer ..................3-4, 4-4
Feature Access ............................................2-87
Feature Number ..............................2-2, 5-6, 6-7 I con ............iii, 2-4, 4-10, 5-6, inside back cover
Features............................2-87, 2-88, 2-89, 2-91 Identification number.........2-67, 2-68, 2-69, 5-32
Flexible CO ........2-5, 4-4, 5-7, inside back cover In a Meeting ...............................................2-49
Follow Me ............................................2-44, 5-30 Incoming Call Log ...............2-83, 2-85, 2-86, 3-3
Forwarding Calls ......2-44, 2-48, 2-75, 5-30, 5-33 Indication Tone
Full One-Touch Dialling ..................................4-3 .....................................2-20, 2-38, 2-79, 5-28
Function .....................2-5, 5-7, inside back cover Initial Display .......................................2-83, 2-85
FWD → FWD/DND Initial Settings ........................................4-2, 5-40
FWD/DND............2-5, 2-94, 4-4, 5-7, 5-26, 5-41, INTERCOM................2-5, 5-7, inside back cover
inside back cover Intercom Alert .................................................4-3
FWD–All Calls (ext)..........................2-45, 2-78 Intercom Call ......2-8, 2-87, 2-88, 2-89, 2-90, 2-91,
FWD–BSY / NA (ext) ...........................2-45, 2-78 4-3, 5-9, 6-17
FWD–Busy (ext) ...................................2-45, 2-78 Interrupt.........................................................2-18
FWD–CO Line (dial).....................................2-45
FWD/DND (KEY2) ............................................5-26 J ack number .................................................4-9
FWD/DND Cancel ...................................2-45, 2-64 Joining
FWD–From (ext) ...........................................2-45 Receiving group......................................2-53, 5-31
7-4 Index
Live Call Screening (LCS) Night Service → Day / Night
..................................2-80, 3-3, 4-3, 4-4, 6-17 Night Mode 1/0
Location ............................1-3, inside back cover Night On/Off (1/0) ..................................3-5
Lock ....................................2-52, 3-3, 5-25, 5-30 NO .................................................................3-10
Log.................................................................2-85 No Answer.........................2-17, 2-44, 2-78, 5-30
Log-In/Log-Out ....................2-53, 4-4, 5-30, 5-41 Notebook Function ..............................2-41, 5-29
Loop-CO ........................2-5, 2-9, 4-4, 5-10, 5-41
O ff-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
M ailbox ....................................2-78, 2-82, 5-33 ..................................................2-18, 2-38, 2-65
Making Calls ....2-8, 2-87, 2-88, 2-89, 2-90, 2-91, Off-Hook Monitor...........................................2-43
4-2, 5-9, 5-21 OGM → Outgoing Message
Account Codes .......................................2-22, 5-28 OHCA → Off-Hook Call Announcement
Call log .........................................2-83, 2-89, 2-91 OK=OK.............................................................5-39
Doorphone..............................................2-74, 5-33
OK...................................................................5-7
Easy Dialling ....................................................2-10
Phantom .........................................................2-13 OLD.................................................................2-83
Manager........................................................3-15 One-Touch Dialling ......2-10, 4-3, 4-4, 5-27, 5-41
Manual Night Service......................................3-5 One-Touch Dialling with Auto Hold
MEMORY CLEAR ................................................5-39 .................................................2-37, 4-5, 5-41
Memory Clear ...............................................5-39 One-Touch Transfer......................................2-37
Message.............................2-19, 2-49, 2-78, 3-8, Opening the door.................................2-76, 5-33
5-28, 5-30, 5-41 Operations ......................................................2-1
MESSAGE .............................2-5, 4-4, 5-7, 5-26, Operator .........................................2-8, 3-1, 5-27
inside back cover Others ...........................................................3-10
MESSAGE (KEY3) ............................................5-26 Outgoing Call Log.......................2-89, 2-91, 5-12
Message Waiting...............2-19, 2-78, 5-28, 6-17 Outgoing Message (OGM) ....................3-8, 3-11
Microphone .....................2-42, inside back cover Outside......................2-9, 2-27, 2-37, 2-44, 2-64,
Microphone Mute ..........................................2-42 5-10, 5-28, 5-30, 5-31
Minibar .........................................................3-10 Outside (CO) Call Pickup ....................2-27, 5-28
MODE .............................................................2-5 Out until %%/%% (Month/Day) .....................2-49
MODIFY BOOK..................................................5-16 Over..................................................................... 2-23
Monitoring ................................................... 2-80 Overlay............................................................4-8
MSG Off ext / Message Off (ext) ...2-19, 2-20
MSG On ext / Message On (ext).......2-19, 2-20 P age E-ANS 1-4 /
Music → Background Music Page-Ext Answer (1-4) .................2-29, 2-59
Mute (MUTE) ...........2-5, 2-42, inside back cover Page Extrn 0-4 /
Paging External (0-4) .................2-54, 2-55
N ame..............................1-3, inside back cover Page GRP 00-16 /
Paging Group (00-16) ...................2-55, 2-56
Extension .........................................................4-24
Character Entering...........................................4-12 Page-GRP ANS / Page-GRP Answer ..............2-60
Outside line.............................................2-25, 2-83 Paging .......................................2-54, 5-31, 6-19
Station Speed Dialling .....................................2-92
Index
Index 7-5
Index
PAUSE ............2-5, 5-7, 5-26, inside back cover
PBX-EXT-DIALING...........................................5-21
Q UICK ANSWER ............................................5-38
Quick Answering Mode Set .................5-11, 5-38
PBX Extension Dialling Directory ........5-16, 5-21
Quick Dialling.......................................2-13, 5-27
PBX-PROGRAM..................................................5-34
Directory ..........................................................6-16
PBX Programming ........................................5-40
PBX-STA-DELETE ............................................5-16 R adio Signal Strength ..................................5-4
PBX-STA-DIALING...........................................5-21 RECALL (for PT)
PBX-STA-EDIT ................................................5-16 ...........................................2-5, 2-8, 2-9, 2-15
PBX Station Speed Dialling Directory Recall (for SLT)...............................................2-4
........................................................5-16, 5-21 Receiving calls... 2-25, 2-53, 4-2, 4-3, 5-11, 5-30
PBX-SYS-DIALING...........................................5-21 Call waiting....................................2-38, 2-65, 5-32
PBX System Speed Dialling Directory Hands-free..............................................2-25, 2-26
........................................................5-16, 5-21 Mailbox ..........................................2-78, 2-80, 5-33
Personal Computer .........................................1-4 Paging ....................................................2-59, 5-31
Password .............................2-80, 3-3, 4-8, 4-11 Receiving group ................. 2-48, 2-53, 4-5, 5-30
PF ............................................................2-5, 4-4 Recording
Call log .........................................................ii, 2-86
Phantom .........................................2-13, 4-5, 4-6
Conversation ..........................................2-82, 5-33
Picking up...................................2-27, 5-28, 6-19 Outgoing message.............................................3-8
Pickup Dialling..............................2-12, 4-5, 5-27 Redial (REDIAL)...................2-5, 2-15, 5-7, 5-12,
Power Failure................................................6-20 inside back cover
Power Switch ..................................................5-7 REGISTRATION ................................................5-34
Preferred Line ........................................4-2, 5-40 Registration.....................................................5-4
Preventing Ringing ..............................2-63, 5-31 RELEASE ................................................2-5, 3-9
PRINT.............................................................3-10 Remote Operation...........................................3-1
Print out ...........................ii, 1-4, 3-10, 3-14, 3-15 Remote Station Lock Control..........................3-3
Private mode ...............................2-80, 4-3, 6-17 Reorder Tone ........................................6-2, 6-18
PROG...............................................................3-11 Reserve line ........................................2-17, 5-27
PROGRAM ......................2-5, inside back cover Reset button....................................................1-3
PROGRAMMING..................................................5-34 Restriction.........2-3, 2-22, 2-68, 2-69, 5-28, 5-32
Programming .........................................4-1, 5-34 Ring..............................2-24, 4-3, 4-6, 5-28, 6-17
Proprietary Telephone......................1-5, 2-2, 4-2 RING PATTERN ................................................5-37
PS Dialling Directory............................5-16, 5-21 Ringer Pattern Selection ...............................5-37
PS PASSWORD..................................................5-39
PS Programming...........................................5-35 S ave (SAVE) ...............................2-5, 4-4, 5-41
PS Programming Password Set Saved Number Redial .........................2-16, 5-27
...............................................5-35, 5-36, 5-39 Saving a number .................................2-41, 5-29
PS Registration Cancellation ........................5-39 SECRET ......................................4-5, 4-15, 5-42
PS-DELETE......................................................5-16 SEL...................................................................4-7
PS-DIALING....................................................5-21 SELECT.................................................2-6, 4-12
PS-EDIT .........................................................5-16 SHIFT................................2-6, inside back cover
PS-NEW-ENTRY ................................................5-16 Single-CO → CO
PS-PASSWORD..................................................5-36 Single line telephone .......1-4, 1-5, 2-2, 2-4, 2-71
PS-PROGRAM....................................................5-34 Soft ...................................2-6, inside back cover
Pulse to Tone ......................................2-23, 5-28
7-6 Index
Speaker ............1-4, 2-29, 2-54, 2-57, 5-28, 5-31 Tone (TONE) ......2-23, 5-6, 5-7, 5-26, 5-28, 6-17
Speakerphone → SP-PHONE → Call Waiting – tone
Specifications................................................6-20 → Confirmation
Speed Dialling → Station speed dialling / Tone...............................................................2-24
System Speed Dialling TRANSFER ..............2-6, 5-7, inside back cover
SP-PHONE ......................2-6, inside back cover Transferring ...2-36, 2-57, 2-79, 5-15, 5-29, 5-31
STA .......................................................2-88, 2-90 TRM...................................................................2-9
STA Speed...................................2-89, 2-90, 2-91 Troubleshooting ..............................................6-2
STANDBY DISPLAY ..........................................5-38 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
Standby Display Selection ............................5-38 ........................................................2-29, 5-28
Station Speed ..............................................2-87 Two-Way Recording............2-82, 4-4, 5-33, 5-41
Station Program Clear → Clearing-Programs Two-Way Transfer...............2-82, 4-4, 5-33, 5-41
...........................................................2-73, 5-32
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) U nattended Conference...........2-40, 5-29, 6-19
...............................................ii, 4-7, 5-43, 6-20 Unlock...............2-52, 2-76, 2-86, 3-3, 5-30, 5-33
Station speed dialling
2-11, 2-87, 2-88, 2-89, 2-90, 2-91, 2-92, 5-27 V IBRATION & RING .....................................5-37
Directory ..........................................................6-15 Vibration and Ring Type Selection ...............5-37
STORE .............................2-5, inside back cover Voice ........................................................... 2-24
Super EXtra Device Ports (SXDP)................5-23 Voice-Calling........................................2-24, 5-28
SXDP → Super EXtra Device Ports Voice mail ................ii, 2-78, 4-3, 4-4, 5-33, 5-41
SYS Speed...................................2-89, 2-90, 2-91 Voice processing system ...................ii, 1-4, 2-78
System Feature Access Volume Control ...............................................5-7
............................2-87, 2-88, 2-89, 2-90, 2-91
System Speed ................................................2-87 W ake up / Wake-Up call ......3-11, 3-12, 3-13
System speed dialling..........2-11, 2-87, 2-88, 2-89, Wake-Up call → Timed Reminder
2-90, 2-91, 4-15, 4-16, 5-27 Will Return Soon ........................................2-49
Directory ..........................................................6-12 Warning Tone ................................................6-3
System Working Report ................................3-15 Whisper OHCA...........................2-18, 2-38, 2-65
Index 7-7
Names and Locations of the KX-T7436
Display
Function
Function
FWD/DND
CONF SHIFT
Soft
Flexible CO
TRANSFER
INTERCOM
PAUSE
PROGRAM
MESSAGE
MIC
HOLD
FLASH
SP-PHONE
Jog Dial
Microphone
Icons
Copyright:
This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. (KME).
Under the applicable copyright laws, this manual may not be reproduced in any form,
in whole or part, without the prior written consent of KME and its licensee.
Note:
Some older Answer Machines may treat the Recorder Tone returned to an extension
after CPC signal detection clear down as an ongoing call and continue to record.
3. Host working
• If the Host PBX codes are entered in Prog. Step 411 the Pause time [412] will be
inserted after the Host code has been dialed.
• Register Recall signal can be modified by Prog. Step 413, to send a signal to the
Host PBX.
To ensure correct operation of the LCR function the following rules should be applied:
1. All Leading Digit Entry (7X01) should contain the same number of digits
(pad out with “ ” (wild character) as necessary).
*
2. The Exception Code Set (7X20) must not contain less digits than its Leading
Digit Entry table.
Note: In Default the first carrier is programmed for the old analogue “131” service
Carriers 2 ~ 8 are not pre-programmed (i.e. 7X21/ 7X22/ 7X23).
Installation Hints – Phantom Extensions
To program:
1. In any free Phantom location (130) enter a spare extension number.
2. On the Proprietary Telephone program the phantom extension number to a
Flexible LED button using the Feature Code “88”.
3. The same phantom extension number can be assigned to several Proprietary
Telephones.
To use:
1. From any extension, dial the phantom number.
2. From an extension who has the phantom number assigned to a Flexible button,
press the assigned button.
Installation Hints – Analogue Extensions
2. Wiring
• Note: All DSS Consoles are wired using the Analogue Integrated Proprietary
Telephone (APIT) standard (T7130, T7020, T7050).
• The XDP can be taken from the back of the Telephone or direct from the PBX,
when taken direct from the PBX only the H & L wires need to be taken to the
parallel DPIT extension.
Installation Hints – ISDN Extensions
An ISDN extension or S-Bus, can provided data capability up to 128kbps (2 x 64kbps).
An ISDN extension can support up to 8 parallel ISDN devices.
If the ISDN device requires to use both “B” channels, the ISDN device will set up a
second call.
When both “B” channels are in use, the other devices on that ISDN extension will not be
able to make or receive calls.
Program step [427] ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Numbering can be set to add 1
or 2 digits to the Extension number for MSN working.
If MSN is not set all devises on the ISDN extension will be rung simultaneously.
Programming:
Prog Step Contents
[437] MSN Number set Incoming number strings
[438] MSN Day Ringing assignment Day Destination
[439] MSN Night Ringing assignment Night Destination
2. DDI service
Provided on a Point ISDN2 or ISDN 30 CO Line.
Can translate up to 400 incoming number strings
Generally send the last three digits of the dialed number.
Can be provided on several ISDN2 Ccts (Hunts when busy).
Programming:
Prog Step Contents
[150] DDI Number Translation Incoming number strings
[151] DDI Day Ringing assignment Day Destination
[152] DDI Night Ringing assignment Night Destination
Note:
If the PBX CO line is set to Point working, it will link with either a Point or Multipoint
service provided by the Network Provider.
When upgrading a Version 4 or earlier PBX with PC Programming, care should be taken
to check the DDI translation on the Version 5 data base.
On the Version 4 or earlier PBX there was no Day Night destination option and DDI
numbers were assigned to the Ports using several Program Steps
(i.e. 112; Hunt Groups, 136; Phantom Extn, 618; Extn, 619; ISDN Extn).
Installation Hints – TIE CO Lines (E&M)
The Tie Line (E&M) Cct can be programmed for access in several ways, by dialing the
Tie line access code or assigning different extension numbers for each PBX.
The setting of the outgoing Cct will depend on the service provided on the E&M Cct.
If the “SB” and “SG” leads are not provided by the Network, the “SB” and “SG” leads
from the KX-TD184 must be connected to Ground.
Basic Installation
1. Set the E&M Cct configuration to match Network Providers standard
The most common setting for the UK Type 5 E&M Ccts is;
I/C & O/G Assignment Program Steps [431/ 432] to “Immediate”.
2. Set Expansion unit type [109] to E&M, will not be set by Default.
3. Assign the Tie Access Code [100] location 86.
4. Assign a Tie Table [430] to the E&M CO lines.
5. Take the Tie Ccts out of the Dial 9 Access Group (103).
To allow break from another PBX, Prog Step 990 Area 08 Bit 03 can be Set.
This allows the PBX to route outgoing CO line calls over the Tie Ccts and break out
over the CO lines of the linked PBX when all the local CO lines are busy.
The TD280 is an external module, which supplies 2 x ISDN2 Ports, either or both Ports can be
programmed for CO or ISDN Extension (S-Bus) working.
Note: Prog Step 109 and ISDN Configuration programming require a system reset to activate
a) Module installation.
• If the Module is fitted and the PBX is defaulted, the card will be assigned on power up.
• If you are adding the Module use Program step 109 to assign,
Assign “S” to the required Area
Only one CO Module can be assigned to the PBX at the same time. If the CO Module is
assigned to the lower Area the upper Area must be assigned as an Extension “E”
(i.e. C; S; E).
b) Port numbering
When the TD280 is fitted to a TD816 the upper DDK or
First Port is assigned as Port 5 (CO Lines 5 & 6)
Second Port is assigned as Port 6 (CO Lines 7 & 8)
Recommended combinations
Program [422] [423] [424] [425] [426]
ISDN Port ISDN Layer 1 ISDN ISDN Data ISDN TEI
Type Active Mode Configuration Link Mode Mode
CO Permanent Point Permanent Fix 0
(DDI)
CO Permanent Multipoint Call Automatic
Parameter (MSN)
Extension Call Multipoint Call Automatic
(S-Bus)
Installation Hints – ISDN Options
Installing a KX-TD282 Basic Rate Card (2 x ISDN2)
The TD282 is an internal card, which supplies 2 x ISDN2 Ports, either or both Ports can be
programmed for CO or ISDN Extension (S-Bus) working.
Note: Prog Step 109 and ISDN Configuration programming require a system reset to activate
a) Card installation.
• If the Card is fitted and the PBX is defaulted, the card will be assigned on power up.
• If you are adding the Card use Program step 109 to assign,
Assign “S” to the required Area (i.e. S; C; E).
b) Port numbering
When the TD282 is fitted
First Port is assigned as Port 1 (CO Lines 1 & 2)
Second Port is assigned as Port 2 (CO Lines 3 & 4)
Recommended combinations
Program [422] [423] [424] [425] [426]
ISDN Port ISDN Layer 1 ISDN ISDN Data ISDN TEI
Type Active Mode Configuration Link Mode Mode
CO Permanent Point Permanent Fix 0
(DDI)
CO Permanent Multipoint Call Automatic
Parameter (MSN)
Extension Call Multipoint Call Automatic
(S-Bus)
Installation Hints – ISDN Options
Installing a KX-TD286 Basic Rate Module (6 x ISDN2)
a) Module installation.
• If the Module is fitted and the PBX is defaulted, the card will be assigned on power up.
• If you are adding the Module use Program step 109 to assign,
Assign “S2” to the required Area
Only one CO Module can be assigned to the PBX at the same time. If the CO Module is
assigned to the lower Area the upper Area must be assigned as an Extension “E”
(i.e. C; S2; E).
b) Port numbering
When the TD286 is fitted to a TD816 Ports are assigned as
Port 1 to 6 (CO Lines 1 to 8)
Recommended combinations
Program [440] [441] [442] [443] [444]
ISDN Port ISDN Layer 1 ISDN ISDN Data ISDN TEI
Type Active Mode Configuration Link Mode Mode
CO Permanent Point Permanent Fix 0
(DDI)
CO Permanent Multipoint Call Automatic
Parameter (MSN)
Extension Call Multipoint Call Automatic
(S-Bus)
Installation Hints – ISDN Options
Installing a KX-TD290 Primary Rate Module (8 channel)
c) Module installation.
• If the Module is fitted and the PBX is defaulted, the card will be assigned on power up.
• If you are adding the Module use Program step 109 to assign,
Assign “S3” to the required Area
Only one CO Module can be assigned to the PBX at the same time. If the CO Module is
assigned to the lower Area the upper Area must be assigned as an Extension “E” (i.e. C;
S3; E).
d) Port numbering
When the TD290 is fitted to a TD816 the channels are assigned as
Channel 1 as CO 09 to Channel 8 as CO 16.
EXAMPLE:
1. The TD290 is being added to an existing PBX.
2. The Network supplier is sending 7 digits of DDI
3. The Extensions are to be assigned as follows:
4. The customer wants two DDI numbers to go to sub addresses on the ISDN Extension
5. A Sales ring group is required with DDI Number 7000028 and 202 and 203 as members
6. A Phantom Extension number is required for Service calls, a phantom number can be used to
identify a ring group on a non-display proprietary telephone.
Assign DDI numbers 7000036 & 7 to phantom numbers 366 & 367 to CO line keys on
extensions 201 & 202.
7. The customer wants to modify the outgoing CLI so that when 201 (Manager) makes a call
the Caller ID sent by the network is that of 203 (PA).
ANSWERS:
1. For this example a TD282 is used to provided the ISDN Extension (S-Bus) on Port 1 and the
TD290 provides the CO Lines.
Assign the TD290 Module to the lower external area.
Programming
Prog step / Description Contents
[109] Card Config S (TD282) : S3 (TD290) : E (TD170)
[450] PRI Config 8: Y - - -
[451] PRI Ref CO Set working channels to one CO and Spare
Channels to another (available ref. CO 5 ~ 8)
[605/6] O/G Permitted Extn. Set Spare ref. CO to Disabled
[615/6] O/G Permitted ISDN Extn Set Spare ref. CO to Disabled
2. If the system has been upgraded from a Version 4 Program Step 111 may have been
modified, this adds or removes digits from the DDI string. The Version 4 Software could
only translate a maximum of 6 DDI digits.
3. Set the DDI to number to a destination extension day and night.
The TD280 is an external module, which supplies 2 x ISDN2 Ports, either or both Ports can be
programmed for CO or ISDN Extension (S-Bus) working.
Note: Prog Step 109 and ISDN Configuration programming require a system reset to activate
a) Module installation.
• If the Module is fitted and the PBX is defaulted, the card will be assigned on power up.
• If you are adding the Module use Program step 109 to assign,
Assign “S” to the required Area
Only one CO Module can be assigned to the PBX at the same time. If the CO Module is
assigned to the lower Area the upper Areas must be assigned as an Extension “E”
(i.e. C; S; E1; E2).
b) Port numbering
When the TD280 is fitted to a TD1232 the upper DDK or
First Port is assigned as Port 7 (CO Lines 9 & 10)
Second Port is assigned as Port 8 (CO Lines 11 & 12)
Recommended combinations
Program [422] [423] [424] [425] [426]
ISDN Port ISDN Layer 1 ISDN ISDN Data ISDN TEI
Type Active Mode Configuration Link Mode Mode
CO Permanent Point Permanent Fix 0
(DDI)
CO Permanent Multipoint Call Automatic
Parameter (MSN)
Extension Call Multipoint Call Automatic
(S-Bus)
Installation Hints – ISDN Options
Installing a KX-TD281 Basic Rate Card (4 x ISDN2)
The TD282 is an internal card, which supplies 4 x ISDN2 Ports, Ports 3 & 4 can be programmed
for CO or ISDN Extension (S-Bus) working (Program & Jump Link has to be set).
Note: Prog Step 109 and ISDN Configuration programming require a system reset to activate
a) Card installation.
• If the Card is fitted and the PBX is defaulted, the card will be assigned on power up.
• If you are adding the Card use Program step 109 to assign,
Assign “S” to the required Area (i.e. S; C; E1; E2).
b) Port numbering
When the TD281 is fitted
Port 1 is assigned as CO Lines 1 & 2 to
Port 4 is assigned as CO Lines 7 & 8
Recommended combinations
Program [422] [423] [424] [425] [426]
ISDN Port ISDN Layer 1 ISDN ISDN Data ISDN TEI
Type Active Mode Configuration Link Mode Mode
CO Permanent Point Permanent Fix 0
(DDI)
CO Permanent Multipoint Call Automatic
Parameter (MSN)
Extension Call Multipoint Call Automatic
(S-Bus)
Installation Hints – ISDN Options
Installing a KX-TD286 Basic Rate Module (6 x ISDN2)
a) Module installation.
• If the Module is fitted and the PBX is defaulted, the card will be assigned on power up.
• If you are adding the Module use Program step 109 to assign,
Assign “S2” to the required Area
Only one CO Module can be assigned to the PBX at the same time. If the CO Module is
assigned to the lower Area the upper Area must be assigned as an Extension “E”
(i.e. C; S2; E1; E2).
b) Port numbering
When the TD286 is fitted to a TD1232 Ports are assigned as
Port 1 to 6 (CO Lines 1 to 12)
Recommended combinations
Program [440] [441] [442] [443] [444]
ISDN Port ISDN Layer 1 ISDN ISDN Data ISDN TEI
Type Active Mode Configuration Link Mode Mode
CO Permanent Point Permanent Fix 0
(DDI)
CO Permanent Multipoint Call Automatic
Parameter (MSN)
Extension Call Multipoint Call Automatic
(S-Bus)
Installation Hints – ISDN Options
Installing a KX-TD290 Primary Rate Module (30 channel)
c) Module installation.
• If the Module is fitted and the PBX is defaulted, the card will be assigned on power up.
• If you are adding the Module use Program step 109 to assign,
Assign “S3” to the required Area
Only one CO Module can be assigned to the PBX at the same time. If the CO Module is
assigned to the lower Area the upper Area must be assigned as an Extension “E”
(i.e. C; S3; E1; E2).
d) Port numbering
When the TD290 is fitted to a TD1232 the channels are assigned as
Channel 1 as CO 25 to Channel 30 as CO 54.
EXAMPLE:
1. The TD290 is being added to an existing PBX.
2. The Network supplier is sending 7 digits of DDI
3. The Extensions are to be assigned as follows:
4. The customer wants two DDI numbers to go to sub addresses on the ISDN Extension
5. A Sales ring group is required with DDI Number 7000028 and 202 and 203 as members
6. A Phantom Extension number is required for Service calls, a phantom number can be used to
identify a ring group on a non-display proprietary telephone.
Assign DDI numbers 7000036 & 7 to phantom numbers 366 & 367 to CO line keys on
extensions 201 & 202.
7. The customer wants to modify the outgoing CLI so that when 201 (Manager) makes a call
the Caller ID sent by the network is that of 203 (PA).
ANSWERS:
1. For this example a TD281 is used to provided the ISDN Extension (S-Bus) on Port 3 and the
TD290 provides the CO Lines.
Assign the TD290 Module to the lower external area.
Programming
Prog step / Description Contents
[109] Card Config S (TD281) : S3 (TD290) : E1; E2 (TD170)
[450] PRI Config 30: Y - N N
[451] PRI Ref CO Set working channels to one CO and Spare
Channels to another (available ref. CO 9 ~ 12)
[605/6] O/G Permitted Extn. Set Spare ref. CO to Disabled
[615/6] O/G Permitted ISDN Extn Set Spare ref. CO to Disabled
2. If the system has been upgraded from a Version 4 Program Step 111 may have been
modified, this adds or removes digits from the DDI string. The Version 4 Software could
only translate a maximum of 6 DDI digits.
3. Set the DDI to number to a destination extension day and night.
Specification
• The Maximum number of Portable Stations : PS(TD7500) is not dependent on the number of
Cell Stations : CS(TD142) or Interface Units : I/F(TD144 / TD146) fitted
( Maximum of 64 PS on a TD1232, Single or Double Cabinet)
( Maximum of 16 PS on a TD816 ).
• The Cell Station Interface units (TD144 / TD146) can only be fitted to the Master Cabinet only on
a double cabinet TD1232 installation.
• TD144 (DECT I/F Unit) supports 2 Cell Stations and 4 extension ports (with XDP)
( Each Cell Station supports 4 speech paths ).
• TD146 (DECT I/F Unit) supports 6 Cell Stations only (no extension ports).
• Maximum length of Cell Station to PBX cable is 1 K meter.
• A “Site-survey” must be taken at each customer site.
Quick Install
Follow the instructions under the following headings.
1. ‘Preparing the PBX for DECT’
2. ‘Registering the HANDSET ( PS )’
3. ‘General Handset Programming’
Note: Once the Master CS ID has been assigned and the PBX has downloaded the CS ID as the
System Radio ID, only defaulting the PBX would clear the Radio ID. The CS can be changed
if required.
1
Registering the Handset ( PS )
• Assign an extension number to each PS.
• Set the PBX to Register.
• Register PS to PBX one at a time.
• The PC screen / Keyphone display shows the PS waiting to register.
Registering a PS ( TD7500 )
Terminating PS registration
• To remove a PS from the system, so it cannot be used.
[ 25 ] PS Termination : Y
2
Registering PS to more than one PBXs
A DECT PS ( TD7500) can be registered on 4 separate DECT PBX’s ( KX-TD816/1232 )
The PS can be registered with a different PS number and Extension number for each System.
3
Site Surveying
4
Site Survey
• The CS should be located at the point where the signal strength from the nearest CS is at least
‘Level 3’.
• If Handover problems occur the signal strength between two adjacent CS could be poor, the CS may
not recognise the adjacent CS and could use the same channel ( 0 ~ 9 ), try relocating the CS closer.
But it is recommended to maintain a minimum distance of 5 metres between CS.
• For a good Handover the cross over should be ‘Level 8’ from both CS for a minimum of 3 metres.
• If additional speech paths are required in one area additional CS can be located in that area, but a
minimum distance of 5 metres should be maintained between two CS.
• When more than two CS are required to provide additional speech paths in one area only two CS
should be located within the RSSI Level 11 of any CS.
RSSI Level 11
CS CS CS
Min 5m
5
Installation Hints – Message Card
To allow an incoming call to be directed to a UCD Message.
Setup a Hunt Group as normal, but set the Hunt Type [106] as UCD
Basic programming:
Prog Step Contents
[134 ~ 135] Hunting Intercept An intercept destination must be set
to receive the OGM
[137 ~ 138] UCD Time Table Assignment Assign a Table to the UCD Group
[139] UCD Time Table Set the table with OGM selection
[216] O/G Message Time Default OGM 1 & 3 - 32 seconds
OGM 2 & 4 - 0 seconds
(Max record time 64 secs)
Example 1
Simple call waiting message.
Hunt Group 01 (Extn No 380) assigned as UCD group.
Continued:
Example 2
Playing an introduction message then playing a waiting message if the members of the
group are busy.
The index pages now include Jump Links to the referenced pages.
As one subject may refer to several pages, Jump Links have been associated with
each referenced page.
To use a Jump Link move the cursor over the required page number then left click the
mouse button.
To return to the Index page click the Left Arrow Button on the Tool Bar.
Page numbering, the first number represents the Section and the second number
represents the page within that Section.
An Index reference may have several associated pages, to help choose which page you
require a description of the contents of each section are listed below: